MACHINE DESIGN I
INSTRUCTION: Choose the correct answer to each of the following
questions. Mark only one answer per item by ENCIRCLING the LETTER
that corresponds to your selection. STRICTLY NO ERASURES ALLOWED;
USE ONLY BLACK BALLPEN. DEADLIN E: APRIL 30, 2024, 1:00 PM
SUBM IT AT ROOM 407. ATTACHED YOUR SOLUTION S.
1.
The minimum clearance allowed for meshing spur gears with a
circular pitch of 0.1571 and diametral pitch of 20. The spur gear
has 25 teeth.
A. 0.007855
C. 0.007558
B. 0.008578
D. 0.007585
2.
Compute the working strength of 1” bolt which is screwed up tightly
in packed joint when the allowable working stress is 13,000 psi.
A. 3600 lbs
C. 3900 lbs
B. 3950 lbs
D. 3800 lbs
3.
What is the working strength of a 2” bolt which is screwed up tightly
in a packed joint when the allowable working stress 12,000 psi?
A. 20,120 lbs
C. 20.400 lbs
B. 20,400 lbs
D. 20,200 lbs
4.
Compute the speed of the gear mounted on a 52.5 mm diameter
shaft receiving power from a driving motor with 250 hp.
A. 2182 rpm
C. 2282 rpm
B. 2071 rpm
D. 2341 rpm
5.
The minimum whole depth of spur gear of 14-1/2 deg. involute type
with diameter pitch of 24 and circular pitch of 0.1309:
A. 0.09000
C. 0.089875
B. 0.09900
D. 0.089758
6.
Heating the metal to a temperature above the critical temperature
and then cooling slowly usually in the furnace to reduce the
hardness and improve the machinability is called:
A. annealing
C. normalizing
B. tempering
D. quenching
7.
8.
9.
An internal gear is set up with a 5-in diameter pinion and center
distance of 18 inches. Find the diameter of the internal gear.
A. 36”
C. 26”
B. 21.5”
D. 41”
What force P is required to punch a ½ in. hole on a 3/8 in. thick
plate if the ultimate shear strength of the plate is 42,000 psi?
A. 24,940 lbs
C. 24,960 lbs
B. 24,620 lbs
D. 24,740 lbs
A hollow shaft has an inner diameter of 0.035 m and outer diameter
of 0.06 m. Determine the polar moment of inertia of the hollow
shaft.
C. 1.52 x 10-6 m4
A. 1.512 x 10-6 m4
B. 1.215 x 10-6 m4
D. 1.125 x 10-6 m4
10. A coiled spring with 5 cm of outside diameter is required to work
under the load of 190 N. The wire diameter is 5 mm, the spring is
to have 6 active coils and the ends are to be closed and ground.
Determine the total number of coils. The modulus of rigidity is 809
GPa and the mean radius is to be 23 mm, with 7 mm pitch of the
spring.
A. 6.5 coils
C. 8.5 coils
B. 7.5 coils
D. 9.5 coils
11. A helical spring having squared and ground ends has a total of 18
coils and its material has modulus of elasticity in shear of 78.910
GPa. If the spring has an outside diameter of 10.42 cm and a wire
diameter of 0.625 cm, compute in the spring due to a load of 50
kgs.
A. 302 mm
C. 490 mm *
B. 493 mm
D. 322 mm
TAKE-HOME EXAM SEMIFINAL EXAM
1
14. The tooth thickness of a gear is 0.5 inch and its circular pitch is 1.0
inch. Calculate the dedendum of the gear.
A. 0.3183
C. 0.3979
B. 1.250
D. 0.1114
15. The path of contact in involute gears where the force/power is
actually transmitted. It is a straight imaginary line passing through
the pitch point and tangent to the base circle.
A. principal reference plane
C. front angle
B. pitch point
D. line of action
16. Compute the pitch angle of a bevel gear given the pinion’s number
of teeth of 14 and 42 teeth on the gear.
A. 18.4 °
C. 33.4 °
B. 28.4 °
D. 38.4 °
17. Compute for the tooth thickness of 141/2 spur gear with diameter
pitch = 5.
A. 0.3979
C. 0.03141
B. 3.1831
D. 0.31416
18. If the weight of 6” diameter by 48” long SAE 1030 shafting is 174.5
kg. then what will be the weight of chromium SAE 51416 of same
size?
A. 305.5 lbs
C. 384.6 lbs
B. 426.4 lbs
D. 465.1 lbs
19. Compute the circular pitch (in inch) of a pair of gears having a ratio
of 4 and a center distance of 10.23. Each gear has 72 teeth and
pinion has 18 teeth.
A. 0.8095
C. 0.8035
B. 0.7825
D. 0.8085
20. A spur pinion rotates at 1800 rpm and transmits to a mating gear
30 HP. The pitch diameter is 4” and the pressure angles pressure
angle is 14 1/2. Determine the tangential load in lbs.
A. 495
C. 535
B. 525
D. 475
21. A high alloy spring having squared and ground ends and has a total
of 16 coils and modulus of elasticity in shear of 85 GPa. Compute
the Wahl factor. The spring outside diameter is 9.66 cm and wire
diameter is 0.65 cm.
A. 1.058
C. 1.185
B. 1.10
D. 1.2
22. Two idlers of 28 T and 26 T are introduced between the 24 T pinion
with a turning speed of 400 rpm driving a final 96 T gear. What
would be the final speed of the driven gear and its direction relative
to the driving gear rotation?
A. 120 rpm and opposite direction
B. 100 rpm and opposite direction
C. 80 rpm and same direction
D. 100 rpm and same direction
23. The allowable stresses that are generally used in practice are 4 ksi
for main power transmitting shaft, 6 ksi for line shaft carrying
pulleys and 8.5 ksi for small short shaft/countershaft, etc. With
these allowable stresses what will be the simplified formula to
determine transmitted HP, diameter of the shaft or even the
rpm(N)?
C. all of these
A. HP=D3N/80
D. HP=D3N/38
B. HP=D3N/531/2
24. A helical gear a 14 ½ 0 normal pressure angle and transverse
diameter pitch of 2.3622 per cm. the helix angle is at 45 ° and has
8 teeth. Compute the transverse pressure angle in degrees.
A. 22.2 °
C. 18.9 °
B. 19.3 °
D. 20.1 °
12. How long will it take to mill a 3/4 “ by 2” long keyway in a 3”
diameter shafting with a 24 tooth cutter turning at 100 rpm and
0.005” feed/tooth?
A. 0.136 min.
C. 0.166 min.
B. 0.196 min.
D. 0.106 min.
25. The U.S standard gage for iron and steel was established in 1893
which is primarily a weight gage. The basis is the weight of wrought
iron which is at _______ lbs. per cubic foot.
A. 480
C. 490
B. 493
D. 488
13. A steel cylindrical air receiver with 5 ft diameter and pressure load
of 180 psi, design stress of 9500 psi maximum. The pressure vessel
is to be provided with 1 ½ in. diameter drain valve installed at the
bottom of the vessel and safety pressure relief valve installed either
at the top most or at the side with pop – out rating of 200 psi.
Assume a 100 % weld joint efficiency. The lap welding tensile
strength is 65,000 psi. Determine the bursting pressure of this air
receiver.
A. 1154 psi
C. 1454 psi
B. 1354 psi
D. 1254 psi
26. Brazing is more superior than soldering in joining metals because:
A. all of these
B. molten metal flaws between joints because of capillary forces
C. it has slight diffusion of metal involved
D. higher melting temperature joining
PREPARED BY: ENGR. DEOLINDA E. CAPARROSO
27. A ball is thrown vertically upward with a speed of 24.38 m/s. Then
2 seconds later a second ball is projected vertically upward too with
a speed of 18.28 m/s. At what point above will they meet?
A. 17.62m
C. 16.62 m
B. 15.62 m
D. 21.62 m
CEBU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY-MAIN CAMPUS
MACHINE DESIGN I
28. The purpose of is to prevent gears from jamming together and
making contact on both sides of their teeth simultaneously
A. tooth fillet
C. backlash
B. stress relieving
D. all of these
29. A spur pinion supported on each side by ball bearings rotates 1750
rpm and transmit to a mating gear at 25 Hp. The pressure angle is
20 degrees and the pitch diameter is 5. Determine the tangential
load in lbs.
A. 420
C. 360
B. 300
D. 400
30. In a spring design, spring index of 7 through 9 is best 4 through 7
and 9 through 16 are often used but spring index of________should
be avoided due to difficulties in making etc.
A. all of these
C. 5 or less
B. less than 5
D. 4
31. Allowance added in the casting pattern to compensate for the
contraction of metal
A. tapering allowance
C. finish allowance
B. shrinkage allowance
D. draft pattern
32. Ratio of the angle of action to the pitch angle
A. contact ratio
C. ratio of gearing
B. approach ratio
D. module
33. The angle made by the helix of the thread(in a straight thread) at
the pitch diameter with a plane perpendicular to the axis
called__________
A. angle of thread
C. lead angle
B. truncation
D. lead
34. In the interest of design simplification and good kinematic
compromise bevel gears adopted a standard pressure angle of
___________degrees.
C. 141/2 involute full depth
A. 20 ° involute stub
B. 20 °
D. 171/2
35. In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often defined as the angle
between the line of action and the line of tangent to the pitch circle.
It is also termed asA. helix angle
C. Angle of obliquity
B. angle of recess
D. Arc of action
36. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the radial distance between
pitch circle and top land of the tooth.
A. top root
C. land
B. addendum
D. hunting tooth
37. It is generally recommended and normal for a designer to add a
hunting tooth to evenly distribute the wear on meshing teeth like a
53 teeth gears mesh with 30 teeth pinion. Find the rotation of pinion
to mesh with same pair of teeth again
A. 120
C. 61
B. 81
D. 53
38. The ratio of the pitch diameter in inches to the number of teeth
A. pitch circle
C. module
B. English module *
D. pitch diameter
39. _______is a unit or energy?
A. ft.-lb.
B. hp
C. BTU/hr.
D. watt
40. The distance between similar, equally-spaced tooth surfaces in a
given direction and along a given line.
A. pitch circle
C. pitch
B. pitch plane
D. pitch diameter
41. The use of hardened steel for the mating metal gear appears to
give the best results and longer operational life. The usual hardness
is in the range ofA. over 600 BHN
C. below 350 BHN
B. 300 to 400 BHN
D. over 400 BHN
42. The most known lubricants being utilized in whatever category of
load and speed are oil, air, grease and dry lubricants like
A. bronze
C. silicon
B. lead
D. graphite
43. Used
to
change
motion____________
A. rack gears
B. hypoid gears
rotary
motion
to
reciprocating
C. Helical gears
D. herringbone gears
44. The effective face width of a helical gear divided by gear axial pitch
A. approach ratio
C. Arc of recess
B. Arc of action
D. Face overlap
PREPARED BY: ENGR. DEOLINDA E. CAPARROSO
TAKE-HOME EXAM SEMIFINAL EXAM
2
45. Pitch diameter less the diameter of the roller chain is equal to:
A. top land
C. addendum
B. bottom diameter
D. Face overlap
46. Generally applied on speed reducer due to large speed ratio:
A. bevel gears
C. worm gears
B. helical gears
D. hypoid gears
47. Helix angle in the range of ______ degree is recommended for
wide-face helical gears
A. less than 15
C. 20 to 35
B. less than 20
D. 20 to 22
48. For an evenly distributed and uniform wear on each meshing gear
tooth, the ideal design practice is to consider a______________
A. wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gears
B. heat treatment of the gears
C. hardening of each tooth
D. hunting tooth addition
49. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of the pitch diameter
to the no. of teeth
A. lead
C. involute
B. module
D. clearance
50. The angle included between the sides of the thread measured in an
axial plane in a screw thread
A. angle of thread
C. Helix angle thread
B. Angle between thread or 40
D. Half angle thread or 20 °
51. Manganese steel standard designation, SAE_______
A. 13xx
C. 11xx
B. 10xx
D. 8xx
52. It is recommended not to have a direct drive between driven and
drive sprockets if the ratio of their teeth exceeds _______. Use 2 or
more step combination.
A. 10 times
C. 5 times
B. 8 times
D. 6 times
53. The length of the hub should not be made lesser than the face width
of the gear. Hub lengths usually vary from 1 25D to 2D where d is
the shaft diameter. The reasonable diameter of steel hub should
beA. 2D
C. 1.55 D
B. 1.8 D
D. 1.20 D
54. The sum of their addendums and dedendums
A. whole depth
C. width of space
B. full depth
D. working depth
55. Which of the phases of steel elements has a face-centered cubic
structure?
A. pyrite
C. all of these
B. austenite
D. cementite
56. Steel spring material is usually hardened to 400 to 500 BHN and the
carbon content is in the range of____
A. 0.50 to 0.90 %
C. 0.45 to 0.48
B. all of these
D. 0.96 to 0.97
57. Curve formed by the path of a point on a straight line as it rolls
along a convex base curve. The base curve is usually a circle and
generally used as the profile of gear tooth.
A. axial plane
C. arc or recess
B. involute
D. arc of action
58. ________is a plane perpendicular to the axial plane and to the pitch
plane in gears the parallel axes; and the plane of rotating coincide
A. tangent plane
C. transverse
B. straight plane
D. reference plane
59. A 36 tooth pinion with a turning speed of 300 rpm drives 120 tooth
gear of 14 ½ degrees involute full depth pressure angle . What
would be the speed of the driven gear?
A. 1000 rpm
C. 90 rpm
B. 100 rpm
D. 140 rpm
60. The surface along the fillet curves or between the fillets radius of
the two adjacent tooth or a gear
A. bottom land
C. fillet
B. flank
D. top land
61. Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the range of__________
A. 30 to 45
C. 25 to 30
B. 35 to 50
D. 15 to 20
CEBU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY-MAIN CAMPUS
MACHINE DESIGN I
62. The lack of backlash in a spur gear design/operation may result to
__________
A. overloading
C. all of these
B. jamming
D. overheating
63. The distance from a point on a screw thread to a corresponding
point on the next thread measure along the axis
A. flank
C. crest
B. lead
D. pitch
64. An eyebolt is lifting a block weighing 350 lbs. The eyebolt is of SAE
C 1040 material with Su = 67 ksi and S2 = 55 ksi what is the stress
area (in inches square) of the bolt if it is under the unified coarse
series thread?
A. 1341
C. 0991
B. 0.1134
D. 1043
65. Find the number of active coils of a No. 8 wire Helical Spring with
index of 6, steady load with spring rate of 42.5 lb/in . Maximum
allowable stress is 60 ksi
A. 25
C. 29
B. 28
D. 22
66. Steel springs are made of high carbon steel heat treated and/or cold
worked to a high elastic limit to get good elastic deflection. In
general the carbon content is at _________.
A. 0.40% or more
C. 0.5% or more
B. 0.65% or more
D. 0.66% or more
67. Compute the deflection of a 18 coils helical soring having a load of
100 kgs. The modulus of elasticity in shear of spring is 96.62 GPa,
OD of 9 256 cm and with diameter of 9 525 mm. The spring is
square and ground ends.
A. 9 mm
C. 112 mm
B. 101 mm
D. 14 mm
68. The normal helix angles in helical gear is recommended in the range
of ______degrees.
A. less than 18
C. 15 to 25
B. 20 to 35
D. 20 to 30
69. The distance between rivet center nearest each other in adjacent
rows is called ______
A. pitch
C. margin
B. back pitch
D. diagonal pitch
TAKE-HOME EXAM SEMIFINAL EXAM
B. Heat treatment
3
D. Dinking
77. Type of gear that transmits power at an angle
A. bevel
C. spur
B. herringbone
D. helix
78. A method whereby a gear is run with another gear that has abrasive
surface material.
A. hobbing
C. lapping
B. honing
D. milling
79. Two spur wheels in gear transmit a power 6.7 kW. The driver has
40 teeth of 12 mm pitch and runs at 7 rev/s,find the force on the
teeth.
A. 2.0 kN
C. 3.0 kN
B. 1.0 kN
D. 4.0 kN
80. The minimum whole depth of spur gear of 14-1/2 deg. Involute type
with diametral pitch of 24 and circular pitch of 0.1309.
A. 0.09000
C. 0.089875
B. 0.08900
D. 0.089758
81. A helical spring having squared and ground ends has a total of 18
coils and its material has modulus of elasticity in shear of 78.910
GPa. If the spring has an outside diameter of 10.42 cm and a wire
diameter of 0.625 cm, compute the maximum deflection that can
be produced in the spring due to a load of 50 kgs.
A. 302 mm
C. 490 mm
B. 342 mm
D. 409 MM
82. The tooth thickness of a gear is 0.5 inch and its circular pitch is 1.0
inch. Calculate the dedendum of the gear.
A. 0.3278
C. 0.3979
B. 0.3879
D. 0.1115
83. A 500 RPM shaft is fitted with a 30 inches diameter pulley weighing
250 lbs. this pulley delivers 89,055.196 Btu/hr to a load. The shaft
is also fitted with a 24 inches pitch diameter gear weighing 200 lbs.
This gear delivers 25 hp to a load. Assume that the tension of the
tight side of the belt is twice that on the slack side of the belt,
determined the concentrated load produced on the shaft by the
gear in Newton.
A. 507 N
C. 504 N
B. 500 N
D. 501 N
70. A pair of gear with gear ratio of 3 and 60 gear teeth of 14 ½ degree
full depth tooth. The diametral pitch is 10. Compute the tooth
thickness on the pitch circle
A. 0.570 inch
C. 0.157 inch
B. 0.352 inch
D. 0.142 inch
84. Two shafts are connected by spur gears. The pitch diameters of the
gears A and B are 207 mm and 842 mm respectively. If shaft A
makes 350 rpm and is subjected to twisting moment of 236 N-m,
what is the tooth pressure of the two gears? (10 points)
A. 2436 N & 2357 N
C. 2456 N & 2345 N
B. 2426 N & 2375 N
D. 2427 N & 2355 N
71. Compute the maximum deflection of a 20 coils helical spring having
a load of 75 kgs. The spring is a square/ground ends with modulus
of elasticity in shear of 79.84 GPa outside diameter of 101.6 mm
wire diameter of a 9 525 mm
A. 140.7 mm
C. 15.17 mm
B. 112.7 mm
D. 126.7 mm
85. A gear having 60 teeth is driven by a 12-tooth gear turning at 800
rpm. What would be the speed of the driven gear if a 24-teeth idler
were placed between the driving and driven gear? What is the
speed of the driven gear? Note: Draw the gears showing their
direction of rotation. A plain circle to represent the gears for
purposes of showing the rotation is acceptable. (6 points)
72. Compute the diameter of a solid shaft transmitting 75 Hp at 1800
rpm. The nature of the load and the type of service is such that the
allowable Ss based on pure torsion is 6000 psi
A. 1 7/8”
C. 1 5/16”
B. 2 1/16”
D. 3 1/8”
73. A Keyed gears deliver a torque of 912.4 Nm thru its shaft of 63.5
mm outside diameter. If the key has thickness of 15.875 mm and
width of 11.1125 find the length of the key. Assume the permissible
stress values of 61.2 MPa for shear and tension at 99.8 MPa.
A. 47.42 mm
C. 42.22 mm
B. 39.72 mm
D. 46.92 mm
74. A pair of gear/pinion of 42 tooth and 18 tooth with a diametral pitch
of 0.7874 teeth/cm and the addendum is 0.8/p and dedendum 1/p.
The gear pressure angle of 20 ° . Compute the center distance of
the pair of gears in meters
A. 0.5026 m
C. 0.3516 m
B. 0.3426 m
D. 0.4013 m
75. The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut after heat treatment
should have a hardness in the range of 210/300 BHN. The pinion
gear teeth hardness, on the other hand ideally/normally should be
at_BHN
A. 250/320
C. 400
B. 350/380
D. 340/350
76. Gears are manufactured usually in the following processes: milling,
generating, shaving, grinding and ___which is also used.
A. Blanking
C. Molding
PREPARED BY: ENGR. DEOLINDA E. CAPARROSO
CEBU TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY-MAIN CAMPUS
100. Joining metal by means produces forge weld: Resistance Welding
99. For better mounting of bearing as overheating: 250
98. Herring bone gears are gears: Have a line contact between teeth
97. Specification of molybdenum alloy: SAE 4xxx
96. For large speed ratio and large sprocket, fewer engagement: Iron
95. What is the function clutch : To connect shaft so that the driven….
94. A machine used to enlarge a hole by means of adjustable cutting: Boring machine
93. The height of tooth above the pitch circle: Addendum
92.A kind of gears used to transmit motion , at an angle to the first: Bevel Gears
91. Which of the following does not have to be lubricated when drilling: Brass
90. In testing a material for endurance strength, subjected to: Completely reversed load
89.How do you call steel with 0.8% carbon and 100% pearlite: Austenite*
88. A single forces which produces the same, several forces acting together: Resultant
87. The operation of marking a cone-shaped enlargement of the end of a hole:
Counterskinking
86. A gripping device with two or more adjustable jaws radially: Chuck
85. A machine tool used to cut metal parts of light, medium, reciprocating: power saw
84.In the usual spur gearing: Tooth outline are usually involute curves
83. A device for accurately measuring diameters: Micrometer
82. A twist drill is specified: Shank, material, diameter
81. A machine tool for flat surfaces on pieces too large: planer
80. A set of gages consisting of thin strips: Feeler gage
79.What is the carbon range of SAE 4140: 0.38/0.43*
78. A material that can wear away : Abrasive
77.During tensile test,fits for a glass rod: A sudden break
76. Corresponding piping color for alkaline: Violet
75. Pulley made of, is 45% to 55% less in weight: Steel/iron
74. A machine tool used to machine flat with a single point: Shaper
73. What tool in foundry smothering and cleaning out depression: Bellows*
72.is one of the rigid members joined together to form kinematic chain: Link
71. In case of gears the addendum is given by: one module
70. In general, the design stressand factor of safety are related: Design Stress=ult.stress
divided by factor of safety
69. A kind of gears used for heavy duty works where a large ratio of speed is: Worm gears
68. In a lathe, used to operate the quick change gear mechanism: Headstock
67.Which of the following gasket material is not used In high temp.: Rubberized
66.A cold chisel is made of what: high carbon steel
65. Which of the following will best describes sunk key: The key is cut in both shaft and hub
64. When meshed with gear, it is used to change rotary: Gear rack
63. What is recommended best cutting angle: 59 degrees
62.Which of the following is not a common term classification of fits: Bound
61.The process of heating a piece of steel to a temperature and cooling rapidly: Hardening
60. Is a kinematic chain in which one link is considered fixed: Frame
59. Which of the following is not an angle measuring device: Angle iron
58. Heating above transformation temperature, quenching in oil, increasing the hardness:
hardening
57.Which of the following is used to measure the clearance: Feeler gauge
56. AN alloy of copper and zinc : brass
55. Coaxing is the procedure of increasing: Fatigue limit by overstressing
54. A plane perpendicular to the gear axis: plane of rotation
53. The distance from center of one tooth of a gear to the center of the next: circular pitch
52.A machine tool used in flat surface pieces too large: Planer
51. The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile test specimen divided: %elongation
50. Type of gear that transmits power at an angle: Bevel
49. The shop term used to include the marking inscribe : Laying Out
48. Reheating to a temperature below the transformation range, any desired rate of cooling:
Tempering
47.What is the usual percentage of cut on the return stroke of hacksaw: 0
46. It fits into the main spindle of a lathe, it revolves with the work: Live center
45. Rope brake dynamometer uses what: No lubricant
44. Cutting speed for some materials are under which one of the following: 40 m/min
43. How many links are there in a pantograph: lower pairs
42. In usual spur gearing, which of the following statement is correct: Tooth outline are
usually involute curves
41. A hand tool used to measure tension on bolts: Torque wrench
40. What tool is used in foundry for repairing the mould: Swab
39. A machine tool used to machine flat or plane surfaces single point: shaper
38. A manganese steel containing approximately 0.20% carbon: SAE 1320
37. How do you call the distance of the tooth which is equal to the sum of : Whole depth
36.The ability of metal to withstand loads with breaking down is: Strength
35. The tool used in precision work to smooth or enlarge holes: Reamer
33.The portion of the gear tooth space that is cut below the pitch: dedendum
32. The draft allowance on metallic pattern: Less
30. How do you call a cam in the follower oscillates: cylindrical cam
29. A mechanism which usually o in the indexing in a machine tool: Dividing Head
28. How is the material described if it recovers its original dimensions: Elastic
27. Which of the following is the best process for butt welding: Electro slag welding
26. Which of the following where turn buckle has: Left hand threads on one end and right
hand threads on other
25.Which of the following pirs is formed if shaft is revolve in bearing: Lower pair
24.A kind of bolts which has no head: stud bolts
23. The forces of attraction between two bodies is directly proportional: law of gravitation
22.If t is the thickness, then electrode tip diameter is equal to: 2 sq.rt. of t
21. The diameter of the washer is generally: slightly more than the diameter of the bolt
20.The uniform heating of steel above, followed by cooling in air: Normalizing
19. If V is the volume of metal in casting and A is its surface area, then time of solidification
is: V sq.,1/A sq.***
18. The operation of machining the end of a workpiece, end square: Squaring
17. A type of bolt usesd in bolting wooden parts together: carriage bolt
16. When measuring a drill for size, measure across: Margins
15. When large number of components are turned and parted off: Magnetic chuck
14. A machine tool used to sharpen tool by using abrasive: tool grinder
13. How do you ratio the volumetric stress to volumetric strain: Bulk modulus
12.If the first digit in AISI and SAE designations is one, it indicates: Carbon Steels
11.In general, to engage securely and prevent dragging:2-3 mm
10. Fatigue failure occurs when part is subjected to: Fluctuating stress
9. The process of checking or producing checkers on the surface of a piece by rolling
checkered depressions: Knurling
8. To enhance mechanical properties ,it is added: Alloy steel
7. The operation of enlarging a hole by means of an adjustable cutting tool with only one cut
edge: Boring
6. The column splice is used for increasing: Length of the column
5. The resultant of a pair of equal forces but opposite in direction is called: Couple
4. In case of a knuckle joint, the pin I most likely to fail: Double shear
3. The same material properties all over/direction and at any particular point in a structural
member is: Isotropic
2. Which of the following statements is true for the internal stresses in welded: Internal
stresses are not relieved when weld is peened.
1.Which of the following where the gear tooth vernier is used to measure: Gear tooth Profile
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
Toaz - Yeah
Exam C1000-170 IBM Cloud Technical Advocate v5 (AMA University and Colleges)
Scan to open on Studocu
Studocu is not sponsored or endorsed by any college or university
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
Machine Design Elements I past board exam
Study online at quizlet.com/_6vdalg
1. ...
...
2. The 3 most commonly used cam and follower
c. swinging
system are radial and offset translating
roller follower and ______ roller follower.
a. reversing
b. pulsating
c. swinging
d. actuating
3. The ability of a metal to be deformed
a. plasticity
its density expressed in the same terms of
units is also called_________.
a. centistokes
b. kinematics viscocity
c. Petroff's equation
d. light petroleum oil
6. The acceleration of the point of contact is
c. stiffness
b. kinematics
viscocity
eventually fail if the load/stress is above the
endurance for the steel under consideration.
The endurance limit of the steel is therefore
a. equal to the allowable stress at the module
of elasticity
b. equal to half the ultimate strength
c. equal to the module of elasticity
d. equal to 80% of the elastic limit
13. Alloy steel used in manufacturing bolts, tubings
subjected to torsional stresses
a. AISI 3141
b. AISI 2330
c. AISI 4830
d. AISI 4310
c. v²/r
a. rv²
b. rw²
c. v²/r
d.w²/v
7. An act of cutting out a piece of metal at a
metal working tools.
a. titanium, phosporous
b. tungsten, silicon, hadfield mn
c. vanadium, chromium, molybdenum
d. high carbon steel
12. Alloy steel axle under repeated load/stress will
a. plasticity
b. all of these
c. stiffness
d. toughness
5. The absolute viscocity of the fluid divided by
except:
a. SAE 43XX
b. SAE 13XX
c. SAE 10XX
d. SAE 74XX
11. The alloy materials used in the production of
considerably without rupture is called:
a. plasticity
b. all of these
c. ductility
d. malleability
4. Ability to resist deformation under stress
10. All are associated with the grade of steel
b. blanking
desired shape and size
a. broaching
b. blanking
c. slitting
d. dinking
14. Alloy that improves strength of steel at high
temperature application.
a. aluminum
b. manganese
c. silicon
d. chromium
15. All yerms and abbreviations deal with wire rope
8. ________ addition imparts resistance to
c. copper
atmospheric corrosion in steel, etc.
a. aluminum bronze
b. manganese
c. copper
d. bronze
specification except
a. American Iron and Steel Institute
b. Society of Automotive Engineers
c. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel Institute
d. American Society for Testing Materials
c. Southeast
Asia Iron
and Steel
Institute
d. high
carbon
b. equal
to half
the
ultimate
strength
b. AISI
2330
d.
chromium
c.Mps
arrangement except this ______which deals with
wire rope material strength
a. preformed
b. IWRC
c. Mps
d. lang lay
16. Almost always the soldering materials are a
9. All are associated with standard material
d. SAE
74XX
combination of the following alloys
a. all of these
b. lead and tin
c. tin and antimony
d. lead and antimony
17. Also called eccentrically loaded bearing is
a. full bearings
b. offset bearings
c. partial bearing
d. fitted bearings
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
b. lead
and tin
b. offset
bearings
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
18. The amount by which the dedendum in a given
gear/pinion exceeds the addendum of its
mating pinion/gear. Also between the top of a
tooth and the bottom of the mating tooth
space.
a. tip relief
b. top land
c. clearance
d. space
c.
clearance
a. angle
of thread
20. The angle made by the helix of the thread (in a
a. lead
angle
straight head) at the pitch diameter with a
plabe perpendicular to the axis is called
a. lead angle
b. truncation
c. lead
d. angle of thread
21. The application of electrical current to the
corrosion circuit to counter the corrosion
reaction is called
a. cathodic protectiin
b. sacrificial anodes method
c. chemical corrosion process
d. galvanic action
22. The arc of action to circular pitch or length of
action to base pitch.
a. approach ratio
b. contact ratio
c. arc of action
d. arc of approach
23. As a rule of thumb the depth of foundation
b. contact
ratio
a. 4.20
distance between sprockets
should not be less than ______times the bigger
sprocket
a. 2.26
b. 1 3/4
c. 1 1/2
d. 2.59
the journal is also called________
a. offset bearing
b. full bearing
c. centrally loaded bearind. babbitt bearing
29. The best instrument for measuring a thousand
of an inch
a. micrometer
b. tachometer
c. caliper
d. pyrometer
30. The best materials for brake drums is
a. keyseat
b. full
bearing
a.
micrometer
b. cast iron
a. aluminum
b. cast iron
c. steel material
d. wrought iron
31. Bevel gears subjected to corrosion and lightly
loaded are usually made of _______
a. bronze
b. brass
c. all of these
d. duralumin
32. Big chain sprocket wheels are designed with
c. 1 1/2
a. 10 to 20
and shaft
a. keyseat
b. cotter in pin seat
c. flute
d. set screw point
28. Bearing surface that completely surrounds
a.
cathodic
protection
d. outer
most fiber
machinery foundations, a mass of weight
equal to _____ times the forces needed
a. 10 to 20
b. 8 to 15
c. 15 to 20
d. 8 to 10
27. Axially located rectangular groove in a hub
could be about 3.2 to ________times the engine
stroke
a. 4.20
b. 4.0
c. 3.40
d. 3.80
24. As recommended the center to center
bending stress occurs at the_______.
a. maximum shear stress area
b. neutral axis
c. web joint near the flange
d. outer most fiber
26. Avoidance of vibration in equipment or
The angle included between the sides of
thread measured in an axial plane in a screw
thread
a. angle of thread
b. angle between thread or 40
c. helix angle thread
d. half angle tgread or 20
19.
25. At a given section of an I beam the maximum
spokes/arms are generally elliptical in cross
section with major axis_______times the minor
axis.
a. 2
b. 2 1/2
c. 1 1/2
d. 3
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. all of
these
a. 2
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
33. The blades for hacksaw have number of teeth
range of
a. 15-38 tooth/inch
b. 14-32 tooth/inch
c. 12-30 tooth/inch
d. 12-32 tooth/inch
34. The bottom surface joining two sides of
b. 14-32
tooth/inch
d. root
thread in screw
a. pitch
b. crest
c. bottom land
d. root
41. The change in shape or geometry of the body
42. The characteristic of tool steel to sustain
35. the brittleness in steel at elevated
temoerature is ______
a. hard drawn
b. cold lap
c. red shortness
d. residual stresses
c. red
shortness
d. strains
due to action of a force on it is called
deformation or___
a. shear stress
b. stresses
c. compressive stress
d. strains
shocks and major impacts is due to its
a. toughness
b. stiffness
c. ductility
d. machinability
43. Chromium steel standard designation, SAE ____
a.
toughness
b. 5XXX
a. 92XX
b. 5XXX
c. 3XXX
d. 11XX
36. Cam in general may be divided into two
classes: uniform motion cam and _____motion
cam
a. reverse
b. gravity
c. decelerated
d. accelerated
37. A carbon content in the range of _____ in
steel readily responds to heat treatment.
a. 0.35 to 0.40%C
b. 0.28 to 0.30%C
c. 0.18 to 0.25%C
d. 0.12 to 0.15% C
38. Cast iron flywheels are commonly designed
d.
accelerated
resistant ) designation
a. SAE56XX
b. SAE514XX
c. SAE61XX
d. SAE9XXX
45. Class of material exhibiting decreased
a. 0.35 to
0.40%C
a. 10 to 13
with a factor of safety of
a. 10 to 13
b. 10 to 12
c. 10 to 14
d. 8 to 13
39. The cast iron flywheels designed with a
44. Chromium steel (to include heat and corrosion
b. 10 to 13
factor of safety of _____
a. 14 to 15
b. 10 to 13
c. 8 to 9
d. 6 to 12
an engine can be found in any power plant
or power generating unit.
a. 24 in
b. 22 in
c. 23 in
d. 25 in
b. 22 in
c. metals
electrical conductivity with increasing
temperature
a. aluminum
b. p-type semiconductors
c. metals
d. n-type semiconductors
46. Clearance to a new boiler installation to the
existing or old plant building should follow a
minimum clearance of _____ between top of the
boiler primer and the ceiling as stated in the
PSME code.
a. 200 mm (max)
b. 1000 mm (max)
c. 2130 mm (max)
d. 2159 mm (max)
47. Cold drawing is also called
40. The catwalk standard required for cleaning
b.
SAE514XX
a. hard drawn
b. cold lap steel
c. strain hardening
d. oxidized steel
48. Cold rolled shafting is not available in diameter
larger than _____.
a. 6 inches
b. 5 inches
c. 6 1/2 inches
d. 5 1/2 inches
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. 2130
(max)
a. hard
drawn
b. 5
inches
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
49. Cold working of steel plates make the metal
c. harder
a. tougher
b. more ductile
c. harder
d. more malleable
50. Common defects encountered in the foundry
shop steel casting operating and also in
welding practices.
a. cracks
b. cold shot
c. parting line
d. blow/pin holes
51. Commonly used/produced screws/bolts/nuts
d.
blow/pin
holes
a. UNC
because of its easy availability and cheap price.
a. silicon
b. aluminum
c. zinc
d. manganese
53. Compute the cutting speed in fpm of a
54. The concave portion of the tooth profile where
it joins the bottom of the tooth.
a. root circle
b. fillet radius
c. fillet curves
d. fillet
in the operation. Made of alternate bolting of
steel, leather, fabrix, and / or plastic material
into two flanges.
a. flexible disk coupling
b. flexible toroidal spring coupling
c. flexible Oldham coupling
d. elastic material bonded coupling
60. Curved formed by the path of a point on a
a. 52
workpiece with 2 inches diameter and running
at 100 rpm
a. 52
b. 62
c. 25
d. 26
straight line as it rolls along a convex base
curve. The base curve is usually a circle and
generally used as the profile of gear tooth
a. axial plane
b. involute
c. arc of recess
d. arc of action
61. A cutting tool angle between the side cutting
c. fillet
curves
edge and the plane perpendicular to direction
of feed trabel is _______angle
a. side relief
b. side cutting edge
c. lead
d. side rake
62. The cutting tool used the shaper are similar to
55. The conical surface at the starting end of the
thread is called______
a. pitch cone
b. chamfer
c. crest
d. flute
b.
chamfer
sprockets should be_____pitches.Very long
center distance caused catenary tension in the
chain.
a. 70
b. 80
c. 90
d. 100
b.80
a.
flexible
disk
coupling
b.
involute
d. side
rake
a. planer
turning tools of ______machine.
a. planer
b. broaching
c. boring
d. lathe
63. The cutting up to 70⁰ is best for drilling
56. Consider a maximum safe center distance of
d. force
a. power
b. inertia
c. work
d. force
59. A coupling that allows axial flexibility movement
b.
aluminum
b. 80
sprockets should be _______ pitches. Very long
center distance cause catenary tension in the
chain.
a. 70
b. 80
c. 60
d. 50
58. Could be defined as simply push or pull
and for engineering applications is a series
a. UNC
b. ANSI
c. withworth
d. UNF
52. Commonly used steel melter as deoxidizer
57. Considered a maximum safe center distance of
extremely hard metals and for soft materials
____degrees may be applied
a. 60
b. 45
c. 40
d. 48
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. 40
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
64. Deals only with the motion of
d. kinematics
bodies without reference to
the forces that cause them
a. dynamics
b. kinetics
c. static
d. kinematics
65. Deflection of a beam is
a. proportional to the modulus
of elasticity and moment of
inertia
b. proportional to the load
imposed and inversely to the
length squared
c. inversely proportional to the
modulus of elasticity and
moment of inertia
d. inversely proportional to the
weight imposed times the
length
66. Designated pipe color used in
71. The difference between cast steel and
c. inversely proportional
to the modulus of
elasticity and moment of
inertia
b. light orange
d. white
communication
a. silver gray
b. aluminum gray
c. bare
d. white
68. Designed 200 kw plant must
safety are related in the
folowing manner
a. design stress = ultimate
stress/factor of safety
b. ultimatevstress=factor of
safety/design
c. design stress=factor of
safety/times stress
concentration factor
d. none of these
cast iron
a. all of these
b. cast steel has usually less than 1%C
while cast iron has 2% or 3.6% carbon
range
c. cast iron has lower strength more
brittle and has lower ductility than cast
steel
d. iron is usually the initial product after
purifying iron ore then further
processing by removal of more
impurities and carbon content to be
able to prodyce steel grade
72. Difference between maximum material
a. PME
the ______.
a. deflection of the beam
b. compressive strength of the beam
c. tensile strength of the beam
d. load on the beam
74. The distance a helical gear or worm
a. design stress = ultimate
stress/factor of safety
c. cast iron has
lower strengtg
more brittle and
has lower
ductility than cast
steel
d. allowance
limits of mating parts. Or it is a minimum
clearance or maximum interference
parts.
a. tolerance
b. fits
c. variance
d. allowance
73. The differential of the shear equation is
be at least
a. PME
b. CPM
c. ME and PME
d. none of these
69. The design stress and factor of
c. tachometer
speed:
a. speedometer
b. dial indicator
c. tachometer
d. dial gauge
electricity
a. light blue
b. light orange
c. green
d. white
67. Designated puoe color used in
70. Device used to measure accurately
d. load on the
beam
d. lead
thread along its axis in one revolution if
it were free to move axially is called
a. length if action
b. line of action
c. land
d. lead
75. The distance between rivet centers
nearest each other in adjacent rows is
called
a. pitch
b. back pitch
c. margin
d. diagonal pitch
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a. pitch
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
76. The distance between similar, equally spaced
c. pitch
tooth surfaces in a given direction and along a
given line
a. pitch circle
b. pitch plabe
c. pitch
d. pitch diameter
77. The distance from a point on a screw thread to
to the ultimate strength but not with_____
a. yield syrength
b. design stress
c. shear syress
d. all of the above
85. An example of rectilinear translation
d. pitch
a corresponding point on the next measure
along the axis.
a. radial
b. module
c. thickness
d. pitch
78. The distance from a point on a screw thread to
between the crest of the thread and the root
of its mating thread in a thread assembly of
screws
a. tolerance class
b. crest truncation
c. crest clearance
d. tolerance limit
80. ___________ does not affect the tensile strength
d. pitch
c. crest
clearance
wire rope design starts at 3-4 for standing
rope application, 5-12 for operating rope
and _____for hazard to life and property
application lime foundry operation
a. higher valyes
b. 7-10
c. 8-10
d. 10-18
88. Fast process of analyzing all elements and
d. baron
chemical components of steel casting
a. pyrometer
b. carbon analyzer
c. wet analyzer
d. spectrometer
89. The five principal parts of a shaper are, the
c.
tapping
81. Drilling machine cannot do
a. reaming
b. spot facing
c. tapping
d. broaching
divided by gear axial pitch
a. approach ratio
b. arc of action
c. arc of recess
d. face overlap
a.
approach
ratio
d. spring
b. 6x37
a. higher
values
d.
spectrometer
a. column
c. 6000
used in a speed in excess of ______fpm
a. 3600
b. 4800
c. 6000
d. all of these
91. The flux that should be avoided in soldering
83. An elastic body whose primary function is to
c. piston of
an engine
table, tool,slide, base, ram and ______
a. column
b. vise
c. drive motor
d. apron
90. Flat leather belting not recommended for
82. The effective face width of a helical gear
a. yield
strength
______
a. 6x17
b. 6x37
c. 6x9
d. 6x21
87. The factor of safety generally applied in
of steel.
a. sulphur
b. cobalt
c. phosphorous
d. baron
deflect under load
a. clutch
b. stopper
c. brake
d. spring
a. locomotive wheels
b. rack gears
c. piston of an engine
d. jack
86. Extra flexible hoisting rope applications is
a corresponding point on the next thread
measure along the axis
a. flank
b. lead
c. crest
d. pitch
79. Distance measured perpendicular to the axis
84. Endurance strength is nearly proportional
electrical connection or commutator wires
as it tends to corrode the connections.
a. sal ammoniac
b. zinc chloride
c. stearin
d. acid fluxes
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d. acid
fluxes
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
92. The following are parts of a micrometer
caliper except for
a. thimble
b. head screw
c. spindle
d. anvil
93. The following pertain to joining of metals
b. head
screw
100. Formed by the interaction of the adjacent flanks
c. casting
101. For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal
except
a. welding
b. soldering
c. casting
d. brazing
of adjacent threads when extended is called
a. crest apex
b. all of these
c. sharp root
d. sharp crest
ratio of contact is
a. 1.25-4
b 1.2- 1.45
c. 1.0-1.3
d. 1.35-1.45
94. For acceptable ideal range of tightness which
d. fit
may cause from the application of specific
combination of allowances and tolerances
strength steel the cutting fluid applied have
soluble oil with consistency of 1 part oil to
_____parts water.
a. 10 to 30
b. 10
c. 5 to 10
d. 10 to 20
a. allowance limit
b. tolerance limit
c. interference
d. fit
95. For a high corrosion resistant stainless steel,
a. 8%
what minimum chromium content is required?
a. 8%
b. 4.3%
c. 1.1%
d. 5.8%
96. For an evenly and uniform wear on each
meshing gear tooth, the ideal design practice
is to consider a______
a. wear resistance alloy addition to tooth
gears
b. heat treatment of the gears
c. hardening of each tooth
d. hunting tooth addition
97. ______ forces means when their lines of action
can be extended to meet to one point.
a. concurrent
b. centroids
c. collinear
d. resultants
98. ________forces when action are parallel
a. couple
b. non collinear
c. resultant
d. non concurrent
99. For economical cost in the manufacturing
large worm gears the following materials are
usually apllied
a. bronze rim with cast steel spider
b. cast iron rim with bronze spider
c. cast steel rim with brass spider
d. alloyed aluminum rim with cast iron spider
102. For ordinary turning, drilling and milling on low
d. hunting
tooth
addition
103. For stable equipment foundation, the total
combined engine, driven equipment and
foundation center of gravity must be kept below
the foundations top that usually about_____ times
the usual total combined weight of the machine it
is supposed to support
a. 3 to 4
b. 3 to 7
c. 2 to 4
d. 3 to 5
104. The frictional forces depends on coefficient of
a.
concurrent
friction and
a. torque
b. weights of object
c. normal force
d. moment
105. From experience specify the conventional limit
d. non
concurrent
of flywheel operations to be at 6000 ft/min for
cast iron and _________ft/min for cast steel
a. 7000
b. 8000
c. 10000
d. 12000
a. bronze
rim with
cast steel
spider
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d.
sharp
crest
a. 1.254
d. 10
to 20
d. 3 to
5
c.
normal
force
d.
12000
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
106. The function of clutch is
a. lowering of drive speed
b. alignment of drive shaft
c. to disconnect or connect the
drive at will
d. to insure that two shafts line up
at high speed
107. A furnace in melting non-ferrous
metals
a. cupola furnace
b. crucible furnace
c. insuction furnace
d. tempering furnace
108. A furnace used in melting ferrous
metals
a. annealing furnace
b. tempering furnace
c. induction furnace
d. normalizing furnace
c. to disconnect
or connect
the drive at will
114. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the
b. crucible
furnace
115. Helix angle in the range of_______degrees is
c. induction
furnace
116. Hypoid gear is a special type of gear like
radial distance between pitch circle and top
land of the tooth
a. top root
b. addendum
c. land
d. hunting tooth
recommended for wide-face helical gears.
a. less than 15
b. less than 20
c. 20 to 35
d. 20 to 22
a. worm gear
b. spur gear
c. herringbone gear
d. bevel gear
117.
109. generally applied on reducer due to
c. worm gears
large speed ratio.
a. bevel gears
b. helical gears
c. worm gears
d. hypoid gears
118. The ideal thickness of a cutter at the pitch line
110. The good deoxidizer in steel melting
A good general purpose deoxidizer
and promotes fine grain in steel
a. copper
b. magnesium
c. molybdenum
d. silicon
112. Good stabilizer in stainless steel
d. silicon
119.
c. all of these
a. columbium
b. titanium
c. all of these
d. tantalum
If a set of spur gears are made, installed and
lubricated properly, they normally may be
subjected to failures like:
a. tooth spalling
b. tooth pending
c. pitting
d. shearing
120. If the pitch of a screw is 2/9 find the thread
113. Grout material use under the machine
bed and foundation surface should be
a. 1 part cement & 1/2 green sand & 1/4
part of gypsum
b. 1 part cement & 1 part green sand
c. 1 part cement &1 part screened sand
&1/4 part gypsum
d. 1 part cement & 1/12 part screened
sand &1/2 part stone
b. 1 part cement
& 1 part green
sand
a. less
than 15
d. bevel
gear
a. 30 to
45
c. 1/2
for cutting helical gears shoukd be ______ of
the normal circular pitch.
a. 3/8
b. 3/4
c. 1/2
d. 1/5
c. all of these
a. manganese
b. silicon
c. all of these
d. aluminum
111.
Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the range of
______
a. 30 to 45
b. 35 to 50
c. 25 to 30
d. 15 to 20
b.
addendum
c. pitting
b. 4.5
per inch.
a. 0.34
b. 4.5
c. 5.4
d. 17
121. If the shaft size is specified as diameter 2.00"
max and 2.99" min in diameter then the 0.010"
could be defined as _______
a. allowance
b. fit
c. variance
d. tolerance
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d.
tolerance
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
122. If the velocity of a mass is small all the time
during which motion takes place is called
a. deceleration
b. uniform motion
c. acceleration
d. none of these
123. Imaginary formed by th e intersection of the
flanks of a thread when extended is called ______.
a. sharp crest
b. sharp root
c. root apex
d. all of these
124. In a chain drive design for large speed reduction
b.
uniform
motion
a.
sharp
crest
a. 45
it is preferable to use a double reduction or
compound type of transmission instead of single
two sprockets transmission. Drives should be so
designed that the angle between two tight chain
strands does not exceed ______degrees.
a. 45
b. 60
c. 55
d. 90
125. In a cutting tool the cutting end can also be
perpendicular to the axial plane and tangent to
the pitch surface.
a. pitch
b. pitch plane
c. pitch circle
d. pitch point
127. In designing gears for power transmission
consider an efficiency of _______ as
recommended.
a. 96% or more
b. 89% or more
c. 85% or more
d. 98% or more
128. In designing the spoke or wheel arm of the
flywheel, it is ideal to consider that the crosssectional area of the spoke at the rim side should
not be less than _____ of the cross area at the hub
side
a. 80%
b. 2/3
c. 90%
d. 3/8
d. 70
low as 40 degrees but for extremely hard
material up to ______degrees is recommended
a. 80
b. 55
c. 75
d. 70
130. In general, alloys with high nickel content
d. -320
retains toughness to quite low temperatures
up to _____⁰F
a. -380
b. 400
c. -260
d.-320
131. In greater quantity, this element is harmful to
d. sulfur
the molten ferrous metal
a. silicon
b. aluminum
c. oxides
d. sulfur
132. In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often
b. nose
generally called_____
a. end cutting edge
b. nose
c. back rake
d. side rake
126. In a pair of gears, ______ is the plane
129. In drilling soft materials use cutting angle as
defined as the angle between the line of
action and the line of tangent to the pitch
circle. It is also termed as
a. helix angle
b. angle of recess
c. angle of obliquity
d. arc if action
b. pitch
plane
133. In machine shop,had forging operation of
d. 98%
or
more
134. In shear pin or breaking pin design, we may
b.2/3
lengthening a piece of stock while reducing
the cross-sectional area of work is called
a. bloating
b. upsetting
c. spreading
d. draining out
c. angle
of
obliquity
b.
upsetting
c. 50
use the data experienced by link belt from 1/8
inch to 1 inch pins and the breaking stress is
_____ksi.
a. 40
b.55
c. 60
d. 48
135. In small quantity this alloy is effective for
improvement strength at high temperature.
a. chromium
b. manganese
c. selenium
d. molybdenum
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a.
chromium
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
136. Internak stress exerted by the fibers to resist
the action of outside force is called________.
a. shearing stress
b. tensile stress
c. ultimate stress
d. compressive stress
137. In the gear design the total work must be
a.
shearing
stress
143. ________ is the name applied to reciprocating
c. 0.56
144. ____is the plane perpendicular to the axial
equally shared by its arms. Rim must be rigid
to support these arms and also the bead is
recommended for its stiffening value. The
assumption in the detailed design of rim
thickness and depth of bead is ______ circular
pithc (PC).
a. 0.65
b. 0.50
c. 0.56
d. 0.44
138. In the SAE identification code of steel shafting
the 3rd and 4th digits represents the content
of
a. % of manganese in the steel
b. % of alloy contents
c. % of carbon contents
d. % of chromium in the steel
139. In the selection of wire rope, regular lay
means wires and strands are arranged in the
following manner
a. twisted in the same direction
b. twisted in any direction
c. twisted in opposite direction
d. twisted in along direction
140. Iron based alloy containing 9-16% chromium
a. Mn hadfield steel
b. schrome-alloy steel
c. stainless steel
d. high chrome steel
circykar motion as that of a pendulum
a. intermittent motion
b. reciprocating motion
c. momentum
d. oscillation
plane and to the pitch plane. In gears the
paralle axes, and the plane of rotation
coincide
a. tangential plane
b. straight olane
c. transverse
d. reference
145. _____is the process necessary to reduce the
c. % of
carbon
contents
brittleness in alloy steel
a. martempering
b. carburizing
c. normalizing
d. tempering
146. _____is the theoretical profile of the thread for
c. twisted
in
opposite
direction
a lengtg of one pitch in the axial plabe on
which the design forms if both the external
threads are based.
a. basic form of thread
b. effective thread
c. basic prifile of thread
d. design form of externl thread
147. It consists of two cranks, a stationary piece
c.
stainless
steel
called the line of centers the connecting rod
is a
a. five bar linkage
b. four crank braces
c. three crank linkage
d. four bar linkage
148. It equalizes the energy exerted and the work
141. ________is also called strain hardening.
a. work hardening
b. quenching
c. annealing
d. normalizing
142. _______ is a work supporting device which is
bolted to the saddle of the lathe machine. It
travels with the cutting tool. It is a prevention
of the springing away of the workpiece from
cutting tools
a. rubber-flex collets
b. tool post
c. follower rest
d. carriage stop
a. work
hardening
d.
carriage
stop
done thus preventing excessive or sudden
changes of speed
a. flywheel
b. balance of wheel
c. all of these
d. flywheel pulley
149. it improves red hardness of steel
a. silicon
b. lead
c. cobalt
d. manganese
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d.
oscillation
c.
transverse
d.
tempering
c. basic
profile of
thread
d. four
bar
linkage
c. all of
these
c. cobalt
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
150. It is advised that in rubber belts
b. 15 to 20
application/mounting, it should have an initial
tension of ____inch/ply
a. 18 to 24
b. 15 to 20
c. 12 to 15
d. 10
151. it is a good design practice for steel
b. 0.010
lineshafting to consider a limit to the linear
deflection of ____inch/foot length maximun
a. 0.050
b. 0.010
c. 0.020
d. 0.060
152. It is a science of motion that can be solved in
terms of scalar or vector algebra
a. kinematics
b. curvilinear translation
c. projectiles
d. acceleration
153. It is associated with nickel steel
a.
kinematics
a. magnesium
b. lead
c. columbium
d. tin
a. f
machine-finished and usually indicated in the
drawing and placed on the line that
represents the surface to be machined
a. f
b. 15
c. 30
d. F.A.Q.
155. It is considered semi-solid lubricant
d. grease
allowable stresses, 4000 psi for main
transmitting shaft and 8500 psi for small shaft,
short shafts and countershafts. For lineshaft
carrying pulley it is _____psi
a. 7800
b. 7000
c. 6000
d. 6500
c. 6000
d.
quenching
c. 27
drive operation to choose_____or more teeth
a. 25
b. 26
c. 27
d. 28
159. It is normally recommended and normal for a
d. 53
designer to add a hunting tooth to evenly
distribute the wear on meshing teeth like a 53
teeth gears with 30 teeth pinion. Find the
rotation of pinion to mesh with same pair of
teeth again.
a. 120
b. 81
c. 61
d. 53
160. It is recommended for high speed application
b. 18 to 24
that the minimum number of teeth in small
spricket should be _____.
a. 12 to 20
b. 18 to 24
c. 16 to 32
d. 14 to 28
161. It is recommended for high speed application
a. all of these
b. lube oil
c. graphite
d. grease
156. It is general practice to use the following
is being heated to a very high temperature
then suddenly subjected to rapid cooling to
improve hardenability or wear resistance is
called
a. annealing
b. normalizing
c. tempering
d. quenching
158. It is ideal for maximum quietness in sprocket
d. tin
154. It is a symbol that the work surface should be
157. It is hardening treating whereby a cast metal
d. 18 to 24
that the minimum number of teeth in the small
sprockets should be_____.
a. 26 to 30
b. 12 to 16
c. 26 to 28
d. 18 to 24
162. It is recommended not to have direct drive
between driven and drive sprockets if the
ratio of their teeth exceeds_______. Use 2 or
more step combinations.
a. 10 times
b. 8 times
c. 5 times
d. 6 times
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a. 10 times
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
163. It is required that pipes bigger than_________mm
b. 63.5
shoukd not be screwed but flanged
a. 76.2
b. 63.5
c. 2 1/4inch
d. 68.5
164. It is rigid piece which serves to transmit force
design/operation may result to______.
a. overloading
b. jamming
c. all of these
d. overheating
d. link
from a piece to another piece or to
cause/control motion
a. follower
b. crank
c. cam motion
d. link
165. It is the difference of addendum and
dedendum which is equivalent to the whole
depth less working depth
a. fillet space
b. fillet radius
c. clearance
d. backlash
166. It is the drill backbone which run the entire
172. A lathe machine threading mechanism
c.
clearance
d. web
thread is approximately equal to the depth of
the thread and the spqce between threads are
approximately equal
a. square thread
b. Acme thread
c. buttress thread
d. whitworth thread
a. turret lathe
b. lathe
c. shaper
d. none of the above
174. length of contact between two mating parts
c. 27
in a screw and nut threads measured axially
is called
a. arc of contact
b. depth of engagement
c. length of engagement
d. axis of contact
175. The length of the hub should not be made
a. silicon
a. silicon
b. manganese
c. phosphorous
d. sulfur
169. A kind of thread in which the width of the
a. reverse gear and lever
b. spindle gear
c. all of these
d. change stud gear
173. A lathe with multiple cutting stations
drive operation to choose ______ or more teeth
a. 24
b. 18
c. 27
d. 21
168. Killed steel is always associated with
171. A lathe carriage part that bridge across the
bed to carry the cross slide and tool rest.
a. automatic feed
b. apron
c. compound rest
d. saddle
length of the entire drill between plates and
sides rigidity to the entire drill
a. drill shaft
b. shank
c. tang
d. web
167. It us ideal for maximum quietness in sprocket
170. The lack of backlash in a spur gear
a. square
thread
a.
overloading
c.
compound
rest
b. spindle
gear
a. turret
lathe
c. length of
engagement
b. 1.8D
lesser than the face width of the gear. Bub
lengths usually vary from 1.25D to 2D, where
D is the shaft diameter. The reasonable
diameter of steel hub should be
a. 2D
b. 1.8D
c. 1.55D
d. 1.20D
176. Liners normally made of
a. cast iron
a. cast iron
b. alloyed bronze
c. alloyed steel
d. alloyed aluminum
177. A machinery operation whereby done with
the work accurately fastened has a
reciprocating (forward and backward)
motion and the tool head is stationary.
a. shaping
b. planing
c. turning
d. reaming
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
b. planing
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
178. A machine shop equipment that can flatten
horizontally, vertically or angular plane.
a. shaper machine
b. welding machine
c. drill machine
d. power saw
179. Machine shop instrument for checking the
flatness of plane surfaces to 10ths of
thousands of a centimeter
a. blade tyoe micrometer
b. dial caliper
c. planimeter
d. micrometer
180. Machine tools for laying straight lines on
metal surfaces made of sharp tool steel is
called
a. plain scriber
b. a trammel
c. hermaphrodite caliper
d. divider
181. A major alloy in tool steel
a. shaper
machine
c.
planimeter
used in
a. screw thread
b. bolts
c. gear
d. all of these
are composed of
a. limestone, foundry coke and silica sand
b. iron ore, quartz and charcoal
c. steel scrap, alloys and charcoal/foundry
coke
d. scrap wood, alloys and limestone
187. The material for engine radiator is usually
made of ______.
a. yellow brass
b. silicon brass
c. admiralty brass
d. navy brass
a. plain
scriber
188. Material having a high electrical resistance and
a. Cr
189. Material may be stretched and still returns to
a. Cr
b. FeN
c. Cobalt
d. Mn
182. Major and minor diameters are commonly
186. Material changes in foundry melting operation
a. screw
thread
b. iron
a. silicon
b. iron
c. manganese
d. chromium
184. Manganese steel standard designation, SAE
a. 13XX
_____
a. 13XX
b. 10XX
c. 11XX
d. 8XX
185. Martensite(stainless steel) contains 4 to 26%
Cr and a maximum of ______% nickel
a. 2.5
b. 3.25
c. 3.5
d. 2.0
a. 2.5
a. yellow
brass
a. nickel
should not be used as conductor of electrical
current
a. nickel
b. aluminum oxide
c. silicon base alloys
d. iron oxide
its form/condition upon the release of force is
called______
a. plasticity
b. modulus of elasticity
c. ductility
d. elastic limit
190. A material plane was subjected to a load.
183. A major component of cast steel
a.
limestone,
foundry
coke and
silica
sand
When the load was removed, the strain
disappeared. For the structural change, which
of the folowing can be considered about this
material?
a. it has high modulus of elastucity?
b. it does not follow hooke's law
c. it is plastic
d. it is elastic
191. The material that can cut/wear substances
subjected to
a. carbide
b. abrasive
c. tungsten
d. vanadium
192. The maximum stress induced in a material
when subjected to intermittent or repeated
load without causing failure is called
a. ultimate stress
b. endurance limit
c. ultimate torque
d. elastic limit
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d. elastic
limit
d. it is
elastic
b.
abrasive
b.
endurance
limit
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
193. The maximum stress to which a material may
be subjected before failure occurs
a. ultimate strength
b. ultimate stress
c. endurance limit
d. tensile stress
194. A mechanism which usually do the indexing
in a machine tool
a. universal chuck
b. slotter
c. dividing head
d. indexing
b. ultimate
stress
c. dividing
head
a. the electeons are loosely bound
to the nuclei and therefore
mobile
b. having a characteristics metallic
luster
c. they are on the left side for the
periodic table
d. they have extra electrons as
exhibited by normally possible
balance state
196. Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant in
a. the
electeons
are loosely
bound
to the
nuclei and
therefore
mobile
c. babbit
itself
a. zinc
b. antimony
c. babbitt
d. lead
201. Molybdenum-chromium-nickel steel deisgnation
202. Molybdenum steel standard designation,
of exceptionally high carbon or high
chromium steel (or very hard material)
a. using oxygen lancing
b. machining using carbide insert
c. using abrasive grinding
d. machining high speed tool steel
198. The minimum recommended worm pitch
d.
machining
high speed
tool steel
d. 2
diameter is 1/4 in. and the maximum is ____in.
a. 1 3/4
b. 2 3/4
c. 3
d. 2
199. Mirror finish has surfaces fineness of
203. Moment curve for a simple beam with a
concentrated load at middle span takes the
shape of a :
a. triangle
b. rectangular
c. trapezoid
d. semi-eclipse
a. modulus of elasticity
b. weep strength
c.none of these
d.radius of gyration
205. The moment of inertia of a rectangle whose
base is "b" and height "h" abour its base is
a. bh³/4
b. bh³/12
c. bh³/24
d. bh³/3
206. Most effective alloying element for reducing
brittleness of steel at very low, temperature.
a. manganese
b. molybdenum
c. silicon
d. nickel
a. 1
b. SAE
43XX
c. 40XX
SAE_________
a. 88XX
b. 48XX
c. 40XX
d. 46XX
204. Moment of inertia is also called
197. Method of finishing/shaping a machine part
b. 2
iron at 10x10⁶ psi but concrete is much lower
at_____x 10⁶ psi
a. 1
b. 2
c. 6
d. 3
a. SAE 48XX
b. SAE 43XX
c. SAE 56XX
d. SAE 46XX
195. Metals are conductive because
______rms.
a. 1
b. 2 to 8
c. 1 to 3
d. 2 to 5
200. The modulus of elasticity of steel E at 30x10⁶ psi
207. The most known lubricants being utilized in
whatever category of load and speed are oil,
air, grease and dry lubricants like
a. bronze
b. lead
c. silicon
d. graphite
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a.
triangle
c. none
of these
d.
bh³/3
d.
nickel
d.
graphite
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
208. The most popular of all soldering materials
in use has composition of
a. 45/55% tin and lead
b. 50/50% tin and lead
c. all of these
d. 60/40% tin and lead
209. Name the type of chuck commonly used for
holding workpiece in a lathe operation?
Example. 3-jaw universal chuck, 4-ja
independent chuck.
a. magnetic chuck
b. 2- jaw independent chuck
c. 8-jaw universal
d. combination
210. Negative allowance is also called
216. Normally cast iron contains 2% carbon or
d.
combination
217.
c. SAE49XX
strength and poor ductility, etc.
a. copper parts
b. cast iron materials
c.aluminum parts
d. bronze parts
a. major diameter
b. minor diameter
c. pitch diameter
d. base diameter
Not part and in fact shoukld not be used in
steel melting process
a. coke
b. silicon
c. zinc
d. aluminum
220. Not part of the headstock
a. major
diameter
212. Nominal diameter of bolts is the
Normal stress relieving temperature for cast
steel
a. 200 to 350F
b. 400 to 500F
c. 300 to 400F
d. 450 to 550F
218. not adaptable to welding due to low tensile
219.
Nickel-chromium-molybdenum steel
designation, SAE__________.
a. SAE51XX
b.SAE74XX
c.SAE49XX
d.SAE64XX
c. 15 to 25
recommended in the range of _____degrees
a. less than 18
b. 20 to 35
c. 15 to 25
d. 20 to 30
214. non-ferrous fillet metal is melted into
grooves or as fillet on the mother metal; the
base metal is not melted. This is commonly
used for joining iron based machine parts or
in repair works of some materials. It is
called
a. spot welding
b. braze welding
c. brazing
d. gas welding
215. Non-metallic material for high melting
temperature be8ng used as furnace lining
a. quartz bricks
b. refractories
c. silica sand
d. dolomite clay bricks
failure for given stream level
a. endurance
b. fatigue
c. fatigue life
d. rupture
222. Often called necking or grooving in the
b. braze
welding
d. 450 to
550F
c. aluminum
parts
a. coke
c. anvil
a. back gear
b. spindle
c. anvil
d. motor
221. The number of cycles required to cause
213. The nominal helix angles in helical gears is
a. 1-3
more and silicon in the range of ______%
a. 1-3
b. 2-4
c. 2-3
d. 1 to 6
a.
interference
of metal
a. interference of metal
b. fit
c. tolerance
d. allowance
211.
b. 50/50%
tin and lead
cutting of a groove next to a shoulder on
a. chamfering square
b. undercutting
c. corner
d. edge cutting
b.
refractories
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. fatigue
life
b.
undercutting
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
223. One of the causes of spur gear tooth
breakage is the unbalanced load on one
end of the tooth that results in higher
stresses than when the load is evenly
distributed. To minimize this problem, the
face width "b" should not be greater than
the thickness or pitch of the tooth. In the
absence of test values, the follwing can be
a guide
a. 2.5Pc < b < 4Pc
b. 2.0 < b < 4 Pd
c. 2.5 < b < 4 Pd
d. 2.0 < b < 4 Pc
224. One of the following materials is not
a. 2.5Pc < b
< 4Pc
steel?
a. low carbon steel
b. tool and die steel
c. stainless and steel
d. medium carbon steel
226. Opposite directional forces equal in
a. plastic
b. tool and
die steel
c. couple
d. 600-700F
a. couple
forces that tend to cause a rotation of a
body
a. couple
b. centroid
c. equilibrium
d. vector
229. Peculiar strength of material to resist being
crushed
a. shear strength
b. ultimate strength
c. compressive strength
d. elastic limit
232. A petroleum by-product used as electrodes
in an electric arc furnace melting operation
a. antracite coke
b. foundry coke
c. graphite electrodes
d. bituminous coke
233. The phenomenon of continuous stretching
elasticity significantly at about_______F.
a. 900 - 1000F
b. 800 - 900F
c. 750 - 850F
d. 600- 700F
228. A pair of equal and opposite (not colinear)
d. tolerance
machined dimensions is called
a. intolerance fits
b. deviation
c. allowable
d. tolerance
magnitude and parallel is called
a. non coplanar
b. centro
c. couple
d. coplanar
227. Ordinary steel begins to lose strength and
c. ductility
without fracture:
a. malleability
b. elasticity
c. ductility
d. plasticity
231. Permissible variation of the manufactures or
mentioned for wire rope pulley/sheave
applications.
a. plastic
b. iron
c. paper
d. copper alloy
225. One of these materials is not a structural
230. Permanent deformation or strain may occur
d. creep
under load even if the stress is less than the
yield point
a. elasticity
b. ductility
c. plasticity
d. creep
234. Pitch diameter less the diameter of the
roller chain is equal to
a. top land
b. bottom diameter
c. addendum
d. inside diameter
235. Plain carbon steel standard designation,
b. bottom
diameter
c. 10XX
SAE ______.
a. 6XX
b. 13XX
c. 10XX
D. 2XXX
236. Plus or minus tokerance can also be called
a. total tolerance
b. unilateral tolerance
c. bilateral tolerance
d. allowance
237. poison's ratio is the ratio of
c.
compressive
strength
c. graphite
electrodes
a. shear strain to compressive strain
b. elastic limit to compressive strain
c. lateral strain to longitudinal
strain
d. elastic limit to proportional limit
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. bilateral
tolerancw
c. lateral
strain to
longitudinal
strain
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
238. Principal stresses occur on these plane
a. which are subjected to ultimate tension
b. the shearing stress is zero
c. which are subjected to maximum
compression
d. which are 45⁰ apart
239. The process of increasing the carbon
content to the surface of ateel by exposing
it to hot carbonaceous material above the
transformation of 1650 to 1750F
a. carbonitriding
b. case hardening
c. carburizing
d. induction hardening
240. The process of peening the joint portion
immediately after the welding greatly
improves the fusion structures, avoids
possible cracking, avoids possible distortion,
etc.Peening is also called_____process at the
same time
a. tempering
b. martempering
c. normalizing
d. annealing
241. The product of the mass and the velocity of
the center of gravity of the body is called
a. linear momentum
b. angular impulse
c. linear impulse
d. angular momentum
242. The product of the resultant of all forces
acting on a body and the time that the
resultant acts
a. angular impulse
b. angular momentum
c. linear impulse
d. linear momentum
243. Progressive change of position of a body is
b. the
shearing
stress is
zero
c.
carburizing
245. The property of material wherein the
content is continuously distributed through
its entire mass
a. plasticity
b. malleability
c. homogeneity
d. all of these
246. A property of material which relates the
lateral strain to the longitudinal strain:
a. stress
b. strain
c. Poison's ratio
d. strength
247. The property that characterizes a material
d.
annealing
c. linear
impulse
c. motion
called
a. acceleration
b. momentum
c. motion
d. force
a. ductility
b. ductility
ability to be drawn into a wire.
a. tensile strength
b. ductility
c. endurance limit
d. thermal conductivity
249. The purpose of lybrication is as mentioned
except
a. to lighten the load
b. prevent corrosion/adhesion
c. prevent adhesion
d. cool the moving elements
250. Quantities such as time, volume and density
c. prevent
adhesion
d. scalar
are completely specified when their
magnitude is known is also called____
a. couple
b. resultants
c. components
d. scalar
251. A radian is equal to______
a. 57.020⁰
b. 57.706⁰
c. 57.296⁰
d. 57.190⁰
244. The properties of metals to withstand load
c. Poison's
ratio
ability to be drawn into a wire
a. ductility
b. thermal conductivity
c. tensile strength
d. endurance limit
248. The property that characterizes a materials
a. linear
momentum
c.
homogeneity
b. strength
without breaking down is
a. elasticity
b. strength
c. plasticity
d. strain
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. 57.296⁰
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
252. The ratio of moment of inertia on a cross-
section of a beam to the section modulus is
a. a measure of distance
b.equal to the radius of gyration
and compression
c. multiplied by the bending
moment of inertia to determine
the yield stress
d. equal to the area of the
cross-section and tension
253. The ratio of stress acting on an elastic
substance to the decrease in volume per unit
volume
a. bulk modulus
b. modulus of resilience
c. elastic limit
d. modulus of elasticity
254. The ratio of the pitch diameter in inches to
the number of teeth
a. pitch circle
b. English module
c. module
d. pitch diameter
a. a
measure of
distance
259. Recommended design practice for steel
260. Recommended hardness of pinion for
a. bulk
modulus
drive operation
a. SAE 4140
b. Petroleum oil
c. moly slip
d. heavy grease
262. The relative strength of a butt welding could
255. Ratio of unit lateral deformation to unit
longitudinal deformation
a. Poisson's ratio
b. strain
c. elongation
d. Modulus of elasticity
a. modulus
of
elasticity
b. module
of the pitch diameter to the no. of teeth.
a. lead
b. module
c. involute
d. clearance
257. The recommended age limit of fire tube
boilers
a. 35 years
b. 30 years
c. 40 years
d. 50 years
258. Recommended best cutting angle of drill for
work on steel or cast iron is _____degrees.
a. 48
b. 63
c. 59
d. 50
b. 30
years
c. 59
b.Petroleum
oil
c. 90
be safely assumes as ____% efficiency
a. 95
b. 98
c. 90
d. 92
263. Relief angles of single-point cutting test in
256. The reciprocal of a diameter pitch of the ratio
c. 40-50
helical/herringbone gear tooth should be
_____BHN point to sustain life
a. 50-59
b. 48-65
c. 40-50
d. 30-60
261. The recommended lubricant for the chain
b. English
module
b. 0.010
lineshafting to limit the linear deflection to
inch/foot of length (maximum)
a. 0.020
b. 0.010
c. 0.012
d. 0.150
a. 8 to 12
cutting mild steel, cast iron and other
average work as recommended should be in
the ranges of _____degrees for high speed
tools.
a. 8 to 12
b. 10 to 15
c. 5 to 7
d. 12 to 16
264. A research agency handling assistance to all
a. MIRDC
foundry, machine shop and metallurgical
plant operation
a. MIRDC
b. All of these
c. DOST
d. BOI
265. The resultant of two or more forces is also
called:
a. equilibrium
b. momentum
c. concurrent forces
d. resolution of forces
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d.
resolution
of forces
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
266. A resulting factor that replaces two or
c. resultant
more forces acting together
a. vector
b. couple
c. resultant
d. equilibrant
273. The SAE 2340 shafting contains
_______%nickel
a. 3.85 %Ni
b. 4% Ni
c. 3.25 to 3.75 %Ni
d. 3.84% Ni
267. A ridge of uniform section in the form of a
helix cut around the circumference of a
cylinder and advancing along the axis
a. thread roots
b. helix thread
c. screw threads
d. chamfers
268. The rigidity of polymer can be increased
by
a. furnace melting
b. normalizing
c. crystallization
d. shot peening
c. screw
threads
274. The safeguard in minimum of ____mm in
c.
crystallization
275. Saftey features that must be placed and
a. 3-5
269. Rule of thumb in calculating the
equipment foundation mass should be
______ times the weight of the machinery it
is supposed to support
a. 3-5
b. 3-6
c. 3-9
d. 2-4
270. The rule of thumb in journal bearing
flywheel rim should be 6000 fpm for
castviron material and for cast steel
flywheel rim at _____meters/min
a. 3050
b. 4500
c. 7000
d. 10000
maintained at Machine, Blacksmith,
Welding and foundry Shops.
a. walkaway guide
b. all of these
c. safety notices in markers/boards
d. safety goggles
c. safety
notices in
markers/boards
d. taper thread
cylindrical surface
a. thread series
b. thread shear area
c. straight thread
d. taper thread
277. A section in a machine shop operation.
c. 0.0010
d. 0.0010
combined are called
a. concurrent forces
b. non concurrent forces
c. couple
d. component forces
279. Separate forces which can be so
a. 3050
b. machining
a. coremaking
b. machining
c. fitting
d. pattern
278. The separate forces which can be so
design, the clearance ratio,/clearance
should be
a. 0.1001
b. 0.0101
c. 0.0110
d. 0.0010
272. A rule of thumb, the speed limit of
c. 150
height for the use as toe guard/toe
board
a. 165
b. 135
c. 150
d. 120
276. Screw thread projecting from a
design, the clearance ratio/clearance
should be
a. 0.0099
b. 0.0042
c. 0.0010
d. 0.00120
271. The rule of thumb in journal bearing
c. 3.25 to 3.75
%Ni
combined are called
a. non-concurrent forces
b. couple
c. combined forces
d. component forces
280. Several forces which can be combined is
called
a. resultants
b. composition of forces
c. components
d. collinear forces
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d. component
forces
d. component
forces
c. components
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
281. Shafting up to 3 inches in diameter is usually
d. 5 inches
made from cold rolled steel and the common
biggest diameter if cold rolled steel is _____
a. 4 1/4 inches
b. 6 7/8 inches
c. 6 3/4 inches
d. 5 inches
282. Shafts readily available in the market are
automobile radiator cores and roofing seams
a. 15/85% tin and lead
b. 50/50% tin and lead
c. 45/55% tin and lead
d. 20/80% tin and lead
289. Some experiments made at Cornell University
a. 3.75
made in many ways and wide variety of
material composition. It is likely be cold
drawn carbon steel in size smaller
than________inches diameter.
a. 3.75
b. 4
c. 5
d. 5 1/2
283. A shaft that is used to connect or disconnect
288. The soldering material commonly applied for
showed that experience mechanic could break a
______ bolt due to nut tightening
a. 3/8 inch
b. 5/8 inch
c. 1/2 inch
d. 7/16
290. Statement that a given body is in static
a. clutch
at will is called_________.
a. clutch
b. bearing
c. brake shaft
d. lock shaft
equilibrium means that the body cannot
a. have any type of motion
b. be acted upon by more than one
force
c. undergo any displacement
d. have any acceleration
291. Steel spring material is usually hardened to 400
284. Shear modulus is also
d. modulus
of rigidity
a. shear elasticity
b. poison's ratio
c. modulus of elasticity
d. modulus of rigidity
285. Should two equal and opposite collinear
forces is added to the forces already in
equilibrium, which of the following statement
is true?
a. unbalanced of moment is maintained
b. equilibrium is disturbed
c. equilibrium is maintained
d. it increases an unbalanced situation
286. Silicon manganese steel designation,
c.
equilibrium
is
maintained
292. Steel springs are made of high carbon steel,
c. 92xx
293. Steel with certain % carbon maximum can
SAE______.
a. 72xx
b. 40xx
c. 92xx
d. 9xx
287. The smallest area at the point of rupture of a
tensile specimen divided by the original area
is called
a. percentage elongation
b. Izod test
c. Charpy test
d. percentage reduction of area
to 500 BHN and the carbon content is in the
range of __________.
a. 0.50 to 0.90%
b. all of these
c. 0.45 to 0.48
d. 0.96 to 0.97
d.
percentage
reduction
of area
heat treated and/or cold work to a high elastic
limit to get good elastic deflection. In general
the carbon content is at ______.
a. 0.40% or more
b. 0.65% or more
c. 0.50% or more
d. 0.66 or more
readily be welded by all process and the
resulting strength of the portion welded is as
strong as the base material.
a. 0.15% C max
b. 0.35% C max
c. 0.25% C max
c. 0.30% C max
294. Stresses that are independent of load is
called_________.
a. working stress
b. residual stress
c. simple stress
d. combined stress
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c.
45/55%
tin and
lead
b. 5/8
inch
a. have
any
type of
motion
a. 0.50
to
0.90%
c.
0.50%
ir more
d.
0.30%
C max
b.
residual
stress
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
295. Stress relieving is also _______ for the purpose
of reducing the internal stresses of steel
material/metal
a. tempering
b. normalizing
c. all of these
d. annealing
296. The sum of their addendum and dedendum
a. whole depth
b. full depth
c. width of space
d. working depth
297. The surface along the fillet curves or
between the fillets radius of the two
adjacent tooth of a gear
a. bottom land
b. flank
c. fillet
d. top land
298. The surface between the pitch circle and
bottom land.
a. line of action
b. flank of tooth
c. bottom land
d. face of top land
b.
normalizing
slippage than of cast iron puleys in range of:
a. 1.8 - 2.6
b. 1.8 - 2.8
c. 2.35 - 2.7
d. 2.0 - 2.8
304. That property of matter which causes it to
a. whole
depth
a. bottom
land
b. flank of
tooth
d. flank
the screw thread
a. lead angle
b. length of engagement
c. top land
d. flank
305. This particular cutting tool material could
withststand cutting temperatures of 1800F
and higher at cutting speed beyond thise
possible with other cutting tool materials.
a. titanium carbide
b. ceramic
c. carbide grade
d. cubic boron nitride
of adjacent teeth is called_______.
a. bottom land
b. flank
c. topland
d. flank of tooth
a. bottom
land
to analyze:
a. tapered column
b. continuous beam
c. composite beam
d. axially end loaded beam
308. To avoid brittleness of weld or the residual
301. A system of forces in space is in equilibrium
if two equal and opposite collinear forces
are added, which of the following if any is
true?
a. equilibrium is destroyed
b. equilibrium is maintaned
c. none of these is true
d. an unbalanced of moment exist
302. Tap not used for cutting threads__________.
b.
equilibrium
is
maintaned
stress in the welding it is normally stress
relieved of _____.
a. normalizing
b. tempering
c. flame hardening
d. annealing
309. The tool bit made of tool blamk consist of
a. tapping
tap
c. inertia
d. cubic
boron
nitride
b.buttress
requires strength and usually cut square on
one side and slanting on the other side.
a. janno
b. buttress
c. square
d. double
307. The three moment of equation may be used
300. The surface of the gear between the fillets
c. 2.352.7
resist any change in its motion or state of
rest
a. brake
b. friction
c. inertia
d. impulse
306. _______thread is used where the thread
299. Surface connecting the crest and roots of
a. tapping tap
b. bottoming tap
c. plugging tap
d. taper tip
303. Test showed that steel pulleys has less
b.
continuous
beam
b.
tempering
d. base
face, nose, shank and______
a. cutting edge
b. none of these
c. round nose
d. base
310. A tool not belonging to the group
a. hermaprodite caliper
b. divider
c. double VEE block
d. trammel
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
c. double
VEE block
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
311. Tools usually used in wood pattern making in a
foundry shop.
a. saws and chisels
b. band saw
c. knives and drills
d. drill machine
312. Tooth width measured along the chord at the
pitch circle
a. flank
b. face width
c. width of space
d. chordal thickness
a. saws
and
chisels
d.
chordal
thickness
319.
The total machinery weight plus the
foundation weight shoukd be well distributed
in the corresponding soil area which is
enough to cause a bearing stress within the
safe bearing capacity of the soil with a factor
of safety of
a. 4.5
b. 3
c. 4.2
d. 5.0
320. Treatment pricess that produces a residual
313. Toot width measurement along the chord at the
pitch circle
a. chord space
b. chord clearance
c. chordal thickness
d. chordal length
314. The top and bottom for gears is similar formed
c.
chordal
thickness
b. root
as to crest and _____ for screw thread
a. flank
b. root
c. flank of tooth
d. top land
315. To prevent engine vibration to affectvthe
321. Two more forces acting together could be
c. 25
surrounding area, it is a standard practice to
isolate the engine and its foundation by at
least______mm
a. 30
b. 20
c. 25
d. 36
316. To prevent leakage in dynamic seal
a. gaskets
b. seals
c. packings
d. felts
317. Top surface joining two sides of thread in screw
compressive stress at the surface(which
ocxupy more volume) and residual tension on
the inside that resukts in considerabke
increase in fatigue strengtg for members on
torsional/bending.
a. heavy oil quenching
b. partial quenching
c. quenching
d. shallow quenching
construction that is threaded in both ends
a. stud bolt
b. acme thread
c. hex bolt
d. square threaded bokrs
d. crest
a. pitch
b. top flank
c. top land
d. crest
323. Type of carbon and alloy used in production
of precision work tools.
a. chrome-manganese
b. titanium
c. high speed
d. chrome-molybdenum
324. Type of chuck wherein the work piece with
318. Torsional deflection is a significant
consideration in the design of shaft and the
limit should be in the range of ________
degree/foot of length
a. 0.4 to 1
b. 0.1 to 1
c. 0.08 to 1
d. 0.6 to 1
c. 0.8 to
1
d. shallow
quenching
c. resultant
placed by a single force with same effect in
a mass
a. couple of force
b. resolution of force
c. resultant
d. concurrent of forces
322. Type of bolt commonly used in the
c.
packings
d. 5.0
standard diameter or size could be attached
fast and quick specially small size work of
mass production.
a. lathe drive plate
b. clamp toe dog
c. collet attachment
d. steady center rest
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a. stud
bolt
c. high
speed
c. collet
attachment
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
325. Type of leather belt being applied with
waterproof cement.
a. combination of oak/mineral tanned
b. all of these
c. oak tanned
d. mineral tanned
326. Used in as cast condition steel casting with
c. oak
tanned
333. The welding made along the edges of two
c. 0.20
334. What equation to use in computing the
carbon content less than ______%C.
a. 0.26
b. 0.15 to 0.18
c. 0.20
d. 0.25
327. Used to change rotary motion to reciprocating
motion
a. rack gears
b. hypoid gears
c. helical gears
d. herringbone gears
328. The usual ratio of water to soluble oil used as
cutting fluid
a. 50% water to 50% oil
b. 2 water to 1 oil
c. 3 water to 1 oil
d. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil
329. V-belts operate efficiently at speed of about
(fpm)
a. 4500
b. 4400
c. 4200
d. 3600
330. Vertex distance is a term used in gearing.
a. spiral
b. worm
c. bevel
d. zerol
a. rack
gears
d. 4 to
80
water
to 1 oil
a.
4500
c.
bevel
parallel plates is called
a. groove joint
b. fillet joint
c. edge joint
d. corner joint
a. beside the land
b. nearing the shank
c. close to the flute
d. at the tip portion
b.
nearing
the
shank
335. What factors can modify the recommended
cutting speed of knwon work piece?
a. rough cutting of workpiece
b. modify the shape of the cutting tools
c. use correctly shaped cutt8ng tools
d. depth of cut
336. What is the common cutting fluids used for
cutting metals?
a. all of these
b. water with soda or borax
c. light mineral oil
d. soluble oil
337. What is the common shop practice to prevent
sokdee from running away from surface to be
joined.
a. all of these
b. surround the work with clay
c. introduce around the work roled
wet cloth
d. put asbestos sheeting around
the work
metal exactly where needed and produce an
integral structure which can develop ____%
efficiency on any thickness section especially
for mild steel materials
a. 95%
b. 85%
c. 100%
d. 90
c. 100%
d. depth
of cut
a. all of
these
a. all of
these
b. 1981
a. 1198
b. 1981
c. 1918
d. 1891
339. What is the lightest known material
332. The welded joints permit placing the added
b. rw²
acceleration of the center of a rolling ball with
a diameter of 8 inches
a. 0
b. rw²
c. w²/r
d. v²/r
338. What is the equivalent value of 1083C in F?
331. Web is a part of a drill and is usually thicker:
c. edge
joint
a. mercury
b. steel
c. chromium
d. aluminum
340. What is the recommended cutting speed
range for bronze in fpm?
a. 60/70
b. 200/250
c. 80/60
d. 100/110
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
d.
aluminum
b.
200/250
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
341. What is the value in degrees of 1 radian?
c. 57.29⁰
a. 57.49⁰
b. 57.94⁰
c. 57.29⁰
d. 57.92⁰
342. What tyoe of leather belting should be
used at an ambient temperature above
140 degree and possible acid liquid
coming in contact with the belt?
a. mineral tanned
b. combination of oak
c. none of these
d. Oak tanned
343. What type of gear is used for high speed
c. none of
these
348. Which of the following is an unsafe
condition in operating a lathe
machine?
a. wearing denim pants/safety shoes
b. wearing a canvas apron
c. operating with safety gloves
d. wearing safety goggles/hearing aid
349. Which of the following is not a kind of
a. helical
350. Which of the following is not a
structural class of steel?
a. low carbon steel
b. tool and die steel
c. high chrome alloy steel
d. high strength low alloy steel
b. steel
requirements for choosing gear materials
it is preferable to use ______material.
a. hardened bronze
b. steel
c. phenolic laminated
d. white iron
345. When the air entraintment agent is put
into a concrete mix
a. the water/cement ratio must be
reduced
b. the strength will decrease
c. minimal defect
d. the strength will suffer up to 50%
346. When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it
will take pressure to put the parts
together. The allowance is said to be
negative and is termed:
a. negative tolerance
b. negative allowance
c. negative fits
d. interference of metal
347. When two elastic bodies collide, which of
the following laws can be used to solve
for the resulting velocity?
a. Dalton's law
b. Avogadro
c. Conservation of energy
d. Conservation of momentum and
Conservation of energy
c. contraction
madrel
a. expanded
b. extended
c. contraction
d. taper
operation?
a. helical
b. spur
c. bevel
d. worm
344. When high strength and durability are a
b. wearing a
canvas apron
351. Which of the following is not a
b. tool and die
steel
d. metal
viscoelastic material?
a. teflon
b. plastic
c. all of these
d. metal
352. Which of the following is not used to
b. the strength
will decrease
353. Which of the following product of
d. interference
of metal
c. rubber
combustion that has a priperty of
resilience?
a. grease
b. graphite electrode
c. rubber
d. graphite powder
354. Which of the following raw materials
D.
Conservation
of momentum
and
Conservation
of energy
b. center cut
resemble the shape of a tool bit?
a. round nose
b. central cut
c. square nose
d. thread cutting
are used in the foundry moulding
operation?
a. silica sand, bentonite, flour/paste
water
b. silica sand and paste
c. silica sand, paste, graphite
electrode
d. silica sand, linseed oil, flour
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a. silica sand,
bentonite,
flour/paste water
lOMoARcPSD|40996225
355. Which of the following services is not considered to be work of machinist?
c. overhauling
a. reboring
b. grinding
c. overhauling
d. honing
356. Which of the phases of steel elements has a face-centered cubic structure?
b. austenite
a. pyrite
b. austenite
c. all of these
d. cementite
357. The width of a tooth space exceeds the thickness of each of the engaging tooth on the pitch circle______
d. backlash
a. allowance
b. bottom land
c. top land
d. backlash
358. The yield strength of a regular yellow btasa(65-75% Cu, 30-35% Zn) can be incteased/improved by
a. cold working
b. tempering
c. chill casting
d. heat treatment
Downloaded by Catherine Cataluña (erinecataluna333@gmail.com)
a. cold working
ELEMENTS 01
1.
2.
3.
PRIME ELEMENTS
MACHINE DESIGN II
4.
5.
6.
7.
Heating above the transformation range,
usually 1300oF to 1350oF, and cooling slowly
to soften the metal and increase in machining
A. annealing
B. hardening
C. normalizing
D. tempering
Heating above the transformation temperature
and quenching usually in oil, for the purpose
of increasing the hardness
A. annealing
B. hardening
C. normalizing
D. tempering
Reheating to temperature below the
transformation range, followed by any desired
rate of cooling to attain the desired properties
of the metal.
A. annealing
B. hardening
C. normalizing
D. stress relieving
Heating to subcritical temperature, about
1100oF to 1300oF and holding at that
temperature for a suitable time for the purpose
of reducing internal residual stresses.
A. annealing
B. hardening
C. normalizing
D. stress relieving
Heating some 100oF above the transformation
range with subsequent cooling to below that
range in still air at room temperature to
produce uniform structure of the metal.
A. annealing
B. hardening
C. normalizing
D. tempering
A machine tool used for producing holes in
metal by the use of cutting tool called drill.
A. drilling machine
B. boring machine
C. milling machine
D. broaching machine
A machine tool use to form metal parts by
removing metal from a work piece
By the use of a revolving cutter with many
teeth each tooths having a cutting edge which
removes its share of the stock.
A. drilling machine
B. boring machine
C. milling machine
D. broaching machine
8. A machine tool used to sharpen or shape tools
by using an abrasive wheel.
A. tool grinder
B. shaper
C. planer
D. power saw
9. A machine tool used to enlarge a hole by
means of an adjustable cutting tool with only
one cutting edge.
A. drilling machine
B. boring machine
C. milling machine
D. broaching machine
10. A machine tool used to cut metal by parts of
light, medium, and large sections using a
reciprocating hacksaw blade.
A. tool grinder
B. shaper
C. planer
D. power saw
11. A machine tool used to machine flat or plane
surfaces with a single point cutting tool.
A. tool grinder
B. shaper
C. planer
D. power saw
12. A machine tool used for production or flat
surfaces on pieces too large or too heavy to
hold in a shaper.
A. tool grinder
B. shaper
C. planer
D. power saw
13. A machine tool used to finish internal or
external surfaces such as holes or keyways by
the use of a cutter called broach, which has a
series of cutting edges or teeth.
A. drilling machine
B. boring machine
C. milling machine
1
D. broaching machine
14. An alloy of copper and tin
A. brass
B. bronze
C. iron
D. tin
15. An alloy of copper and zinc
A. brass
B. bronze
C. iron
D. tin
16. The process of forming metal parts by the use
of dies after the metal is heated to its plastic
range
A. rolling
B. forging
C. turning
D. casting
17. The process of forming a metal parts by the use
of a powerful pressure from a hammer or press
to obtain the desired shape after the metal has
been heated to its plastic range
A. rolling
B. forging
C. turning
D. casting
18. A manganese steel containing approximately
0.20% carbon
A. SAE 1320
B. SAE 1230
C. SAE 2340
D. SAE 4230
19. A machine tool in which metal removed by
means of a revolving cutter with many teeth,
each tooth having a cutting edge which remove
its share of the shock
A. milling machine
B. broaching machine
C. lathe machine
D. boring machine
20. A metal turning machine in which the work
while revolving on a horizontal axis is acted
upon by a cutting tool which is made to move
slowly (feed) in a direction more or less parallel
to the axis of the work (longitudinal feed)
A. milling machine
B. broaching machine
C. lathe machine
D. boring machine
21. A machine tool used in the production of flat
surfaces on pieces too large or too heavy or
perhaps too awkward to hold in a shaper
A. shaper
B. planer
C. tool grinder
D. power saw
22. It consist of shaping a piece by bringing it
into contact with a rotating abrasive wheel
A. drilling
B. boring
C. grinding
D. broaching
23. A tool used in measuring diameters
A. caliper
B. nanometer
C. tachometer
D. pyrometer
24. Used to true align machine tools, fixtures, and
works, to test and inspect trueness of finished
work, and too compare measurement either
heights or depths or many other measurement
A. dial gauge
B. dial indicator
C. tachometer
D. speedometer
25. The ability of the metal to be deformed
considerably without rupture
A. ductility
B. plasticity
C. malleability
D. elasticity
26. The shop term used to include the marking of
inscribing of center points, circle, arcs, or
straight line upon metal surfaces, either curved
or flat, for the guidance of the worker
A. shaping
B. hobbing
C. laying out
D. shaping
27. An operation of sizing and finishing a hole by
means of a cutting tool having several cutting
edges
A. notching
B. piercing
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
C. turning
D. reaming
The operation of making a cone shaped
enlargement of the end of a hole, as for a
recess for a flat head screw
A. countersinking
B. knurling
C. squaring
D. perforating
The operation of enlarging a hole by means of
an adjustable cutting tool with only one
cutting edge
A. drilling
B. broaching
C. grinding
D. boring
An imaginary circle passing through the points
at which the teeth of the meshing gears contact
each other
A. pitch circle
B. addendum circle
C. deddendum circle
D. base circle
A type of bolt for use in bolting wooden parts
together or wood to metal,. It has a portion of
shank just underneath a round head, which is
designed to keep the bolt from turning in the
wood when the nut t tightened
A. u-bolt
B. carriage bolt
C. eye bolt
D. stud bolt
The number of teeth per inch of pitch
diameter and which gives some indications of
the gear teeth
A. module
B. pitch circle
C. diametral pitch
D. circular pitch
The distance from the center of one tooth of a
gear the center of the next consecutive tooth
measured of the pitch
A. circular pitch
B. module
C. diametral pitch
D. pitch circle
2
34. The portion of the gear tooth that projects
above or outside the pitch circle
A. top relief
B. deddendum
C. addendum
D. tooth space
35. The portion of the gear tooth space that is cut
below the pitch circle and is equal to the
addendum plus the clearance
A. top root
B. deddendum
C. addendum
D. top land
36. When meshed with a gear it is used to change
rotary motion to reciprocating motion
A. gear shaft
B. gear tooth
C. gear rack
D. gear motor
37. A kind of gears for heavy duty works where a
large ratio of speed is required and are
extensively used in speed reducers
A. bevel gear
B. worm gear
C. helical gear
D. spiral gear
38. A kind of gear to transmit motion from one
shaft to another shaft at an angle to the first
A. bevel gear
B. worm gear
C. helical gear
D. spiral gear
39. The uniform heating of steel above the usual
hardening temperatures, followed by cooling
freely in air
A. annealing
B. normalizing
C. hardening
D. tempering
40. The operation of cooling a heated piece of
work rapidly by dipping it in water, brine or oil
A. quenching
B. tempering
C. normalizing
D. annealing
41. A method in softening a piece of metal that is
too hard to machine and is done by heating
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
steel slowly above the usual hardening
temperature keeping it at the heat for ½ to 2
hours then cooling slowly, preferably in a
furnace
A. broaching
B. quenching
C. normalizing
D. annealing
The total permissible variation in the size of a
dimension the difference between the limits of
size
A. allowance
B. tolerance
C. variance
D. interference
The operation of machining the end of a work
piece to make the end square with the axis
A. squaring
B. buffing
C. lapping
D. honing
The clearance between the tooth profiles of a
gear tooth
A. toothspace
B. backslash
C. flank
D. width
A mechanism which usually do the indexing in
a machine tool
A. slotter
B. chuck
C. dividing head
D. indexer
A material that can wear away a substance
softer than itself
A. phenol
B. abrasive
C. tungsten
D. chromium
A cylindrical bar of steel with threads formed
around it and grooves or flutes running
lengthwise in it, intersecting with the threads
to form cutting edges. It is used to cut internal
threads
A. groove
B. lap
C. tap
D. flute
48. A set of gages consisting of thin strips of metal
of various thickness mounted in a steel case or
holder and is widely used for measuring and
checking clearances
A. feeler gage
B. depth gage
C. line center gage
D. lay-out gage
49. A machine tool which is very similar to a
shaper except that the ram reciprocates
vertically rather than horizontally
A. Lathe
B. Grinder
C. Planer
D. Slotter
50. A machine tool principally to machine flat or
plane surfaces with single-point cutting tool
A. Grinder
B. Shaper
C. Planer
D. Turret machine
51. A kind of bolts which has no head an instead
has threads on both ends
A. Stud bolts
B. Acme threaded bolts
C. Square threaded bolts
D. Hex bolts
52. A kind of chuck which has a reversible jaws
which could be adjusted separately
A. Collet chuck
B. Independent chuck
C. Four jaw chuck
53. A tool which when pressed into finished hole
in a piece of work, provides centers on which
the piece may be turned or otherwise
machined
A. Mash
B. Butt
C. Mandrel
D. Wobble
54. A kind of chuck which should not used where
extreme accuracy is required
A. Collet chuck
B. Magnetic chuck
C. Four jaw chuck
D. Universal chuck
3
55. The process of checking or producing
checkers on the surface of a piece by rolling
checkered depression into the surface
A. Knurling
B. Hemming
C. Breading
D. Embossing
56. Its fits the main spindle of a lathe and is so
called because its acts as a bearing surface on
which the work rest. It revolves with the work.
When compared with the hardness of the dead
center in the tailstock, is usually soft, and is so
made since it does not work
A. Ram center
B. Spindle center
C. Live center
D. Bearing center
57. A gripping device with two or more adjustable
jaws radially
A. Chuck
B. Carriage
C. Tailstock
D. Fan
58. Steel Balls for ball bearings are manufactured
by
A. Turning
B. Rolling
C. Casting
D. Cold heading
59. Addendum of a cycloidal gear tooth
A. Cycloid
B. Epicycloids
C. Straight rack
D. Involutes
60. In a lathe, it comprises the main spindle, the
necessary mechanism for obtaining the various
spindle speed and also certain gears which are
used to operate the quick change gear
mechanism
A. Headstock
B. Carriage
C. Tailstock
D. Fan
61. The process of heating a piece of steel to a
temperature within or above critical range and
cooling rapidly
A. Normalizing
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
B. Hardening
C. Annealing
D. Tempering
Welding operation in which a non-ferrous
filler metal melts at a temperature below that
of the metal joined but is heated above 450oC
A. Gas welding
B. Spot welding
C. Brazing
D. Steam welding
Uniting two pieces of metal by means of a
different metal which applied between the two
in molten state
A. Casting
B. Welding
C. Soldering
D. Brazing
Fusion process of metal by means is heated
into a state of fusion permitting it to flow
together into a solid joint
A. Electric arc welding
B. Gas welding
C. Spot welding
Joining metal by means of high current at low
voltage. During the passage of current, pressure
by the electrodes produces a forge weld
A. Spot welding
B. Resistance welding
C. Steam welding
D. Gas welding
A device for accurately measuring diameters
A. Radiometer
B. Profilometer
C. Spectrometer
D. Micrometer
A group of thin steel strips for measuring
clearances
A. Distortion gage
B. Feeler gage
C. Line center gage
D. Deflection gage
A hand tool used to measure engine crank web
deflection
A. Distortion gage
B. Feeler gage
C. Line center gage
D. Deflection gage
69. A hand tool used to measure tension on bolts
A. Indexer
B. Torque wrench
C. Torsionmeter
D. Tensionmeter
70. The permissible variation in the size of a
dimension the difference between the limits of
size
A. Allowance
B. Variance
C. Clearance
D. Tolerance
71. A gear with teeth on the outer cylindrical
surface
A. Outer gear
B. External gear
C. Spiral gear
D. Helical gear
72. The diameter of a circle coinciding with the
top of the teeth of an internal gear
A. Pitch diameter
B. Root diameter
C. Internal diameter
D. Central diameter
73. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the
bottom of the tooth space
A. Root circle
B. Pitch circle
C. Addendum circle
D. Deddendum circle
74. The total depth of a tooth space, equal to
addendum plus deddendum
A. Full depth
B. Working depth
C. Whole depth
D. Deddendum
75. The depth of tooth space below the pitch
circle
A. Deddendum
B. Working depth
C. Full depth
D. Tooth depth
76. The ________ of gear to each mm pitch
diameter
A. Diametral pitch
B. Module
C. Circular pitch
4
D. English module
77. A machine tool in which abrasive wheel is used
as cutting tool obtain a very smooth finish
A. Drill
B. Grinder
C. Planer
D. Shaper
78. It is used to produce a variety of surfaces by
using a circular type cutter with multiple teeth
A. Grinding machine
B. Shaper
C. Drilling machine
D. Milling machine
79. It is used principally to machine flat or plane
surfaces with single point tool
A. Drill
B. Shaper
C. Planer
D. Grinder
80. Cutting a hole by means of rotating tool or the
work may revolve and to the tool remain fixed
as in the lathe
A. Piecing
B. Notching
C. Boring
D. Perforating
81. One of the following is not a tap used for
cutting threads in holes
A. Tapping tap
B. Plug tap
C. Taper tap
D. Bottoming tap
82. An index or dividing head
A. A part of drill press
B. Used to rotate work
C. Not used to cut helixes
D. Always manually operated
83. Galvanized iron is a term referring to iron
coated with
A. Tin
B. Zinc
C. Magnesium
D. Aluminum
84. The moment of inertia of a rectangle whose
base is “b” and height “h” about its base is
A. bh3/12
B. bh/46
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
C. bh3/3
D. bh2/4
In usual spur gearing
A. The pitch circle and the base are the
same
B. Working depth includes the clearance
C. Tooth outline are usually involute curves
D. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
A stainless steel is obtained principally by the
use of the following alloying element
A. Chromium
B. Tungsten
C. Carbon
D. Phenol
One of the following is not a common term
relating to the classification of fits
A. Tunking
B. Snug
C. Medium force fit
D. Bound
Hearing bone Gears are gears which
A. Do not operate on parallel shaft
B. Have a line contact between teeth
C. Consist of two left handed helical gears
D. Tend to produce thrust on the shafts
Internal stresses existing in a welded
connection
A. Are not relieved when the weld is
peened
B. Are not relieved by heat treatment
C. May be relieved when the weld is peened
D. Are relieved by x-ray analysis
In general the design stress and factor of safety
are related as follows
A. Design stress=ultimate stress times factor
of safety
B. Design stress=ultimate stress divided by
factor of safety
C. Design stress=design stress divided by
factor of safety
D. Design stress= factor of safety divided by
design stress
A group of thin steel strips for measuring
clearance
A. Depth cut
B. Feeler gage
C. Lay-out gage
D. Clearance gage
92. A hand tool used to measure tension on bolts
A. Indexer
B. Torsion meter
C. Torque wrench
D. Tension meter
93. A material that can wear away a substance
softer than itself
A. Abrasive
B. Corrosive
C. Tungsten
D. Alloy
94. The material used in high speed processes
A. High speed steel
B. Chromium
C. Cast iron
D. Carbon steel
95. An alloy of copper and zinc
A. Chromium
B. Bronze
C. Brass
D. Aluminum
96. An alloy of copper, tin, and small amount of
phosphorous
A. Chromium
B. Bronze
C. Brass
D. Aluminum
97. The process of working metals by the
application of sudden blows or by steady
pressure
A. Welding
B. Extrusion
C. Forging
D. Swaging
98. A welding operation in which a non-ferrous
filler metal melts at a temperature below that
of the metal joined but is heated above 450oC
A. Brazing
B. Spot welding
C. Gas welding
D. Projection welding
99. The operation of cooling a heated piece of
work rapidly by dipping it in water, brine, or
oil
A. Tempering
B. Annealing
5
C. Quenching
D. Normalizing
100. A machine tool used to machine flat surfaces
A. Shaper
B. Planer
C. Grinder
D. Lathe
ELEMENTS 02
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is
used a cutting to obtain a very smooth finish.
A. planer
B. shaper
C. power saw
D. grinder
It is used to produce a variety of surfaces by
using a circular type cutter with a multiple
teeth.
A. milling machine
B. broaching machine
C. beading machine
D. hemming machine
A heavy rotating body which serves as reservoir
for absorbing and redisturbing kinetic energy.
A. Shaft
B. Governor
C. Flywheel
D. Puncher
A kind of gear used for heavy duty works
where a large ratio of speed is required and is
extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Helical gear
B. Worm gear
C. Bevel gear
D. Spiral gear
A kind of gear used to transmit motion from
one shaft to another shaft at angle to the first.
A. Helical gear
B. Worm gear
C. Bevel gear
D. Spiral gear
The minimum thickness to steel members
exposed to weather and accessible for painting
is:
A. 6mm
B. 8mm
C. 4mm
D. 10mm
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
The common deoxidizer and cleanser of steel,
forming oxides and sulfates that are carried off
in the slag.
A. Manganese
B. Carbon
C. Tungsten
D. Sulfur
A highly transparent and exceeding hard
crystalline stone of almost pure carbon.
A. Gold
B. Diamond
C. Bronze
D. Crystalline
A fine grained, salty silica rock used for
sharpening edge tools.
A. Eutectoid
B. Austenite
C. Oilstone
D. Pearlite
An amorphous solid made by using silica with
a basic oxide.
A. Pearlite
B. Rock
C. Silicon
D. Glass
A soft yellow metal, known since ancient times
a precious metal which values are based.
A. Solidus
B. Bronze
C. Gold
D. Austenite
The operation of cooling a heated piece of
work rapidly by dropping it in water, brine or
oil.
A. Normalizing
B. Quenching
C. Annealing
D. Squeezing
A device used to prevent leakage of media.
A. Seal
B. Packing
C. Teflon
D. Graphite
A welding operation in which a non-ferrous
filler metal melts at a temperature below that
of the metal joined but is heated above 450oC.
A. Arc welding
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
B. Brazing
C. Spot welding
D. Butt welding
The process of working metals by the
application of sudden blows r by a steady
pressure.
A. Trimming
B. Welding
C. Forging
D. Lancing
The process of producing a variety of surface
by using a circular type cutter with multiple
teeth.
A. Piercing
B. Cutting
C. Embossing
D. Milling
The softening of meals by heat treatment and
most commonly consists of heating the metals
up to near molten state cooling them very
slowly.
A. Quenching
B. Tempering
C. Annealing
D. Forming
The maximum stress induced in a material
when subjected to alternating or repeated
loading without causing failure.
A. Elastic limit
B. Proportional limit
C. Rupture strength
D. Endurance limit
The total deformation measured in the
direction of the line of stress.
A. Axial deformation
B. Elongation
C. Strain
D. Unit stress
The maximum stress to which a material can
be subjected without a trace of any permanent
set remaining upon a complete withdrawal of
the stress.
A. Ultimate limit
B. Proportional limit
C. Endurance limit
D. Elastic limit
6
21. The total permissible variation in the size of a
dimension; the difference between the limits of
the size.
A. Deformation
B. Variance
C. Tolerance
D. Allowance
22. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having
relative sliding motion.
A. Lube oil
B. Lubrication
C. Graphite
D. Grease
23. Flexible materials used to seal pressurized
fluids, normally under dynamic conditions.
A. Packing
B. Teflon
C. Seals
D. Safety shield
24. A total resistance that a material offers to an
applied load.
A. Flexure
B. Stress
C. Elasticity
D. Rigidly
25. A property of material which relates the lateral
strains to the longitudinal strain.
A. Rigidity
B. Elasticity
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. Deflection
26. A kind of gear used for heavy duty works
where a large ratio of speed is required and is
extensively used in speed reducers.]
A. Spiral gear
B. Bevel gear
C. Worm gear
D. Helical gear
27. A kind of gear used to transmit motion from
one shaft to another shaft at an angle to the
first.
A. Spiral gear
B. Worm gear
C. Helical gear
D. Bevel gear
28. Which of the following is not a classification of
iron ore?
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
A. Hematite
B. Magnetite
C. Sulfurite
D. Siderite
Which of the following metals will respond to
heat treatment?
A. Cast iron
B. Medium carbon steel
C. Wrought iron
D. Low carbon steel
Which of the following is a non-magnetic?
A. Cast iron
B. Alloy steel
C. Cast steel
D. Manganese steel
The ability of metal to withstand without
breaking down is:
A. Stress
B. Strength
C. Strain
D. Elasticity
A machining operation whereby the tool
reciprocates and the feed is stationary is called:
A. Shaping
B. Reaming
C. Planning
D. Turning
Any material that retards the flow of electricity
used to prevent passage or escape of electric
current from conductors.
A. Insulators
B. Bricks
C. Ceramics
D. Refractories
A metallic element and the only metal that is
liquid at ordinary temperature.
A. Austenite
B. Mercury
C. Manganese
D. Martensite
An alloy of cooper and zinc.
A. Aluminum
B. Bronze
C. Brass
D. Nickel
Usually a copper- tin alloy is:
A. Aluminum
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
B. Nickel
C. Brass
D. Bronze
A tool with hardened points used for scribing
circles or laying of distances.
A. Trammel
B. Caliper
C. Divider
D. Micrometer
Name of mechanism which a welding operator
holds during gas welding and at the end of
which the gases are burned to perform the
various gas welding operations.
A. Mash
B. Core
C. Wobble
D. Torch
The maximum stress to which a material may
be subjected before failure occurs.
A. Rupture stress
B. Yield stress
C. Ultimate stress
D. Allowable stress
The maximum stress induced in a material
when subjected to alternate or repeated
loading without causing failure.
A. Yield point
B. Ultimate point
C. Endurance point
D. Proportional point
Which of the following is not a classification of
iron ore?
A. Hematite
B. Magnetic
C. Sulfurite
D. Siderite
Of the following metals, which will respond to
heat treatment?
A. Cast iron
B. Wrought iron
C. Medium iron
D. Low carbon iron
Materials, usually ceramics, employed where
resistance to very high temperature is required,
as for furnace lining and metal melting pots.
A. Refractories
B. Gaskets
7
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
C. Insulators
D. Safety shield
The softening of metals by heat treatment and
most commonly consists of heating the metals
up to near molten state and then cooling them
very slowly.
A. Annealing
B. Hardening
C. Normalizing
D. Tempering
The process of producing of variety of surfaces
by using a circular type cutter with multiple
teeth.
A. Milling
B. Drilling
C. Broaching
D. Boring
The process of working metals by the
application of sudden blows or by steady
pressure.
A. Rolling
B. Forging
C. Castling
D. Turning
A welding operation in which a non-ferrous
filler metal melts at a temperature below that
of the metal joined but is heated 450oC.
A. Spot welding
B. Gas welding
C. Brazing
D. Arc welding
The operation of cooling heated piece of work
rapid by dropping it in water, brine or oil.
A. Quenching
B. Tempering
C. Annealing
D. Normalizing
A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is
used as a cutting tool to obtain a very degree of
accuracy and a smooth finish on metal parts,
including soft and hardened steel.
A. Grinding machine
B. Broaching machine
C. Milling machine
D. Boring machine
50. A machine tool used principally to machine
flat or place surfaces with a single point cutting
tool.
A. Shaper
B. Planer
C. Grinder
D. Broaching machine
51. A tool used for measuring diameters.
A. Micrometer
B. Tachometer
C. Pyrometer
D. Caliper
52. The total permissible variation in the size of a
dimension; the difference between the limits of
the size.
A. Tolerance
B. Fits
C. Allowance
D. Clearance
53. The maximum stress to which a material can
be subjected without a trace of any permanent
set remaining upon a complete withdrawal of
the stress.
A. Ultimate stress
B. Rupture stress
C. Elastic limit
D. Proportional limit
54. Fluid film desired between two surfaces having
relative sliding motion.
A. Lubrication
B. Seal
C. Packing
D. Safety shield
55. A total deformation measured in the direction
of the line of stress.
A. Stress
B. Strain
C. Endurance limit
D. Poisson’s ratio
56. A kind of gear for heavy duty works where a
large ratio of speed is required and is
extensively used in speed reducers.
A. Worm gear
B. Spiral gear
C. Helical gear
D. Bevel gear
57. A kind of gear used to transmit motion from
one shaft to another shaft at an angle to the
first.
A. Worm gear
B. Spiral gear
C. Helical gear
D. Bevel gear
58. The area of a machine shop where metal is
being melted to form a new shape is:
A. Welding area
B. Mass production area
C. Foundry area
D. Tool and die
59. A machine used in shaping metal by means of
abrasive wheel or removal metals with an
abrasive is called:
A. Planer
B. Power saw
C. Shaper
D. Grinding machine
60. The ability of materials or metal to resist being
crushed is:
A. Compressive strength
B. Fatigue strength
C. Torsional strength
D. Bending strength
61. A machining operation whereby the tool
rotates while the feed is stationary.
A. Shaping
B. Milling
C. Turning
D. Reaming
62. A machining operation whereby the tool
reciprocates and the feed is stationary.
A. Reaming
B. Planning
C. Shaping
D. Turning
63. Which of the following metals is easy to chisel?
A. Alloy steel
B. Stainless steel
C. Manganese steel
D. Cast iron steel
64. Ferrous metals contain relatively large amount
of:
A. Carbon
B. Manganese
8
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
C. Phosphorous
D. Sulfur
Which of the following is not a strength
property of metals?
A. Tensile strength
B. Rocking strength
C. Fatigue strength
D. Torsional strength
Which of the following is not a kind of
mandrel?
A. Expansion mandrel
B. Contraction mandrel
C. Taper mandrel
D. Gang mandrel
Which of the following is not a part of lathe
machine?
A. Tailstock
B. Headstock
C. Carriage
D. Fan
The range of motors power in kW of a
universal milling machine, max feed
movement 1270 mm lengthwise, 355 mm
lateral, and 508 mm vertical is:
A. 11 to 15 kW
B. 16 to 21 kW
C. 7.5 to 10 kW
D. 22 to 30 kW
The motor power in kW of a punch press, 50.8
mm hole diameter, 25.4 mm thickness, for soft
steel is:
A. 15kW
B. 21 kW
C. 7.5 kW
D. 30 kW
The range of motor power in kW of a
cylindrical grinding machine 600 x 50 mm
wheel size, 2,400 to 4, 200 mm center distance
is:
A. 11 to 15 kW
B. 16 to 21 kW
C. 7.5 kW
D. 22 to 30 kW
The motor power in kW of a forming r
bending machine 1600 mm width, 508 mm
head movement is:
A. 7.5 kW
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
B. 11 kW
C. 15 kW
D. 22 kW
The range of motor power in kW of an Engine
lathe machine, average service 1000 mm to
13000 mm swing.
A. 11 to 15 kW
B. 7.5 to 10 kW
C. 16 to 21 kW
D. 22 to 30 kW
A machine which can flatten surfaces on a
horizontal, vertical or angular plane.
A. Shaper
B. Planer
C. Power saw
D. Tool grinder
The ability of metal to withstand forces thus
following a number of twists.
A. Shear strength
B. Bearing strength
C. Endurance limit
D. Deformation
A property of material which relates the lateral
strain to the longitudinal strain.
A. Stress
B. Modulus of elasticity
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. Deformation
A total resistance that a material offers to an
applied load.
A. Friction force
B. Stress
C. Rigidity
D. Compressive force
A total deformation measured in the direction
of the line of stress.
A. Strain
B. Elasticity
C. Elongation
D. Contraction
An alloy of copper and zinc.
A. Aluminum
B. Brass
C. Bronze
D. Chromium
A metallic element of copper-tin alloy.
A. Aluminum
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
B. Brass
C. Bronze
D. Chromium
A metallic element and only metal that is
liquid at ordinary temperature.
A. Aluminum
B. Mercury
C. Zirconium
D. Zinc
Any material that retard the flow of electricity,
used to prevent passage or escape of electric
current from conductors.
A. Refractory
B. Ceramics
C. Coating materials
D. Insulation
The maximum stress to which a material may
be subjected before failure occurs.
A. rupture strength
B. ultimate strength
C. yield strength
D. proportional limit
The maximum stress induced in a material
when subjected to alternating repeated loading
without causing failure.
A. ultimate strength
B. yield strength
C. endurance strength
D. rupture strength
Fluid film desired between two surfaces having
relatively sliding motion.
A. lube oil
B. graphite
C. packing
D. lubrication
The ability of material to withstand loads
without breaking down
A. Strength
B. Elasticity
C. Rigidity
Materials usually ceramics, employed where
resistance to very high temperature is required
as furnace lining and metal melting pots.
A. Insulators
B. Gaskets
C. Packing
D. Refractories
9
87. An allying element used principally to produce
stainless steel.
A. aluminum
B. brass
C. bronze
D. chromium
88. A coating material used to produce galvanized
iron.
A. Zirconium
B. Zinc
C. Aluminum
D. Chromium
89. A group of thin steel strips used for measuring
clearance.
A. feeler gage
B. tachometer
C. micrometer
D. caliper
90. A hand tool used to measure tension in bolts.
A. torque wrench
B. tachometer
C. shaver
D. sensor
91. Ratio of pitch diameter to the number of
teeth.
A. diametrical pitch
B. module
C. contact ratio
D. helical overlap
92. A circle the radius of which is equal to the
distance from the gear axis to the pitch point.
A. pitch circle
B. root circle
C. base circle
D. outside circle
93. A circle coinciding with a tangent to the
bottom of the tooth spaces.
A. pitch circle
B. root circle
C. base circle
D. outside circle
94. The method of cold working by compression.
A. Broaching
B. Lapping
C. Piercing
D. Reaming
95. A machine tool used finish internal and
external surfaces by the use of cutter called a
broach, which has a series of cutting edges or
teeth.
A. lathe machine
B. broaching machine
C. planer
D. shaper
96. A cutting tool which is made to move slowly
while acting on the work which is revolving on
a horizontal axis.
A. lathe machine
B. broaching machine
C. planer
D. shaper
97. A machine tool used to produce a variety of
surfaces by using circular type cutter with
multiple teeth.
A. lathe machine
B. milling machine
C. broaching machine
D. grinding machine
98. Used in the production of flat surfaces on
pieces too large or too heavy to hold in a
shaper.
A. Planer
B. Shaper
C. Grinder
D. Shaver
99. Used to machine flat or curved surfaces with a
tool which moves in a reciprocating motion.
A. planer
B. shaper
C. grinder
D. lathe
100. Which of the following materials that can wear
away a substance softer than itself
A. Abrasive
B. Tungsten
C. Carbon
D. corrosive
ELEMENTS 03
1.
A tool with hardened steel points used for
scribing or lying of distances.
A. Plain scriber
B. divider
C. a trammel
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D. hermaphrodite
A machine tool used principally to machine
flat or plane surfaces with a single pointed tool.
A. Shaper
B. Planer
C. Drill
D. Power saw
A machine tool in which an abrasive wheel is
used as cutting tool to obtained a very smooth
finish.
A. Broaching machine
B. Planer
C. Tool grinder
D. Milling machine
The process of working metals by the
application of sudden blows or by steady
pressure.
A. Casting
B. Turning
C. Forging
D. Rolling
The operation of cooling a heated piece of
work rapidly by dipping it water, brine or oil
A. Quenching
B. Annealing
C. Tempering
D. Normalizing
The softening of metals by heat treatment and
most commonly consists of heating the metal
up to near molten state and then cooling it
very slowly.
A. Annealing
B. Indexing
C. Knurling
D. Soldering
A fluid film desired between surfaces relative
sliding motion.
A. Lube oil
B. Lubrication
C. Grease
D. Graphite
A kind of gear used to transmit motion from
one shaft to another shaft at an angle to the
first.
A. Worm gear
B. Bevel gear
C. Helical gear
10
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
D. Spur gear
The principal material used in high production
metal working tools.
A. Hyper- Eutectoid
B. High speed steel
C. Lead
D. High speed carbon
A heavy rotating body which serves as a
reservoir for absorbing and redistributing
kinetic energy.
A. Flywheel
B. governor
C. shaft
D. puncher
A machine used in shaping metal by means of
an abrasive wheel or the removal of metals
with an abrasive is called:
A. Planer machine
B. Power saw
C. Shaper machine
D. Grinding machine
Which of the following is not a part of lathe
machine?
A. Tailstock
B. Fan
C. Carriage
D. headstock
Which of the following is easy to chisel?
A. Cast iron
B. Alloy steel
C. Cast steel
D. Manganese steel
A machining operation whereby the tool
reciprocates and the feed is stationary is called:
A. Shaping
B. Reaming
C. Planning
D. Turning
Which of the following is not a kind of
mandrel?
A. Expansion mandrel
B. Taper mandrel
C. Contraction mandrel
D. Foundry mandrel
The area of the machine shop where the metal
is being melted to form a new shape.
A. Welding area
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
B. Mass production area
C. Foundry area
D. Tool and die area
Which of the following is not used to temper
steel?
A. Brine salt bath
B. Oil bath
C. Water bath
D. Steam bath
Which of the following is not a kind of cast
iron?
A. Malleable iron
B. Head iron
C. Gray iron
D. White iron
The kind of center which is being attached and
meshed to the tailstock spindle which is also
static while the work is rotating:
A. Dead center
B. Live center
C. Focal center
D. Work center
Which of the following is not part of the
headstock?
A. Spindle
B. Anvil
C. Back gear
D. Motor
Which process does not belong to the group?
A. Vise grip
B. Adjustable wrench
C. Torque wrench
D. Feeler gage
Which does not belong to the group?
A. Resistance welding
B. Soldering
C. Hardening
D. Brazing
Substances having sufficient carbon and /or
hydrogen for chemical oxidation to produce
exothermally, worthwhile quantities of heat.
A. Lubrication
B. Graphite
C. Grease
D. Fuels
A device that measures atmospheric pressure.
A. Piezometer
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
B. Hydrometer
C. Barometer
D. Odometer
The mass of the body per unit of volume.
A. Volume flow rate
B. Density
C. Weight
D. Mass
Subjecting a substance to a high temperature
below the fusion point, usually to make it
friable.
A. Calcinations
B. Fusion
C. Boiling
D. Superheating
Special metal formed when to or more metals
are melted together.
A. Monel
B. Alloy
C. Solder
D. Hastalloy
The ability of a moving body to perform work.
A. Internal energy
B. Potential energy
C. Kinetic energy
D. Flow work
Hardening the surface of iron- based alloys by
heating them below the melting point in
contact with a carbonaceous substance.
A. Carburizing
B. Normalizing
C. Mar tempering
D. Hardening
Any materials that retard the flow electricity
used to prevent or escaped of electric current
from conductors.
A. Bricks
B. Insulators
C. Refractories
D. Ceramics
Material, usually ceramics, employed where
resistance to very high temperature is required,
as for furnace linings and metal melting pots.
A. Bricks
B. Insulators
C. Refractories
D. ceramics
11
32. A device used to prevent leakage of media.
A. Packing
B. Safety shield
C. Gasket
D. Seals
33. The internal resistance a material offers to
being deformed and is measured in terms of
applied load.
A. Strain
B. Elasticity
C. Stress
D. Resilience
34. The deformation that results from a stress and
is expressed in terms of the amount of
deformation per inch.
A. Elongation
B. Strain
C. Poisson’ s ratio
D. Elasticity
35. The ability of the material to return to its
original shape after being elongated or
distorted when the forces are released.
A. Elasticity
B. Brittleness
C. Plasticity
D. Creep
36. The last point at which a material may be
stretched and still return to its unreformed
condition upon release of the stress.
A. Rupture limit
B. Elastic limit
C. Proportional limit
D. Ultimate limit
37. The ratio of stress to strain within the elastic
limit.
A. Creep
B. Modulus of rigidity
C. Modulus of elasticity
D. Poisson’s ratio
38. The ability of a metal to withstand forces that
causes a member to twist.
A. Shear strength
B. Tensile strength
C. Bearing strength
D. Torsional strength
39. The ability of a material to resist being
crushed.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
A. Tensile strength
B. Shearing strength
C. Compressive strength
D. Torsion
The ability of metal to stretch, bend or twist
without breaking or cracking.
A. Elasticity
B. Ductility
C. Brittleness
D. plasticity
The property of a material which resist forces
action to pull the material apart.
A. Shear strength
B. Tensile strength
C. Compressive strength
D. Bearing strength
The property of steel which resist indention or
penetration.
A. Hardness
B. Elasticity
C. Ductility
D. None of these
In the color coding of pipe, the color for a
pipeline of air is:
A. Light blue
B. Light orange
C. White
D. Green
In the color coding of pipe, the color for a
pipeline of water is:
A. Light blue
B. Green
C. Brown
D. Silver grey
In the color coding of pipe, the color for a
pipeline of steam is:
A. Light orange
B. White
C. Silver grey
D. Light blue
The color for a pipeline of electricity in the
color coding of pipe is:
A. Light orange
B. White
C. Silver grey
D. Light blue
47. In the color coding of pipe, the color for a
pipeline of communication is:
A. Light blue
B. White
C. Brown
D. Light orange
48. The color pipeline of fuel oil in the color
coding of pipe is:
A. Light blue
B. Brown
C. White
D. Light orange
49. For high speed application the minimum
number of teeth in small sprocket should be:
A. 18 to 24
B. 26 to 30
C. 14 to 18
D. 24 to 28
50. The good deoxidizer in steel melting is:
A. Manganese
B. Aluminum
C. Silicon
D. All of these
51. In majority of machine members, the dumping
capacity of the material should be:
A. Zero
B. High
C. Low
D. Anything
52. For moderate speed for mating gears, the ideal
ratio of contact is:
A. 1.35- 1.55
B. 1.0- 1.3
C. 1.25- 1.45
D. 1.25- 4.0
53. The diameter of the screw thread is same as:
A. Pitch diameter
B. Minor diameter
C. Major diameter
D. Base diameter
54. For high corrosion resistant stainless steel,
what maximum chromium content is required?
A. 8.0%
B. 4.5%
C. 1.5%
D. 8.5%
12
55. At quite low temperatures (say- 75 deg. C) the
notched bar impact value of steel.
A. Increases significantly
B. Decreases significantly
C. Remain unchanged
D. Depends on heat treatment
56. In order to realize the advantage of fluid
friction, it is essential to have:
A. No oil film
B. Converging oil film
C. Diverging oil film
D. Parallel oil film in bearing
57. Zero axial thrust is experienced in:
A. Herringbone gears
B. Helical gears
C. Bevel gears
D. Worm gears
58. The maximum size of the fillet weld that can
be made in single pass is:
A. 3mm.
B. 6mm.
C. 7mm.
D. 4mm.
59. Muntz metal contains:
A. Copper-aluminum
B. Copper-tin
C. Copper- nickel
D. Copper-zinc
60. Steel balls for bearings are manufactured by:
A. Cold- heading
B. Casting
C. Rolling
D. turning
61. In general, alloys with high nickel content
retain toughness to quite low temperature up
to:
A. -250 F
B. -360 F
C. -320 F
D. -240°F
62. Manganese steel standard designation is
SAE___.
A. 8XXX
B. 10XX
C. 12XX
D. 13XX
63. A Babbitt is:
A.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
A cutectic of iron and iron
phosphide
B. A gadget for measuring volume
C. A measure of magnetic induction
produces in a material
D. Antimony bearing lead or tin alloy
The minimum thickness of steel members
exposed to weather and accessible for painting
is:
A. 4mm.
B. 6mm.
C. 8mm.
D. 10mm.
In standard coarse thread bolt, the stress
concentration is maximum at:
A. All over the surface
B. Top surface
C. Root
D. Flank
Which of the following ropes are more
flexible?
A. 6 to 19
B. 6 to 7
C. 8 by 19
D. 6 by 37
Tools usually used in wood pattern making in
foundry shop.
A. Band saw
B. Saws and chisels
C. Knives and drills
D. Grinder
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Hex bolt
B. Stud bolt
C. Square threaded bolts
D. Eye bolt
Cast iron flywheels are commonly designed
with factor of safety of:
A. 9 to 12
B. 8 to 11
C. 10 to 13
D. 7 to 10
Which of the type of chain is used in
motorcycle?
A. Silent
B. Pintle
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
C. Brush roller
D. Long
Spiral gears are suitable for transmitting:
A. Any power
B. Small power
C. Huge power
D. Pulsating power
The type of cam used for low and moderate
speed engines is generally:
A. Flat
B. Involute
C. Tangent
D. Harmonic
Gears for wrist watches are generally
manufactured by:
A. Molding
B. Stamping
C. Galvanizing
D. Honing
The rated life of a bearing changes:
A. Inversely as cube of load
B. Directly as load
C. Inversely as square of load
D. Inversely as load
The best material for brake drum is:
A. Cast iron
B. Steel
C. Aluminum
D. Wrought iron
An elastic body whose primary function is to
deflect under load.
A. Spring
B. Brake
C. Stopper
D. Clutch
Belt slip may take place because of:
A. Loose load
B. Heavy belt
C. Driving pulley too small
D. All of the above
Rankine formula is valid up to slender ratio of:
A. 60
B. 80
C. 120
D. 150
In flange coupling the weakest element should
be:
13
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
A. Flange
B. Key
C. Bolts
D. Shaft
A flange coupling is:
A. Used for collinear shafts
B. Used for non- collinear shafts
C. Rigid coupling
D. Flexible
Universal coupling is:
A. Used for collinear shafts
B. Used for non- collinear shafts
C. Type of flange coupling
D. Rigid coupling
In powder metallurgy the process of heating
the cold pressed metal powder is called:
A. deposition
B. granulation
C. sintering
D. precipitation
Which one is different from the remaining?
A. nitriding
B. cyaniding
C. electroplating
D. flame hardening
Splines are used when:
A. The power transmitted is low
B. The power to be transmitted is high
C. Axial relative motion between
shafts and hub is necessary
D. Flame hardening
Delta iron occurs at temperature of:
A. Room temperature
B. Above melting point
C. Between 1400˚C and 1539˚C
D. Between 1000˚C and 1400˚C
The most important element that controls the
physical properties of steel is:
A. Carbon
B. Silicon
C. Manganese
D. Tungsten
The process commonly used for thermo-plastic
material is:
A. Die casting
B. Injection molding
C. Shell molding
D. Cold forming
88. Select the one that has highest specific gravity:
A. Aluminum
B. Lead
C. Brass
D. High carbon steel
89. Age- hardening is related with:
A. Cast iron
B. Stainless steel
C. Duralumin
D. German silver
90. Foundry crucible is made of:
A. German silver
B. Lead
C. Mild steel
D. Graphite
91. Trimming process is a process associated with:
A. Forging
B. Machining of metals
C. Electroplating
D. Press work
92. A plug gauge is used to measure:
A. Taper bores
B. Cylindrical bores
C. Spherical holes
D. Screw threads
93. In arc welding operations the current value is
decided by:
A. Length of welded portion
B. Voltage across the arc
C. Size of the electrode
D. Thickness of plate
94. The phenomenon of weld decay takes place in:
A. Cast iron
B. Brass
C. Bronze
D. Stainless steel
95. Choose the one that will have highest cutting
speed.
A. Aluminum
B. Brass
C. Bronze
D. Cast iron
96. Projection welding is:
A. Continuous spot welding process
B. Used to make mesh
C. Multi- spot welding process
D. Used to form
97. Least shrinkage allowance is provided in the
case of which of the following:
A. Cast iron
B. Aluminum
C. White cast iron
D. Brass
98. Dilatometer is used to find out which property
of molding sand.
A. permeability
B. hot strength
C. fineness
D. moisture content
99. Hastalloy contains:
A. Copper
B. Nickel and copper
C. Copper and aluminum
D. Nickel and molybdenum
100. The maximum harden ability of any steel
depends on:
A. The carbon content
B. The chemical composition
C. The grain size
D. The alloying elements present
Elements 04
1.
2.
3.
4.
The hardness of steel increases if it contains:
a. Martensite
b. Pearlite
c. Austenite
d. All of the above
How do you call steel with 0.8% carbon and
100% pearlite?
a. Austenite
b. Solidus
c. hyper-eutectoid
d. eutectoid
What is the range of the tensile strength of
common varieties of cast iron?
a. 40-60 Mpa
b. 150-180 Mpa
c. 840-500 Mpa
d. 1500-1650 Mpa
Fatigue failure occurs when a part is subjected
to:
a. Compressive stress
b. tensile stress
c. torsional stress
14
d. fluctuating stress
Paramagnetic alpha iron changes to gamma
iron at what temperature?
a. 440°C
b. 910°C
c. 70°C
d. 1639°C
6. The diameter of the washer is generally:
a. Equal to the diameter of the bolt
b. Slightly more than the diameter of the
bolt
c. Slightly less than the diameter of the bolt
d. Of any size that suits the application
7. The compression members tend to buckle in
the direction of:
a. Axis of load
b. Minimum cross-section
c. least radius of gyration
d. perpendicular to the axis of load
8. A kinematic chain needs a minimum:
a. 2 links and 2 turning pairs
b. 3 links and turning pairs
c. 4 links and 4 turning pairs
d. 3 links and 2 turning pairs
9. Which of the following pairs is formed if shaft
is revolving in a bearing?
a. Lower pair
b. turning pair
c. sliding pair
d. cylindrical pair
10. How many links are there in a pantograph?
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6
11. A pantograph is a mechanism having:
a. Lower pairs
b. rolling pairs
c. spherical pairs
d. higher pairs
12. Which of the following describes the “slip” in
belt drive?
a. Loss in power
b. Difference between the angular velocities
of two pulley
c. Difference between linear speed of the
rim
d.
5.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Difference between the linear speed of
the rim of pulley and the on it
Which of the following is the orientation of
the axes of the two shafts in cross helical
worm?
a. Parallel
b. Non-parallel
c. Intersecting
d. non-parallel and non-intersecting
In case of gears the addendum is given by:
a. One module
b. 2.16 x module
c. 1.57 x module
d. 1.25 / module
How do you call a cam where in the follower
reciprocates or oscillates in a plane parallel to
its axis?
a. Circular cam
b. reciprocating cam
c. cylindrical cam
d. oscillating cam
How are gears for watches generally
manufactured?
a. Die casting
b. Machining on hobber
c. power metallurgy process
d. stamping
Rope brake dynamometer uses what?
a. Oil as lubricant
b. No lubricant
c. grease as lubricant
d. water as lubricant
Which of the following could be the effect of
cold working?
a. Increases the fatigue strength
b. Decreases the fatigue strength
c. Has no influence on fatigue strength
d. None of these
In testing a material for endurance strength, it
is subjected to:
a. Completely reversed load
b. Static load
c. impact load
d. dynamic load
Coaxing is the procedure of increasing:
a. Metal strength
b. Metal hardness by surface treatment
c.
d.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Metal resistance to corrosion by coating
Fatigue limit by overstressing the metal
by successively increasing loadings
Up to what percent thickness of plate, edge
preparation for welding is not needed?
a. 2 mm
b. 4 mm
c. 8 mm
d. 12 mm
Arc blow takes place in:
a. Gas welding
b. Arc welding when straight polarity is used
c. Arc welding when reversed polarity is
used
d. Welding stainless steel
What is the function clutch in the machine
tool?
a. Alignment of drive
b. Lowering of drive
c. To insure that two shafts line up at high
speed
d. To connect shaft so that the driven shaft
will rotate with the driving shaft and to
disconnect them at all
The height of tooth above the pitch circle or
the radial distance between pitch circle and top
land of the tooth.
a. Addendum
b. Deddendum
c. top root
d. top land
How do you call the distance of the tooth
which is equal to the sum of the addendum
and deddendum?
a. Full depth
b. working depth
c. whole depth
d. pitch
Which of the following stresses that is
independent of loads?
a. Shear stress
b. residual stress
c. design stress
d. yield stress
Which of the following is not used to resemble
the shape of tool bit?
a. Thread cutting
15
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
b. center cutting
c. square nose
d. round nose
What is the recommended best cutting angle
of drill for work on steel or cast iron?
a. 39 degrees
b. 49 degrees
c. 59 degrees
d. 29 degrees
Copper and most of its alloys can be hardened
by which of the following?
a. Cold working
b. Soaking
c. Patenting
d. case hardening
Types of V-belts to use in a driving pulley with
speed of 360 rpm and transmitting 5 Hp.
a. Type A belts
b. type B belts
c. type C belts
d. type D belts
Which of the following is not an angle
measuring device?
a. Bevel protector
b. Sine bar
c. combination square
d. angle iron
The mould for casting ferrous materials in
continuous casting process is made of what
material?
a. Copper
b. Medium carbon steel
c. high carbon steel
d. low carbon steel
Clutch slippage while clutch is engaged is
especially noticeable:
a. During idling
b. A low speed
c. during acceleration
d. during braking
In general, to engage securely and prevent
dragging, what is the clearance between release
bearing and release collar in the clutch?
a. 2-3 mm
b. 4-5 mm
c. 6-7 mm
d. 8-9 mm
35. Piston compression rings are made of what
material?
a. Steel
b. Bronze
c. Aluminum
d. cast iron
36. What is the usual value of helix angle of a drill?
a. 120 degrees
b. 110 degrees
c. 60 degrees
d. 30 degrees
37. What is meant by drossing?
a. A method of cleaning the casting
b. An inspection method for casting
c. A method of deoxidation of molten metal
d. The formation of oxides on the molten
metal surface
38. If the first digit in AISI and SAE designations
is one (1), then, it indicates what?
a. Carbon steel
b. Nickel steel
c. molybdenum steel
d. chromium steels
39. Which of the following where the gear tooth
vernier is used to measure?
a. Module
b. Gear tooth profile
c. gear tooth thickness of gear tooth
d. pitch line thickness of gear tooth
40. A cold chisel is made of what?
a. Mild steel
b. German silver
c. high carbon steel
d. cast iron
41. It is the ability of a material to absorb energy
when deformed elastically and return it when
unloaded.
A. Creep
B. fatigue strength
C. resilience
D. toughness
42. Which of the following cams where the
follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane
parallel to the axis of rotation?
a. Cam curves
b. radial cam
c. cylindrical cam
d. tangential cam
43. Which of the following cams where the
follower reciprocates or oscillates in a plane
perpendicular its axis of rotation?
a. Tangential cam
b. cam curves
c. radial cam
d. cylindrical cam
44. During tensile test, which of the following
stress-strain curve(s) fits for a glass rod?
a. A straight line
b. A parabola
c. an irregular curve
d. a sudden break
45. In case of a knuckle joint, the pin is most likely
to fail in:
a. Shear
b. Tension
c. Compression
d. double shear
46. A single ply leather belt running at a belt
velocity of 300 ft/min is likely to transmit per
inch of width:
a. 2.5 Hp
b. 3.0 Hp
c. 4.0 Hp
d. 5.0 Hp
47. At what temperature range where
ferromagnetic alpha iron exists?
a. Below 723°C
b. 700-910°C
c. 1000-1440°C
d. above 1539°C
48. How do you call a body having identical
properties all over?
a. Heterogeneous
b. Homogeneous
c. Elastic
d. Ductile
49. How is the material described if it recovers its
original dimensions when the load is removed?
a. Elastic
b. Plastic
c. Brittle
d. Malleable
50. What is the percentage of carbon in Eutectoid
steel?
16
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
a. .02%
b. 0.30%
c. 0.63%
d. 0.80%
The presence of sulphur in pig iron makes:
a. The casting unsound
b. It brittle
c. it hard
d. it is easy machinable
What is the effect of alloying zinc to copper?
a. Increases hardness
b. Impart free-machining
c. Improve hardness and strength
d. Increases strength and ductility (if added
up to 10-30%)
The imperfection in the crystal structure of
metal is:
a. Impurity
b. fracture slip
c. slip
d. dislocation
When is the pressure release in resistance
welding?
a. After the weld cools
b. During heating period
c. After completion of current
d. Just at the time of passing the current
If t is the thickness of sheet to be spot welded,
then electrode tip diameter is equal to _____.
a. t2
b. 2 sq rt. of t
c. sq. rt. of t
d. 1.5 sq. rt. of 1
A twist drill specified by which of the
following?
a. Its shank and diameter
b. Shank, material and flute size
c. its diameter and lip angle
d. shank, material and diameter
Which of the following is used to measure the
clearance between the value and tappet of an
automobile engine?
a. Shape gauge
b. slip gauge
c. feeler gauge
d. vernier scale
Speedometer drive is generally taken from:
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
a. Gear box
b. fan belt
c. flywheel
d. front wheel
What is the usual percentage of cut on the
return stroke of hacksaw blade?
a. 0
b. 5
c. 7
d. 9
Which of the following will best describe
sunken key?
a. The keyway is helical along shaft
b. The keyway is cut in shaft only
c. The keyway is cut in hub only
d. The key is cut in both shaft and hub
Which of the following where turn buckle has?
a. Left hand threads on one end and right
hand threads on other end
b. Right hand threads on both ends
c. Left hand threads on both ends
d. No threads
Which of the following is the best process for
butt welding of two plates each of which is 25
mm thick?
a. Electro slag welding
b. Gas welding
c. submerge arc welding
d. steam welding
Which of the following statement(s) is correct
for an oil less bearing:
a. The oil film is maintained by supplying
oil under pressure
b. The oil film pressure is produced only by
rotation of the journal
c. Do not need external supply of lubricant
d. Grease is needed to be applied after some
intervals
The working load P for a chain for crane
applications is expressed in terms of diameter
of link “d” in cm as follows.
a. P=1.5d2
b. P=25d2
c. P=50d2
d. P=500d2
The column splice is used for increasing:
a. Cross-sectional area of the column
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
b. Length of the column
c. strength of the column
d. All of the above
At what temperature those Gamma irons exist?
a. Between 910°C and 1400°C
b. Between 1400°C and 1539°C
c. Near melting point
d. Room temperature
The behavior of metals where in strength of a
material is increased and the ductility is
decreased on heating at a relatively low
temperature after cold working is called:
a. Clustering
b. Twinning
c. screw dislocation
d. strain aging
Which of the following statement(s) is correct
in “carbon steel castings”?
a. the percentage of carbon is less than
1.7%
b. the percentage of carbon is between 1.7%
to 2%
c. the percentage for alloying elements is
controlled
d. none of the above
Aluminum alloys for pressure die casting:
a. Must not be free from hot shortness
b. Must have iron as one of the
constitutions
c. Must not posses considerable fluidity
d. Must be light
Which of the following is the maximum in 184-1 high speed steel?
a. Tungsten
b. Chromium
c. Argon
d. iron
Super conductors:
a. Exist at temperature below 10K
b. Are the dense metals without voids
c. Are non-metallic substances
d. Are the purest forms of metals
When large number of components ate turned
and parted off from a bar, the chuck generally
used is:
a. Two jaw chuck
b. Four jaw chuck
17
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
c. collet chuck
d. magnetic chuck
Cutting speed for some materials are as under
which one of the following could be cutting
speed for brass?
a. 30 m/min
b. 40 m/min
c. 80 m/min
d. 50 m/min
If V is the volume of metal in casting and A is
its surface area, then the time of solidification
will be proportional to:
a. V2 , 1/A
b. 1/V2 , A2
c. V , 1/A2
d. V2 , 1/A2
The draft allowance on metallic pattern as
compared to wooden ones is:
a. More
b. Same
c. Less
d. more or less depending on size
Arc metal patterns are used for:
a. Precision castings
b. Small castings
c. Large castings
d. Large scale production of castings
What tool is used in foundry for repairing the
mould?
a. Swab
b. Gagger
c. Bellows
d. rammer
What tool is used in foundry for smoothening
and cleaning out depression in the mould?
a. Swab
b. Gagger
c. Bellows
d. rammer
Which of the following does not have to be
lubricated when drilling?
A. Brass
B. Steel
C. Monel
D. mild steel
The tool used in precision work to smooth or
enlarge holes is called a:
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
a. Round out
b. drift pin
c. reamer
d. protractor
When measuring a drill for size, measure
across the:
a. Margins
b. Flutes
c. Shank
d. point
How do you call the tool used for cleaning
files?
a. File cleaner
b. file card
c. file oilstone
d. scraper
The melting point of Babbitt is approximately:
a. 1000°F
b. 650°F
c. 750°F
d. 500°F
How is tubing measured?
a. Inside diameter
b. outside diameter
c. thickness of wall
d. wire gage
Which of the following metals will respond to
heat treatment?
a. Cast iron
b. wrought iron
c. medium carbon steel
d. low carbon steel
the ability of metal to withstand loads without
breaking down is:
a. stress
b. strength
c. strain
d. elasticity
Which of the following metals is nonmagnetic?
a. Cast iron
b. alloy steel
c. cast steel
d. manganese steel
A machining operation whereby the tool
reciprocated and the feed is stationary.
a. Planning
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
b. Shaping
c. Turning
d. reaming
Which of the following is not a tap used for
cutting threads in holes?
a. Tapping tap
b. plug tap
c. tapper tap
d. bottoming tap
Herring bone gears are gears which:
a. Do not operate on parallel shafts
b. Have a line contact between the teeth
c. Consists of two left handed helical gears
d. Tend to produce thrust on the shafts
Which of the following statements is true for
the internal stresses existing in a welded
connection?
a. Internal stresses are not relieved by heat
treatment
b. Internal stresses are not relieved when
weld is peened
c. Internal stresses may be relieved when
weld is peened
d. Internal stresses are relieved by x-ray
analysis
Stainless steel is obtained principally by the use
of which of the alloying elements?
a. Chromium
b. Nickel
c. Carbon
d. tungsten
Galvanized iron is a term referring to iron
coated with:
a. Tin
b. Zinc
c. Magnesium
d. aluminum
Which of the following is not a common term
relating to the classification of fits?
a. Tunking
b. Snug
c. medium force fit
d. bound
In usual spur gearing, which of the following
statement(s) is correct?
a. Pitch circles and base circles are the same
b. Working depth includes the clearance
18
c. Tooth outline are usually involute curves
d. Tooth outline are usually cycloidal curves
96. In general, the design stress and factor of
a\safety are related as follows:
a. Design stress=ultimate stress times factor
of safety
b. Design stress= ultimate stress divided by
factor of safety
c. Factor of safety= design stress divided by
ultimate stress
d. Ultimate stress=factor of safety divided by
design stress
97. In usual spur gearing, the:
a. Pitch circle and base circle are the same
b. Working depth includes clearance
c. Tooth outline are always cycloidal curves
d. Tooth outline are usually involute curves
98. Which of the following is the not the other
name of circumferential stress for thin walled
cylinders.
a. Hoop stress
b. girth stress
c. tangential stress
d. longitudinal stress
99. How do you call the ratio of the volumetric
strain?
a. Modulus in shear
b. Stress to strain ratio
c. volumetric ratio
d. bulk modulus
100. Hearing bone gears are gears which:
a. Do not operate parallel shafts
b. Have a line contact between the teeth
c. Tend to produce and thrust on the shafts
d. Consists of two left handed helical gears
ELEMENTS 05
1.
2.
The ability of metals to stand loads without
breaking down:
a. Strain
b. Stress
c. Elasticity
d. Strength
Which of the following is not a classification of
iron ore:
a. Siderite
b. Hermatite
c. Sulfurite
d. Magnetite
Ferrous metals contains a relative large amount
of:
a. Manganese
b. Carbon
c. Sulfur
d. Phosphorous
4. Which of the following metal is easy to chisel?
a. Alloy steel
b. Manganese steel
c. Stainless steel
d. Cast iron
5. The ability of material or metal to resist being
crushed is:
a. Fatigue strength
b. Bending strength
c. Torsional strength
d. Compressive strength
6. Which of the following is not part of the
headstock?
a. Anvil
b. Spindle
c. Motor
d. Back pressure
7. Which of the following is not used to temper
steel?
a. Oil bath
b. Brine/salt bath
c. Steam bath
d. Water bath
8. Which of the following is not a kind of cast
iron?
a. Gray iron
b. White iron
c. Malleable iron
d. Lead iron
9. A machinery operation whereby the tool
rotates while the feed is stationary.
a. Shaping
b. Milling
c. Turning
d. Reaming
10. What process does not belong to the group?
a. Brazing
b. Soldering
c. Hardening
d. Resistance welding
3.
11. Which tool does not belong to the group?
a. Vice grip
b. Feeler gage
c. Torque wrench
d. Adjustable wrench
12. Which of the following metals is non –
magnetic?
a. Manganese steel
b. Cast steel
c. Alloy steel
d. Cast iron
13. One important skill that operators of machine
tools must have is an understanding of
measurement which demands:
a. Speed
b. Precision
c. Sociability
d. Neatness
14. Which of the following is not part of a lathe
machine?
a. Fan
b. Carriage
c. Headstock
d. Tailstock
15. The machine which can flatten surface on a
horizontal, vertical or angular plane is:
a. Drilling machine
b. Shaper machine
c. Power saw
d. Lathe machine
16. Which of the following is not the work of a
machinist?
a. Reboring
b. Overhauling
c. Grinding
d. Boring
17. The area of the machine shop whose metal is
being melted to form a new shape is the:
a. Foundry area
b. Tool and die
c. Welding
d. Mass production are
18. A machine use in testing steel generally strikes
the specimen with energy from 220 to 255 ftlb.
a. Izod test
b. Charpy test
19
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
c. Rockwell test
d. Test blocks
An iron in which most of the carbon is
chemically combined with the iron:
a. Cast iron
b. Gray iron
c. White iron
d. Malleable iron
Through how many degrees must an involute
cam turn in order to raise its follower 3 inches
if the diameter of the base circle is 5 inches?
a. 58.7 degrees
b. 180 degrees
c. 64.4 degrees
d. 68.79 degrees
The space between the adjacent teeth?
a. Tooth
b. Flank
c. Backlash
d. Width
An iron has physical properties closely
resembling those of mild steel:
a. Malleable cast iron
b. Malleable iron
c. White iron
d. Gray iron
Gears used to transmit power between shafts
axis of which it intersects:
a. Spur gears
b. Bevel gears
c. Helical gears
d. Straight bevel gears
An important accessories of milling machines:
a. Milling machine vise
b. Cutters
c. Ram
d. Vertical milling attachment
They are usually the steel or steel casting:
a. Mild steel
b. Carbon steel
c. Fire box steel
d. Drop-forge-dies
The cheapest and the most abundant
engineering material.
a. Aluminum
b. Steel
c. Cast iron
d. Babbitt
27. Milling machine accessories are used to hold
milling cutter in the milling machine:
a. Spindle-nose tooling
b. Milling machine vise
c. Vertical milling attachment
d. Milling machine arbors
28. the size of an equal-leg length fillet weld shall
be based on the length of the largest:
a. Isosceles right triangle
b. Square
c. Right triangle
d. Rectangle
29. If gears cannot connect parallel shafts, they are
called:
a. Cyclodial gears
b. Helical gears
c. Spur gears
d. Toothed gears
30. The path traced by a point moving at a fixed
distance from an axis and with a uniform
motion to the axis and a point moving such a
path:
a. Helical motion
b. Spherical motion
c. Translational
d. Path of a point
31. The maximum stress which is reached during a
tension test:
a.
Stress
b. Electricity
c. Strain
d. Tensile strength
32. The frustums of two cones are used in a
manner to permit a variation of velocity ratio
between two parallel shafts:
a. Evans friction cones
b. Bevel cones
c. Spherical cones
d. Friction gearing
33. Weld – metal impact specimen shall be taken
across the weld with one face substantially
parallel to and within:
a. ¾”
b. 1/32”
c. ¼”
d. 1/16”
34. A joint between two overlapping members in
which the overlapped edge of one member is
welded with a fillet weld:
a. A single welded lock joint
b. Double-welded lap joint
c. A single-welded lap joint with backing
d. Tack weld
35. Imparts of reciprocating motion to a singlepoint cutting tool:
a. Dividing head
b. Slotting attachment
c. Circular pitch
d. Circular milling attachment
36. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a
plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of
the cam.
a. Redial cam
b. Cylindrical cam
c. Cam curves
d. Tangential cam
37. Strength of a material is that of a stress
intensity determined by considering the
maximum test load to act over the original area
of the test specimens:
a. Yield point
b. Ultimate strength
c. Breaking strength
d. Elastic strength
38. The follower reciprocates or oscillates in a
plane parallel to the axis of the rotation:
a. Cam curves
b. Cylindrical cam
c. Tangential cam
d. Radial cam
39. A test for pipe used for coiling in sizes 2
inches:
a. Flaring
b. Crush
c. Flange
d. Bend
40. An alloy of tin, copper, antimony, or
sometimes lead:
a. Gold
b. Babbitt
c. Aluminum
d. Cast iron
20
41. A weld place in a groove between two abutting
members:
a. Full-fillet weld
b. Tack weld
c. Butt weld
d. Fillet weld
42. A weld of approximately triangular crosssection that join two surfaces of approximately
right angles as in lap joint, tee-joint, corner
joint:
a. Single welded lap joint
b. Fillet weld
c. Tack weld
d. Butt weld
43. A corrosion occurs within or adjacent to a
crevice formed by contact with another piece
of the same or another metal:
a. Pitting
b. Galvanic
c. Erosion
d. Crevice
44. Wheels are sometimes used for the
transmission of high power when an
approximately constant velocity ratio is desired:
a. Bevel cones
b. Friction gearing
c. Spur friction wheels
d. Evans friction wheels
45. Gearing in which motion or power that is
transmitted depends upon the friction between
the surfaces in contact:
a. Bevel gears
b. Spur friction wheels
c. Evans friction cones
d. Friction gearing
46. A bevel gears of the same size mounted on a
shaft of 90 degrees:
a. Crown gears
b. Spur gears
c. Angular gears
d. Miter gears
47. A fillet weld whose size is equal to the
thickness of the thinner joint member:
a. Butt joint
b. Butt weld
c. Tack weld
d. Full-fillet weld
48. The ratio of stress to the corresponding strain
below the proportional limit:
a. Stress-strain diagram
b. Gage method
c. Modulus of elasticity
d. Tensile strength
49. The shearing strain of a block of metal, 3
inches high is subject to a shearing high force
which distorts the top surface through a
distance of 0.0036 inch. :
a. 0.0015 rad.
b. 0.008 rad.
c. 0.0010 rad.
d. 0.0012 rad.
50. Determine the number of teeth in a driver of
two spur gears mesh which has a velocity ratio
of 0.75. the driven gear has 36 teeth:
a. 50
b. 46
c. 26
d. 48
51. Within the elastic limit, the stress is
proportional to strain.
a. Hooke’s law
b. Modulus of elasticity
c. Offset ratio
d. Buckingham’s principle
52. The corrosion of iron or iron-base-alloys:
a. Rusting
b. Crazing
c. Chalking
d. Fritting
53. Steel containing large amount of mild nickel
and chromium:
a. Carbon steel
b. Stainless steel
c. Alloy steel
d. Cat steel
54. It refers to any layer or deposit of extraneous
material of the heat-transfer-surface:
a. Low line
b. Pressure drop
c. Fouling
d. Scaling
55. The total amount of permanent extension of
the gage length measured after the specimen
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
has fractured and is expressed as percentage
increase of the original gage length:
a. Elongation
b. Strain
c. Stress
d. Elastic limit
It is used to enable milling machine to take
climb milling cuts:
a. Helical driving mechanism
b. Spindle
c. Read out
d. Backlash eliminator
A weld made to hold the parts of weldment in
proper alignment until the final weld are
made:
a. Butt weld
b. Tack weld
c. Fillet weld
d. Full-fillet weld
The change in length per unit original length
is:
a. Strain
b. Stress
c. Deformation
d. Elastic modulus
The temperature above which the alloy is
liquid and will run:
a. Melting point
b. Fow point
c. Pour point
d. Liquids
A cone formed by elements which are
perpendicular to the elements of the pitch
cone at the large end:
a. Cone distance
b. Back cone
c. Root cone
d. Cone center
The machine used for testing of very thin steel
or surface layers:
a. Charpy test
b. Izod test
c. Description test
d. Rockwell test
A gear is one in which angle is 90 degrees that
is the pitch cone has become a plane.
a. Crowned gear
21
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
b. Angular gear
c. Miter gear
d. Spiral gear
The deterioration of organic coating
characterized as completely:
a. Chalking
b. Rusting
c. Chocking
d. Fritting
Is a form of correction that develop on a highly
localized areas on a metal surfaces:
a. Crevice
b. Erosion
c. Galvanic
d. Spitting
Test is designed primarily for application to
electric-welded tubing for detection of lack of
penetration or overlaps resulting from flash
removal in the weld:
a. Butt weld
b. Paste
c. Lap weld
d. Double butt weld
Have the same thermal and minimum film
thickness limitation bearing.
a. Ball bearing
b. Roller bearing
c. Thrust bearing
d. Oil bearing
An oil storage roof formed to approximately
the surface of a right cone, supported only at
its periphery:
a. Self-supporting umbrella roof
b. Self-supporting dome roof
c. Supported cone roof
d. Self-supporting cone roof
Test sometimes referred to as an upsetting test:
a. Bend
b. Flaring
c. Flange
d. Crush
What load P which causes a total deformation
of 0.036 inch. Of steel rock which has a crosssection area of 4 in2 and a length of 6 ft.
a. 55,000 lb
b. 40,000 lb
c. 60,000 lb
d. 50,000 lb
70. An oil storage tank roof formed to
approximately spherical surfaces, supported
only at its periphery:
a. Self-supporting umbrella roof
b. Self-supporting cone roof
c. Self-supporting
d. Supported cone roof
71. The unit of deformation is called:
a. Torsion
b. Strain
c. Stress
d. Shear
72. A circle bounding the bottom of the teeth:
a. Addendum circle
b. Addendum cylinder
c. Pitch circle
d. Deddendum circle
73. A 3” diameter short shaft carrying 2 pulleys
close to the bearings transmit how much
horsepower if the shaft makes 280 rpm.
a. 199 Hp
b. 198 Hp
c. 200 Hp
d. 210 Hp
74. A cylindrical tank with 10 in. inside diameter
contains oxygen gas at 250 psi. Calculate the
required wall thickness in (mm) under stress of
28,000 psi.
a. 11.44 mm
b. 11.34 mm
c. 10.6 mm
d. 10.3 mm
75. The minimum clearance allowed for meshing
spur gears with a circular pitch of 0.1571 and
diametral pitch of 20. The spur gears have 25
teeth.
a. 0.007855
b. 0.007558
c. 0.008578
d. 0.007585
76. SAE steel that corresponds to heat treatment:
a. SAE 1060
b. SAE 1117
c. SAE 1030
d. SAE 1020
77. Which of the following is the differential of
the shear equation:
a. Bending moment
b. Load of the beam
c. Tensile strength of the beam
d. Slope of the beam
78. Which of the following materials to be utilized
to reduce cost in the manufacturing of large
worm gears?
a. Alloyed aluminum
b. Bronze rim with cast iron spider
c. Cast iron rim with bronze spider
d. All of these
79. It is hardening treatment whereby a cast metal
is being heated to a very high temperature then
suddenly subjected to rapid cooling to improve
hardenability or wear resistance is called:
a. Normalizing
b. Tempering
c. Annealing
d. Quenching
80. Determine the estimated weight of an A-36
steel plates size 3/16 x 6’ x 20’.
a. 919 lbs
b. 1012 lbs
c. 829 lbs
d. 735 lbs
81. The length of arc between the two sides of a
gear tooth on the pitch circle:
a. Circular thickness
b. Axial plane
c. Helix angle
d. Chordal curves
82. Split pulley or pulley made of separate section
bolted together at the rim, the maximum speed
should be limited to about _______% of the
maximum speed of solid pulley.
a. 65 to 75 %
b. 45 to 50 %
c. 55 to 60 %
d. 80 to 90 %
83. Killed steel is very much associated with:
a. Manganese
b. Sulphur
c. Phosphorous
d. Silicon
22
84. Determine the estimated weight of an A-36
steel plate of size ½ x 4 x 8.
a. 280 kg
b. 332 kg
c. 301 kg
d. 297 kg
85. A type of welding whereby a wire or powder
from the nozzle of a spray gun is fused by a gas
plain, arc or plasma jet and the molten
particles are projected in a form of a spray by
means of compressed air or gas.
a. Electro-slug building
b. Electro-beam welding
c. Plasma-arc welding
d. Metal spray welding
86. Heating of metal above the critical temperature
and then cooling slowly usually in the furnace
to reduce the hardness and improve the
machinability is called:
a. Normalizing
b. Annealing
c. Tempering
d. Quenching
87. Accident prevention is:
a. An association of employers, organization
and individuals
b. The foreman’s responsibility just as
much as production
c. The responsibility of top management
d. A job of a safety director
88. Major component of bronze casting:
a. Copper
b. Manganese
c. Zinc
d. Lead
89. Commonly utilized / cheapest shaft material
available in the market with carbon content of
0.28 to 0.34 %.
a. SAE 1432
b. SAE 4320
c. SAE 1030
d. SAE 4130
90. Alloy steel known for its resistance to
corrosion, abrasion and wear that is usually
ideal for mill grinding of ore in cement and
concentrator application. It is usually
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
combined molybdenum to increase the depth
hardening.
a. Manganese chromium steel
b. Chromium-molly steel
c. Chorome-nickel-molly steel
d. Manganese-molly steel
Split pulley or pulley made of separate sections
bolted together at the rim, the maximum speed
should be limited to about _______% of the
maximum speed of solid pulley.
a. 65 to 75 %
b. 45 to 50 %
c. 55 to 60 %
d. 80 to 90 %
Major component of bronze casting is
a. Copper
b. Manganese
c. Zinc
d. Lead
Galvanized steel plate is:
a. Aluminum
b. Tin
c. Zinc
d. Manganese
What heat treatment process can cast steel
materials of high chrome, high manganese, etc.
type steel be subjected for the purpose of
matching process?
a. Annealing
b. Tempering
c. Normalizing
d. Quenching
Cast alloy steel for very high temperature
application:
a. Manganese-nickel steel casting
b. High chrome steel casting
c. Chrome-nickel steel casting
d. High manganese casting
Flexible material used to seal pressurized fluids,
normally under dynamic condition:
a. Nylon
b. Seal
c. Teflon
d. Packing
A type of gear tooth cut inside a cylinder or
ring:
a. Rack gear
b. Ring gear
c. Miter gear
d. Internal gear
98. It has molybdenum alloy except:
a. SAE 43XX
b. SAE 41XX
c. SAE 6XXX
d. SAE 5XXX
99. To prevent leakage in dynamic seal:
a. Gasket
b. Seals
c. Felts
d. Packings
100. Which of the following elements when large
quantity is harmful to the ferrous metal?
a. Sulfur
b. Silicon
c. Zinc
d. Aluminum
ELEMENTS 06
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Metal characteristics that withstand forces that
causes twisting.
A. Torsional strength
B. Modulus of elasticity
C. Twisting moment
D. Elasticity
Fillet radius in machine parts is usually
introduced to:
A. Improve the look of the parts
B. Reduce concentration of stress and
extend life of the parts
C. Avoid obstruction
D. Necessary to lessen casting weight
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded on both ends.
A. Stud bolt
B. Acme thread bolts
C. Square threaded bolts
D. Hex bolts
Hydrostatic bearing is one which:
A. The lube oil is supplied under pressure
B. Lube oil is not pressurized
C. There is no lube oil
D. Bearing is lightly loaded
Which of the following materials is unsuitable
as a bearing?
A. Teflon
23
B. Low carbon steel
C. Cast iron
D. Nylon
6. Safety features that must be placed and
maintain at machine, blacksmith, welding and
foundry shop.
A. Safety goggle
B. Walkway guide
C. Safety notices and markings
D. all of these
7. The angle at the base of the cylinder of an
involute gear that the tooth makes with the
gear axis.
A. Base helix angle
B. Pressure angle
C. Arc of recess
D. Arc of approach
8. A kind of thread that is generally used:
A. UNEC
B. UNC
C. UNF
D. UNEF
9. Which of the following acronyms is not
generally used as standard?
A. ASTM
B. SAE
C. IPS
D. AISI
10. What is the difference between the shaper and
planer?
A. The tool of the shaper moves while on
the planer is stationary.
B. The shaper can perform slotting
operation while the planer cannot.
C. The shaper handles large pieces while the
planer handles only small pieces.
D. The tool of the shaper moves in
reciprocating motion while tool in the
planer moves in rotary motion.
11. The path of contact i9nvolute gears where the
force is actually transmitted. It is a straight
imaginary line passing through the pitch point
and tangent to the base circle.
A. Principal reference plane
B. Pitch point
C. Front angle
D. Line of action
12. The hardness of helical and herringbone gear
teeth after treatment is 210 to 300 brinell
hardness for gear and pinion is at:
A. 360 brinell min.
B. 400 brinell max.
C. 340-350 normal
D. All of these
13. A type of gear commonly used in parallel shaft
transmission especially when a smooth
continuous action is essential as in high speed
drives up to 12,000 fpm:
A. Bevel gear
B. Herringbone gear
C. Spur gear
D. Helical gear
14. It is used in conjunction with circular cross
sectional members to retain oil and prevent
dirt, foreign particles, moisture and to permit
pressure differential between exterior and
interior of the applied part.
A. Seal
B. Gasket
C. Safety shield
D. Packing
15. An object thrown upward will return to earth
with the magnitude of the terminal velocity
equal to:
A. Zero
B. One-half the initial velocity
C. Twice the initial velocity
D. The initial velocity
16. A liquid metal:
A. Mercury
B. Lead
C. Zinc
D. Aluminum
17. What type of gear which can transmit power at
a certain angle?
A. Helical gear
B. Worm gear
C. Bevel gear
D. Herringbone gear
18. Type of V-belt to use in driving pulley with
speed of 360 rpm and transmitting 5 Hp.
A. Type C belts
B. Type B belts
C. Type A belts
D. Type D belts
19. The arbitrary modification by removing a small
portion of a tooth at the tip of gear tooth is
called.
A. Tip removal
B. Tip undercut
C. Tip relief
D. Pressure angle cut
20. The first derivative of kinetic energy with
respect to velocity is:
A. Power
B. Acceleration
C. Momentum
D. None of these
21. What is the difference between brass and
bronze?
A. Brass is composed of copper and zinc
while bronze is composed of copper and
tin
B. Brass is composed of copper and zinc
while bronze is basically copper and tin
plus non ferrous alloy such as manganese,
aluminum, and chromium
C. Bronze is reddish in color while brass is a
mixture of copper and antimony
D. Bronze is mostly an alloy of copper and
tin while brass is a mixture of copper of
copper and antimony.
22. The reciprocal of the diametral pitch
equivalent to the ratio of pitch diameter to the
number of teeth:
A. Lead
B. Clearance
C. Module
D. Involute
23. What is the property of a material which resists
forces acting to pull the material apart?
A. Shear strength
B. Tensile strength
C. Torsional strength
D. Compressive strength
24. Which do not belong to foundry or metal
casting shop?
A. Shake-out machine
B. Molding machine
C. Core making
D. Forging machine
24
25. The enter of gravity of a solid pyramid or cone
with a total height of H is:
A. 1/4 H
B. 3/5 H
C. 1/3 H
D. 1/3 H
26. The gradual chemical reaction by other
substance such that the metal is converted to
an oxide or other compounds:
A. Corrosion
B. Cheaping
C. Rusting
D. Weathering
27. A material that should be avoided in
constructing wood pattern:
A. Sap wood
B. Kiln dried wood
C. Heart wood
D. Core portion of wood
28. What is the moment of inertia of a rectangle
about its base?
A. BH2/6
B. BH3/3
C. BH2/3
D. BH3/12
29. What is the modulus of elasticity if the stress is
44,000 psi and a unit strain of 0.00105?
A. 41.905 X 106
B. 42.300 X 106
C. 41.202 X 106
D. 43.101 X 106
30. Which of the following is not a structural steel
class?
A. Low carbon steel
B. Stainless steel
C. Medium carbon steel
D. Tool and die steel
31. What happens to a drill if the operating speed
is too fast?
A. Drill will crack
B. Drill will become overheated and will
bend
C. Drill will become overheated and will be
drawn from steel
D. Drill will become very dull and wear fast
32. Copper and most of its alloy can be hardened
by:
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
A. Patenting
B. Cold working
C. Case hardening
D. Soaking
A type of coupling that alloys slight amount of
torsional angular flexibility due to introduction
with some elastic material cylindrically
wrapped around the bolts in the flange.
A. Simple elastic bonded coupling
B. Elastic material bushed coupling
C. Elastic material bonded coupling
D. All of these
Outstanding safety record contributes to:
A. High productivity
B. Outstanding performance that expects
reward from management
C. Confidence in foreman’s ability to
perform well
D. Pride and enthusiasm to one-self
The capacity of metal to withstand load
without breaking is:
A. Strength
B. Stress
C. Elasticity
D. Strain
Finding the resultant of two or more forces is
called:
A. Coplanar force
B. Non-coplanar force
C. Couple
D. Composition of forces
A machinery operation whereby done with the
work accurately fastened has a reciprocating
(forward and backward) motion and the tool
head is stationary.
A. Shaping
B. Planning
C. Turning
D. Reaming
The phenomenon of continuous stretching
under load even if the stress is less than the
yield point:
A. Elasticity
B. Ductility
C. Plasticity
D. Creep
39. In a pair of gears, ________is the plane
perpendicular to the axial plane and tangent to
the pitch surface.
A. Pitch
B. Pitch plane
C. Pitch circle
D. Pitch point
40. What type of gear is used for high speed
operation?
A. Helical
B. Spur
C. Bevel
D. Worm
41. V-belts operate at speed of about (fpm)
A. 4500
B. 4400
C. 4200
D. 3600
42. Name the type of chuck commonly used for
holding work piece in a lathe operation?
example, a 3-jaw universal chuck, 4-jaw
independent chuck
A. Magnetic jaw chuck
B. 2-jaw independent
C. 8-jaw universal
D. Combination
43. For a high corrosion resistant stainless steel,
what minimum chromium content is required?
A. 8%
B. 4.3%
C. 1.1%
D. 5.8%
44. Clearance to a new boiler installation to the
existing or old plant building should follow a
minimum clearance of _________ between
top of the boiler proper and the ceiling as
stated in the PSME code.
A. 2000 mm(max)
B. 1000 mm(max)
C. 2130 mm(max)
D. 2150 mm(max)
45. Ordinary steel begins to lose strength and
elasticity significantly at about _______
degrees Fahrenheit.
A. 900-1000oF
B. 800-900OF
C. 750-850OF
25
D. 600-700OF
46. Statement that a given body is in static
equilibrium means that the body cannot.
A. Have any type of motion
B. Be acted upon by more than one force
C. Undergo any displacement
D. Have any acceleration
47. Most effective alloying element for reducing
brittleness of steel at a very low temperature.
A. Manganese
B. Molybdenum
C. Silicon
D. Nickel
48. Normal stress relieving temperature for cast
steel :
A. 200 to350 oF
B. 400 to 500 oF
C. 300 to 400 oF
D. 450 to 550 oF
49. It is advised that in rubber belts application /
mounting it should have an initial tension of
________ inch/ply.
A. 18 to 24
B. 15 to 20
C. 12 to 15
D. 10
50. Past ME Board Question
Non- Ferrous filler metal is melted into grooves
or as fillet on the mother metal; the base metal
is not melted. This is commonly used for
joining iron based machine parts or in repair
works of some materials it is called:
A. spot welding
B. braze welding
C. brazing
D. gas welding
51. Past ME Board Question
What is the common shop practice to prevent solder
from running away from surface to be joined?
A. Surround the word with day
B. Introduce around the work rolled wet cloth
C. Put asbestos sheeting around the work
D. All of these
52. Past ME Board Question
The three-moment equation may be used to analyze
A. Tapered column
B. Continuous beam
C. Composite beam
D. Axially end loaded beam
53. Past ME Board Question
One of the causes of spur gear tooth breakage is the
unbalanced load on one end of the tooth that
results in higher stresses than when the load is
evenly distributed. To minimize this problem, the
face width “b” should not. Be greater than the
thickness (or pitch) of the tooth. In the absence of
test values, the following can be guide.
A. .25PC<b<4Pc
B. .20Pd<b<4Pd
C. .25Pd<b<4Pd
D. .20Pd<b<4Pc
54. Past ME Board Question
The property that characterizes a material ability to
be drawn into a wire
A. Ductility
B. Thermal conductivity
C. Tensile strength
D. Endurance limit
55. Past ME Board Question
Deals only with the motion of the bodies without
reference to forces that cause them:
A. Dynamics
B. Kinetics
C. Statistics
D. Kinematics
56. Past ME Board Question
In shear pin or breaking pin design, we may use the
data experienced by Link-Belt for 1/8 inch to 1 inch
pins and the breaking stress _____ ksi.
A. 40
B. 55
C. 50
D. 48
57. Past ME Board Question
Recommended best cutting angle of drill for work
on steel or cast iron is _____ degrees.
A. 48
B. 63
C. 59
D. 50
58. Past ME Board Question
Cold working of steel plates make the metal _____.
A. Tougher
B. More ductile
C. Harder
D. More malleable
59. Past ME Board Question
Considering a maximum safe center distance of
sprockets should be _____ pitches. Very long center
distance cause catenary tension in the center.
A. 70
B. 80
C. 60
D. 50
60. Past ME Board Question
Hypoid gear is a special type of gear like:
A. Worm gear
B. Spur gear
C. Herringbone gear
D. Bevel gear
61. Past ME Board Question
The maximum stress to which a material may be
subjected before failure occurs:
A. Ultimate strength
B. Ultimate stress
C. Endurance limit
D. Tensile stress
62. Past ME Board Question
A property of material which relates the lateral
strain to the longitudinal strain
A. Stress
B. Strain
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. Strength
63. Past ME Board Question
All are associated with the grade of steel except:
A. SAE 42XX
B. SAE 13XX
C. SAE 10XX
D. SAE 74XX
64. Past ME Board Question
Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of:
A. Shear strain to compression strain
B. Elastic limit compressive strain
C. Lateral strain to longitudinal strain
D. Elastic limit to proportional limit
65. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not structural class of
steel?
A. Low carbon steel
B. Tool and die steel
26
C. High chrome alloy steel
D. High strength low alloy steel
66. Past ME Board Question
The product of the resultant of all forces acting on a
body and the time that the resultant acts:
A. Angular impulse
B. Angular momentum
C. Linear impulse
D. Linear momentum
67. Past ME Board Question
The smallest area at the point of rupture of a tensile
specimen divided by the original area is called:
A. Percentage elongation
B. Izod test
C. Charpy test
D. Percentage reduction of the area
68. Past ME Board Question
It equalizes the energy exerted and the work done
thus preventing excessive or sudden changes of
speed:
A. Flywheel
B. Balance wheel
C. Flywheel pulley
D. All of these
69. Past ME Board Question
A mechanism which usually do the indexing in a
machine tool:
A. Universal chuck
B. Slooter
C. Dividing head
D. Indexing
70. Past ME Board Question
Metal that assists lubrication or lubricant in itself:
A. Zinc
B. Antimony
C. Babbit
D. Lead
71. Past ME Board Question
A system of forces in space is in equilibrium. If two
unequal and opposite collinear forces are added,
which of the following if any is true?
A. Equilibrium is maintained
B. Equilibrium is destroyed
C. An unbalance moment exists
D. None of these is true
72. Past ME Board Question
It is a science of motion that can be solved in terms
of scalar or vector algebra:
A. Kinematics
B. Curvilinear translation
C. Projectiles
D. Acceleration
73. Past ME Board Question
Permanent deformation or strain may occur without
fracture.
A. Malleability
B. Elasticity
C. Ductility
D. Plasticity
74. Past ME Board Question
The ability of a metal to be deformed considerably
without rupture is called:
A. Malleability
B. Elasticity
C. Ductility
D. Plasticity
75. Past ME Board Question
When two elastic bodies collide, which of the
following laws can be used to solve for the resulting
velocity?
A. Dalton’s law
B. Avogadro’s law
C. Conservation of energy
D. Conservation of momentum and
conservation of energy
76. Past ME Board Question
When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will take
pressure to put the parts together. The allowance is
said to be negative and is termed:
A. Negative tolerance
B. Negative allowance
C. Negatives fits
D. Interference of metal
77. Past ME Board Question
Device used to measure accurately speed:
A. Speedometer
B. Dial indicator
C. Tachometer
D. Dial gauge
78. Past ME Board Question
If the velocity of a mass is the same all the time
during which motion takes place is called:
A. Deceleration
B. Uniform motion
C. Acceleration
D. None of these
79. Past ME Board Question
Length of contact between two mating parts in a
screw and nut threads measured axially is called:
A. Arc of contact
B. Depth of engagement
C. Length of engagement
D. Axis of contact
80. Past ME Board Question
The distance a helical gear or worm would thread
along its axis is called: _____
A. Length of action
B. Length of contact
C. Land
D. Lead
81. Past ME Board Question
Major and minor diameters are commonly used in:
A. Screw thread
B. Bolts
C. Gear
D. All of these
82. Past ME Board Question
A lathe with multiple cutting stations:
A. Turret lathe
B. Engine lathe
C. Manual lathe
D. None of these
83. Past ME Board Question
The nominal diameter of the bolts is the:
A. Major diameter
B. Minor diameter
C. Mean diameter
D. All of these
84. Past ME Board Question
Ratio of unit lateral deformation to the unit
longitudinal deformation:
A. Poissons ratio
B. Strain
C. Stress
D. Modulus of rigidity
85. Past ME Board Question
For moderate speed of mating gears, the ideal ratio
contact is:
A. 1.25 – 4.00
B. 1.20 – 1.45
27
C. 1.00 – 130
D. 0.35 – 1.45
86. Past ME Board Question
A shaft is to be checked for concentricity. A suitable
method of performing the check is:
A. Bench centers and dial indicator
B. Line shafting bearing alignment
C. Observing vibration of the shafting
D. None of these
87. Past ME Board Question
A kind of thread in which the width of the thread is
approximately equal to the depth of the thread and
the space between threads are approximately equal.
A. Square thread
B. Acme thread
C. Buttress thread
D. Whitworth thread
88. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not used to resemble the
shaped of tool bit?
A. Round nose
B. Center cut
C. Square nose
D. Thread cutting
89. Past ME Board Question
Negative allowance is also called:
A. Interference of metal
B. Feeler gage
C. Micrometer
D. Tolerance
90. Past ME Board Question
A property of matter which causes it to resist any
change in its motion or state of rest:
A. Brake
B. Friction
C. Inertia
D. Impulse
91. Past ME Board Question
Separate forces which can be so combined are
called:
A. Non-concurrent forces
B. Couple
C. Combined forces
D. Concurrent forces
92. Past ME Board Question
A lathe machine threading mechanism
A. Reversed gear and lever
B. Spindle gear
C. Change stud gear
D. All of these
93. Past ME Board Question
It is the difference of addendum and addendum
which is equivalent to the whole depth less working
depth.
A. Fillet space
B. Filet radius
C. Clearance
D. Backlash
94. Past ME Board Question
Machine tool used for straight lines on metal
surfaces mad of sharp tool steel is called.
A. Plain scriber
B. A trammel
C. Hermaphrodite caliper
D. Divider
95. Past ME Board Question
All are associated with standard material specified
except:
A. American Iron and Steel Institute
B. Society of Automotive Engineers
C. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel Institute
D. American Society for Testing Materials
96. Past ME Board Question
The best instrument for measuring a thousand of an
inch:
A. Micrometer
B. Tachometer
C. Calliper
D. Pyrometer
97. Past ME Board Question
Tooth width measured along the chord at the pitch
circle:
A. Flank
B. Face width
C. Width of space
D. Chordal thickness
98. Past ME Board Question
In the gear design, the total work load must be
equally shared by its arms. Rim must be rigid to
support these arms and also the head is
recommended for its stiffening value. The
assumption in the detailed design of rim thickness
and depth of bead is ____ circular pitch (PC).
A. 0.65
B. 0.50
C. 0.56
D. 0.44
99. Past ME Board Question
Alloy that improves strength of steel at high
temperature application
A. Tungsten
B. Molybdenum
C. Chromium
D. All of these
100. Past ME Board Question
A furnace used in melting ferrous metals:
A. Annealing furnace
B. Tempering furnace
C. Induction furnace
D. Normalizing furnace
Element 07
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Past ME Board Question
A furnace used in melting non-ferrous metals.
A. cupola furnace
B. crucible furnace
C. induction furnace
D. tempering furnace
Past ME Board Question
Endurance strength is nearly proportional to the
ultimate strength but not with:
A. yield strength
B. design stress
C. shear stress
D. all of the above
Past ME Board Question
Liners are normally made of:
A. cast iron
B. alloyed bronze
C. alloyed steel
D. alloyed aluminum
Past ME Board Question
Need in as cast condition steel casting with carbon
content less than_________% C.
A. 0.26
B. 0.20
C. 0.15 to 0.16
D. 0.25
Past ME Board Question
The yield strength of a regular yellow brass (65 to
70% Cu, 30 to 35% Zn) can be
increased/improved by:
28
A. cold working
B. tempering
C. chill casting
D. heat treatment
6.
Past ME Board Question
The purposes of these parts in application are to
have better bearings to seal the guard against
marring; etc.
A. bearing journal
B. metallic seal
C. washer
D. shaft seal
7.
Past ME Board Question
Metals are conducive because:
A. the electron are loosely bound to the nuclei
and therefore mobile
B. having characteristic metallic luster
C. they are on the left side of the periodic table
D. they have extra electrons as exhibited by
normally possible balance state
8.
Past ME Board Question
It is considered semi-solid lubricant:
A. lube oil
B. graphite
C. grease
D. all of these
9.
Past ME Board Question
What are the common cutting fluids used for
cutting metals?
A. water with soda borax
B. light mineral oil
C. soluble oil
D. all of these
10. Past ME Board Question
Good stabilizer in stainless steel:
A. columbium
B. titanium
C. tantalum
D. all of these
11. Past ME Board Question
The good deoxidizer in steel melting:
A. Manganese
B. silicon
C. aluminum
D. All of these
12. Past ME Board Question
The usual ratio of water to soluble oil used as cutting
fluid:
A. 50% water to 50% oil
B. 2 water to 1 oil
C. 3 water to 1 oil
D. 4 to 80 water to 1 oil
13. Past ME board Question
Killed steel is always associated with:
A. Silicon
B. Manganese
C. Phosporous
D. Sulfur
14. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following does not belong to the
group?
A. welding
B. Soldering
C. Casting
D. brazing
15. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is most popular soldering of
metal?
A. 10/80
B. 45/55
C. 50/50
D. 60/40
16. Past ME Board Question
The motion of an object diminished/decreased
speed
A. deceleration
B. retarded motion
C. negative impulse
D. all of these
17. Past ME Board Question
It is recommended not to have a direct drive and
drive sprockets if the ratio of their teeth.
Exceed _____ use two or more step combination.
A. 10 times
B. 8 times
C. 5 times
D. 6 times
18. Past ME Board Question
It is used to charged rotary motion to reciprocating
motion:
A. Helical Gear
B. Rack Gear
C. Worm gear
D. Spur gear
19. Past ME Board Question
Busses that are independent loads:
A. Working stress
B. Operating stress
C. Residual stress
D. shear stress
20. Past ME Board Question
The Distance of the tooth, which is equal to the sum
of the addendum and deddendum:
A. full depth
B. whole depth
C. working depth
D. deddendum
21. Past ME Board Question
This concave portion of the tooth profile where it
joints the bottom of the tooth space:
A. fillet curve
B. fillet radius
C. bottom depth
D. fillet
22. Past ME Board Question
In gear design, the ratio of the pitch diameter in
inches to the number of teeth:
A. module
B. diametral pitch
C. English module
D. Circular pitch
23. Past ME Board Question
It is recommended for high speed application that
the minimum number of teeth in small sprocket
should be:
A. 26 to 30
B. 12 to 16
C. 26 to 28
D. 18 to 24
24. Past ME Board question
Continuous stretching under load even if the stress
is less than the yield point:
A. Plasticity
B. elasticity
C. creep
D. ductility
25. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not structural class of
steel?
A. high speed steel
29
B. tool and die
C. Low Carbon
D. high Carbon
26. Past ME Board Question
Opposite direction parallel forces:
A. concurrent
B. coplanar
C. couple
D. non-coplanar
27. Past ME Board Question
The ratio of the moment of inertia in the crosssection of the beam to the section modulus
A. equal to the radius of gyration
B. equal to the area of the cross-section
C. measure of a distance
D. dependent on the modulus of elasticity
28. Past ME Board Question
Gear used to transmit power at high velocity ratios
between non-intersecting shafts that are usually but
not necessarily at right angle.
A. helical gear
B. bevel gear
C. worm gear
D. spiral gear
29. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the differential of the
shear equation?
A. bending moment of the beam
B. tensile strength of the beam
C. slope of the elasticity curve
D. load of the beam
30. Past ME Board Question
It is arbitrarily defined as the push and pull
A. force
B. work
C. inertia
D. power
31. The changes in shape or geometry of the body due
to action of a force on it is called deformation or:
A. shear stress
B. stresses
C. compressive stress
D. strains
32. Past ME Board Question
For evenly distributed and uniform wear on each
meshing gear tooth, the ideal design practice is to
consider a _____.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
A. wears resistance alloy addition to tooth gear
B. heat treatment of the gears
C. hardening of each tooth
D. hunting tooth addition
Past ME Board Question
The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio of
pitch diameter to number of teeth
A. lead
B. module
C. involute
D. clearance
Past ME Board Question
It is the ability of the material to resist deformation
under stress:
A. plasticity
B. stiffness
C. toughness
D. all of these
Past ME Board Question
Flat leather belting not recommended for use in
speed excess of ____ fpm.
A. 3600
B. 4800
C. 6000
D. all of these
Past ME Board Question
The angle included between the sides of the thread
measured in an axial plane in a screw thread.
A. angle of thread
B. angle between thread or 40
C. helix angle thread
D. half angle thread or 20
Past ME Board Question
The property of a material that relates the lateral
strain to longitudinal strain
A. stress
B. strain
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. endurance limit
Past ME Board Question
Eccentrically loaded bearing is also called:
A. full bearing
B. offset bearing
C. partial bearing
D. fitted bearing
Past ME Board Question
In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means wire
and strands are arranged in the following manner:
A. twisted in same direction
B. twisted in any direction
C. twisted in opposite direction
D. twisted in along direction
40. Past ME Board Question
In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often defined
as the angle between the line of action and the line
of tangent to the pitch circle. It is also termed as:
A. helix angle
B. angle of recess
C. angle of obliquity
D. arc of action
41. Past ME Board Question
Height of tooth above pitch circle or radial distance
between pitch circle and top land of the tooth
A. top tooth
B. addendum
C. land
D. hunting tooth
42. Past ME Board Question
The function of clutch in the machine tool is:
A. lowering the drive
B. alignment of drive shaft
C. to disconnect or connect at will the drive
D. to insure that two shafts line up at high speed
43. Past ME Board Question
The amount by which the width of a tooth space
exceeds the thickness of the engaging tooth on the
pitch circles
A. backlash
B. clearance
C. undercut
D. Chordal thickness
44. Past ME Board Question
Which does not belong to the group?
A. SAE
B. AISI
C. SEA II
D. ASTM
45. Past ME Board Question
What is the specification number of molybdenum?
A. SAE 2XXX
B. SAE 3XXX
C. SAE 4XXX
D. SAE 5XXX
30
46. Past ME Board Question
What will be the effect in bushing gears without
backlash?
A. jamming
B. overheating
C. overload
D. all of these
47. Past ME Board Question
Range of helix angle on helical gear
A. less than 18
B. 15-25
C. 20-35
D. 35-40
48. Past ME Board Question
The distance of a helical gear or worm would thread
along its axis in one revolution if it were free to
move axially.
A. lead
B. thread
C. pitch
D. land
49. Past ME Board Question
It refers to the gear between the fillets of adjacent
teeth.
A. top land
B. bottom land
C. pitch
D. fillet
50. Past ME Board Question
The distance between adjacent rivets is called:
A. pitch
B. crest
C. lead
D. none of these
51. Past ME Board Question
A plane perpendicular to the axial plane and to the
pitch plane, In gears with parallel axis, the
transverse plane and the plane of rotation coincide.
A. transverse plane
B. principal reference plane
C. normal plane
D. pitch plane
52. Past ME Board Question
What tool will be used in making wood pattern in
the foundry shop?
A. band saw
B. drill machine
C. saw and chisel
D. hammer
53. Past ME Board Question
All the functions lubricating oil except:
A. adhesion
B. corrosion prevention
C. act as coolant
D. to lighten the load
54. Past ME Board Question
What type of bearing which totally encloses the
shaft?
A. offset bearing
B. central bearing
C. babbit bearing
D. full bearing
55. Past ME Board Question
Not adaptable to welding due to strength and poor
ductility:
A. copper parts
B. aluminum parts
C. cast iron parts
D. all of these
56. Past ME Board Question
In general, the design stress and factor of safety are
related as follows:
A. Design stress = ultimate stress times factor of
safety
B. Design stress = ultimate stress divided by
factor of safety
C. Factor of safety = design stress divided by
ultimate stress
D. Ultimate stress = factor of safety divided by
design stress
57. Past ME Board Question
The color of pipe for communication is:
A. white
B. blue
C. yellow
D. orange
58. Past ME Board Question
It improves red hardness of steel:
A. chromium
B. cobalt
C. boron
D. lead
59. Past ME Board Question
A metal which has a high electrical conductivity but
should not be used for high temperature metal
A. silicon
B. zinc
C. chrome alloy
D. carbide
60. Past ME Board Question
Finding the resultant of two or more forces is called:
A. co-planar forces
B. non-coplanar forces
C. couple
D. composition of forces
61. Past ME Board Question
Eccentrically loaded bearing is also called:
A. full bearing
B. offset bearing
C. partial bearing
D. fitted bearing
62. Past ME Board Question
The best instrument for measuring a thousandth of
an inch
A. micrometer
B. tachometer
C. caliper
D. pyrometer
63. Past ME Board Question
Galvanize iron is term referring to iron coated with
A. aluminum
B. tin
C. zinc
D. manganese
64. Past ME Board Question
The ability of a metal to resist being crushed:
A. shearing strength
B. compressive strength
C. torsional strength
D. tensile strength
65. Past ME Board Question
Is the permissible variation of the size of a
dimension?
A. tolerance
B. allowance
C. clearance
D. interference
66. Past ME Board Question
31
The single force which produces the same effect
upon a body as two or more forces acting together is
called:
A. resultant force
B. co-planar force
C. couple
D. non-coplanar force
67. Past ME Board Question
Product of mass and linear velocity is known as:
A. impulse
B. linear momentum
C. angular momentum
D. impact
68. Past ME Board Question
What is the SAE specification number of
molybdenum-chromium-nickel?
A. 48XX
B. 47XX
C. 46XX
D. 45XX
69. Past ME Board Question
Plus or minus the tolerance is also called:
A. total tolerance
B. unilateral tolerance
C. bilateral tolerance
D. none of these
70. Past ME Board Question
Some experiments are made at Cornell University
showed that experience mechanic could bread a
_____bolt due to nut tightening.
A. 3/8 inch
B. 5/8 inch
C. ½ inch
D. 7/16 inch
71. Past ME Board Question
Common defects encountered in the foundry shop
steel casting operation and also in welding practices.
A. cracks
B. cold shot
C. parting line
D. blow/pin holes
72. Past ME Board Question
This particular outing tool material withstands
using temperature of 1800F and higher at cutting
speed beyond those possible with other cutting tool
materials:
A. titanium carbide
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
B. ceramic
C. carbide grade
D. cubic boron nitride
Past ME Board Question
Moment curve to a simple beam with a
concentrated load at middle span takes the shape of
a;
A. triangle
B. rectangular
C. trapezoid
D. semi-eclipses
Past ME Board Question
Type of chuck wherein the work piece with standard
diameter or size could be attached fast and quick
especially small size work of mass production.
A. lathe drive plate
B. clamp toe dog
C. collet attachment
D. steady center rest
Past ME Board Question
Material may be stretched and still returns to its
former form/condition upon release of force are
called:
A. plasticity
B. modulus of elasticity
C. ductility
D. elastic limit
Past ME Board Question
The brittleness in steel at elevated temperature is:
A. hard drawn
B. cold lap
C. red shortness
D. residual stresses
Past ME Board Question
Intermediate gear is also called _____ gear in the
gear train arrangement.
A. idler
B. pinion
C. third gear
D. mounted gear
Past ME Board Question
The top and bottom land for gears is similar formed
as to crest and _____ for screw thread.
A. flank
B. root
C. flank tooth
D. top land
79. Past ME Board Question
Cold drawing is also called _____.
A. hard drawn
B. oxidized steel
C. cold lap steel
D. strain hardening
80. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following services is not considered as
a work of a machinist?
A. reboring
B. grinding
C. overhauling
D. honing
81. Past ME Board Question
In machine shop, had forging operation of
lengthening a piece of stock while reducing the
cross-sectional area of work is called:
A. bloating
B. upsetting
C. spreading
D. draining out
82. Past ME Board Question
The recommended age limit of fire tube boilers
A. 35 years
B. 30 years
C. 40 years
D. 50 years
83. Past ME Board Question
Silicon-manganese steel designation, SAE _____
A. 72XX
B. 40XX
C. 92XX
D. 9XX
84. Past ME Board Question
The factor of safety generally applied in wire rope
design starts at 3-4 for standing rope application, 512 for operating rope and _____ for hazard to life
and property application like foundry operation.
A. higher value
B. 7-10
C. 8-10
D. 10-18
85. Past ME Board Question
The maximum stress induced in a material when
subjected to intermittent or repeated load without
causing failure is called:
A. ultimate stress
32
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
B. endurance limit
C. ultimate torque
D. elastic limit
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following tools does not belong to the
group?
A. Hermaphrodite caliper
B. divider
C. double veer block
D. trammel
Past ME Board Question
_____ is the theoretical profile of the thread for a
length of one pitch in the axial plane on which
design forms of both the external thread are based.
A. Basic form of thread
B. Effective thread
C. Basic profile of thread
D. Design form of external thread
Past ME Board Question
One of the following materials is not mentioned for
wire rope pulley/sheave applications.
A. Plastic
B. Iron
C. Paper
D. Copper alloy
Past ME Board Question
Internal stress exerted by the fibers to resist the
action of outside force is called
A. shearing stress
B. tensile stress
C. ultimate stress
D. compressive stress
Past ME Board Question
_____ Thread is used where the thread requires
great strength and usually cut square on one side
and slanting on the other side
A. janno
B. buttress
C. square
D. double
Past ME Board Question
In greater quantity, this element is harmful to the
molten ferrous metal.
A. silicon
B. aluminum
C. oxides
D. sulfur
92. Past ME Board Question
For economical cost in the manufacturing large
worm gears the following materials are usually
applied.
A. bronze rim with cast steel spider
B. cast iron rim with bronze spider
C. cast steel rim with brass spider
D. alloyed aluminum rim with cast iron spider
93. Past ME Board Question
Non-metallic material of high melting temperature
being used as furnace lining:
A. quartz brick
B. refractories
C. silica sand
D. dolomite clay bricks
94. Past ME Board Question
Chromium steel (to include heat and corrosion
resistant) designation:
A. SAE 56XX
B. SAE 514XX
C. SAE 61XX
D. SAE 9XX
95. Past ME Board Question
Mirror finish has surfaces fines of _____ rms.
A. 1
B. 2 to 8
C. 1 to 3
D. 2 to 5
96. Past ME Board Question
All terms and abbreviations deal with wire rope
arrangement except this _____ which deals with
wire rope materials strength.
A. preformed
B. IWRC
C. Mps
D. lang lay
97. Past ME Board Question
Alloy steel axle under repeated load/stress will
eventually fail if the load/stress is above the
endurance for steel under consideration. The
endurance limit of the steel is therefore:
A. equal to the allowable stress of the module of
elasticity
B. equal to half of the ultimate stress
C. equal to module of elasticity
D. equal to 80% of the elastic limit
98. Past ME Board Question
Tap not used for cutting thread _____.
A. tapping tap
B. bottoming tap
C. plugging tap
D. taper tap
99. Past ME Board Question
Relief angle of single-point in cutting mild steel cast
iron and other average work as recommended
should be in the ranges of _____ degrees for high
speed tools.
A. 8 to 12
B. 10 to 15
C. 5 to 7
D. 12 to 16
100. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is an unsafe condition in
operating a lathe machine?
A. wearing denim pants/safety shoes
B. wearing a canvass apron
C. operating with safety gloves
D. wearing safety goggles/hearing aid
Elements 08
1.
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following does not affect the tensile
strength of steel?
A. sulphur
B. cobalt
C. phosphorus
D. boron
2. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is an example of rectilinear
translation?
A. locomotive wheels
B. rack gear
C. piston of an engine
D. jack
3. Past ME Board Question
A petroleum by-product used as an electrode in an
electric arc furnace melting operation.
A. anthracite coke
B. foundry coke
C. graphite electrodes
D. bituminous coke
4. Past ME Board Question
A machine shop equipment that can flatten
horizontally, vertically or angular plane
A. shaper machine
33
B. welding machine
C. drill machine
D. power saw
5. Past ME Board Question
What type of leather belting should be used at an
ambient temperature above 140 OF and
possible acid liquid coming in contact with the belt?
A. mineral tanned
B. combination of oak
C. oak tanned
D. none of these
6. Past ME Board Question
The material for engine radiator is usually made of:
A. yellow brass
B. silicon brass
C. admiralty brass
D. navy brass
7. Past ME Board Question
What factors can modify the recommending cutting
speed of a known workpiece?
A. rough cutting of a workpiece
B. modify the shape of cutting tools
C. used correctly shaped cutting tool
D. depth of cut
8. Past ME Board Question
In a cutting tool the cutting end can generally called:
A. end cutting edge
B. nose
C. back rake
D. side rake
9. Past ME Board Question
What equation to be used in computing the
acceleration of the center of a rolling ball with a diameter
of 8 inches?
A. 0
B. w2
C. w2/r
D. v2/r
10. Past ME Board Question
From experience specify the conventional limit of
flywheel operations to be at 6000 ft/min
for cast iron and _______for steel.
A. 7000
B. 8000
C. 10,000
D. 12,000
11. Past ME Board Question
If a set of spur gears are made, installed and
lubricated properly, they may normally be subjected
to failure like:
A. tooth spalling
B. tooth peening
C. pitting
D. shearing
12. Past ME Board Question
Normally cast iron contains 2% carbon or more and
silicon in the range of_______%.
A. 1 to 3
B. 2 to 4
C. 2 to 3
D. 1 to 6
13. Past ME Board Question
A major component of cast steel is:
A. silicon
B. iron
C. manganese
D. chromium
14. Past ME Board Question
The application of electrical currents to the corrosion
circuit to counter the corrosion
reaction is called:
A. cathodic protection
B. sacrificial anodes method
C. chemical corrosion process
D. galvanic action
15. Past ME Board Question
As a rule of thumb the design of foundation could be
about 3.2 to _______ times the engine
stroke.
A. 4.20
B. 4.0
C. 3.40
D. 3.60
16. Past ME Board Question
Bevel gears subjected to corrosion and lightly loaded
is usually made of:
A. bronze
B. brass
C. duralumin
D. all of these
17. Past ME Board Question
The characteristic of tool steel sustain shocks and
major impacts is due to its:
A. toughness
B. stiffness
C. ductility
D. machinability
18. Past ME Board Question
The flux should be provided in soldering electrical
connection or commutator wires as it tends to corrode
the connections.
A. sal ammoniac
B. zinc chloride
C. stearin
D. acid fluxes
19. Past ME Board Question
Treatment process that produces a residual
compressive stress at the surface (which occupy more
volume) and residual tension inside that results in
considerable increase in fatigue strength members on
torsion/bending:
A. partial quenching
B. heavy quenching
C. quenching
D. shallow quenching
20. Past ME Board Question
A good general purpose deoxidizer and promotes fine
grain in steel.
A. copper
B. magnesium
C. molybdenum
D. silicon
21. Past ME Board Question
Surface connecting the crest and roots of the screw
thread.
A. lead angle
B. length of engagement
C. top land
D. flank
22. Past ME Board Question
It is hardening treatment whrereby a cast metal is
being heated to a very high temperature
then suddenly subjected to rapid cooling to improve
hardenability or wear resistance is called:
A. annealing
B. normalizing
C. temprering
D. quenching
23. Past ME Board Question
Moment of inertia is also called:
34
A. modulus of elasticity
B. weep strength
C. radius of gyration
D. none of these
24. Past ME Board Question
Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum steel designation
SAE
A. SAE51XX
B. SAE74XX
C. SAE94XX
D. SAE64XX
25. Past ME Board Question
It is the name applied to reciprocating motion as that
of a pendulum.
A. intermittent motion
B. reciprocating motion
C. oscillation
D. momentum
26. Past ME Board Question
Avoidance in vibration in equipment of machinery
foundations, a mass of weight equal to______ times the
forces are needed.
A. 10 to 20
B. 8 to 15
C. 15 to 20
D. 8 to 10
27. Past ME Board Question
Commonly used or produced screws/bolts/nuts and
for engineering application is a ______series.
A.UNC
B.ANSI
C. withworth
D. UNF
28. Past ME Board Question
It indicates how many times a volume of material is
heavier than an equal volume of water.
A. specific gravity
B. specific volume
C. specific weight
D. specific density
29. Past ME Board Question
Axially located rectangular groove in a hub and shaft
A. keyset
B. cotter pin set
C. flute
D. setscrew point
30. Past ME Board Question
The amount by which the deddendum is in a given
gear/pinion exceeds the addendum of its mating
gear/pinion. Also the radial distance between the top of
a tooth and the bottom of the mating tooth space.
A. tip relief
B. top land
C. clearance
D. space
31. Past ME Board Question
Deflection beam is:
A. proportional to the modulus of elasticity and
moment of inertia
B. proportional to the load imposed and inversely to
the length squared
C. inversely proportional to the modulus of
elasticity and moment of inertia
D. inversely proportional to the weight imposed
times the length
32. Past ME Board Question
The normal density of work space requirement to use
in the design of work room is______ cubic feet per
person
A. 400
B. 388
C. 353
D. 424
33. Past ME Board Question
Safety features that must be placed and maintained at
Machine, Blacksmith, Welding and foundry shops
A. walkway guide
B. safety notices
C. safety goggles
D. safety notices in markers/boards.
34. Past ME Board Question
It is the symbol that the work surfaces should be
machined-finished and usually indicated in the drawing
and placed on the line that represent the surface to be
machined.
A. f
B. 5
C. 20
D. F.A.O
35. Past ME Board Question
Web is part of a drill and is usually thicker________
A. beside the land
B. nearing the shank
C. close to the future
D. at the tip portion
36. Past ME Board Questions
A carbon content in the range of_______ in steel
readily respond to heat treatment.
A. 0.36 to 0.40%C
B. 0.28 to 0.30%C
C. 0.18 to 0.25%C
D. 0.12 to 0.15%C
37. Past ME Board Question
The soldering material commonly applied for
automobile radiator cores and roofing seams.
A. 15/85% tin and lead
B. 50/50% tin and lead
C.45/55% tin and lead
D. 20/80 %tin and lead
38. Past ME Board Question
A research agency handling assistance to all foundry,
machine shop and metallurgical operation
A. MIDRC
B. BOI
C. DOST
D. all of these
39. Past ME Board Question
An act of cutting out a piece of metal at a desired
shape and size
A. broaching
B. blanking
C. slitting
D. dinking
40. Past ME Board Question
The surface of the gear between the fillets of adjacent
teeth is called.
A. bottom land
B. flank
C. top land
D. flank of tooth
41. Past ME Board Question
In drilling soft materials used cutting angles as low as
40 degrees but extremely hard material up to
_______degrees is recommended.
A. 80
B. 65
C. 75
D.70
42. Past ME Board Question
The ideal thickness of the cutter at the pitchline for
cutting helical gears should be _____
35
of normal circular path.
A. 3/8
B.3/4
C.1/2
D. 5/16
43. Past ME Board Question
Progressive change of the position of a body is called.
A. acceleration
B. momentum
C. motion
D. force
44. Past ME Board Question
In designing gears for power transmission an
efficiency of_______ as recommended.
A. 95% or more
B. 89% of more
C. 85% of more
D. 98% of more
45. Past ME Board Question
The five principal parts of shaper are: table, tool
slide, base ram and______.
A. column
B. vise
C. drive motor
D. apron
46. Past ME Board Question
It is a good design practice for steel line shafting to
consider a limit to the linear deflection of ______
inch/foot length maximum.
A. 0.050
B. 0.010
C. 0.020
D. 0.060
47. Past ME Board Question
The conical surface at the starting end of the thread
is called.
A. pitch cone
B. chamfer
C. flute
D. crest
48. Past ME Board Question
For ordinary steel, the modulus of elasticity usually
falls between________ million pounds.
A. 20 to 31
B. 35 to 45
C. 20 to 35
D. 25 to30
49. Past ME Board Question
The modulus of elasticity for metals in compression
is usually taken as that in.
A. tension
B. bearing
C. yield
D. ultimate
50. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the ratio of moment and
stress?
A. strain
B. section modulus
C. contraction
D. passions ratio
51. Past ME Board Question
What is the flexural stress when a symmetrically
cross-section beam when the vertical shear is maximum
A. infinity
B. zero
C. maximum
D. minimum
52. Past ME Board Question
The riveted joints in ASME Code has as design
surface compressive stress______
Higher than the design tensile stress.
A. 70%
B. 60%
C. 35%
D. 50%
53. Past ME Board Question
What is the ratio of the minimum strength of joint to
the strength of solid joint in the
pressure vessel?
A. efficiency
B. relative strength
C. performance factor
D. joint efficiency
54. Past ME Board Question
What is the usual factor of safety for a pressure
vessel?
A. 4
B. 1.5
C. 3
D. 5
55. Past ME Board Question
It is the permissible variation of the size.
A. tolerance
B. limits
C. fits
D. none of these
56. Past ME Board Question
Considering that there is no fit, what is the
permissible liberal tolerance in machining work?
A. ±0.010
B. ±0.090
C. ±0.020
D. ±0.050
57. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is a tolerance where the size
of a part may be larger only, or
smaller only, than the given dimension.
A. unilateral
B. lateral
C. bilateral
D. none of these
58. Past ME Board Question
A tolerance where the size of part is permitted to be
either larger or smaller than the given
dimension
A. unilateral
B. lateral
C. bilateral
D. none of these
59. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the basis of ASA fits?
A. basic number system
B. basic hole system
C. basic size system
D. unit system
60. Past ME Board Question
When the hole is smaller than the shaft it will take
force of pressure to put the cold parts together. In such
case the allowance is negative. Which of the following
terms is appropriate for such allowance?
A. negative fits of metals
B. interference of metals
C. positive fits of the shaft
D. intangible fits
61. Past ME Board Question
What is the direction of the predominant surface
pattern?
A. smoothness
B. waviness
C. lay
36
D. roughness
62. Past ME Board Question
Is the irregularities of departures from the nominal
surface of greater spacing than roughness?
A. waviness
B. roughness
C. lay
D. smoothness
63. Past ME Board Question
Is the surface finish of micrometer in rms.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
64. Past ME Board Question
Is the process of pre-stressing or over-stressing of a
hollow cylindrical member beyond elastic range.
A. presstagge
B. autofrettage
C. stress relieving
D. countersinking
65. Past ME Board Question
Is the phenomenon occurring when two touching
surfaces have a high contact pressure and when these
surfaces have minute relative motion?
A. prestressing
B. fretting
C. friction
D. carving
66. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following gears has the simplest type of
teeth?
A. Helical gears
B. Spur gears
C. Bevel gears
D. Worm gears
67. Past ME Board Question
In gears an imaginary circle which the lever arm is
based in,
A. base circle
B. pitch circle
C. addendum circle
D. clearance circle
68. Past ME Board Question
It is the circle tangent to the addendum of the
meshing gears.
A. clearance circle
B. base circle
C. addendum circle
D. pitch circle
69. Past ME Board Question
The distance from a point on one gear to the
corresponding point measured along the base circle.
A. normal pitch
B. circular pitch
C. axial pitch
D. diametral pitch
70. Past ME Board Question
A line passing through the pitch point that is tangent
to both base circles of a gear is:
A. pressure line
B. perpendicular line
C. tangent line
D. center line
71. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following contact ratio for a good gear
design?
A. 1.5:1
B. 1:1.3
C. 1:3
D. 1.2:2
72. Past ME Board Question
In pressure vessels, which of the following resists
internal pressure through the tension?
A. shell-type element
B. cam type element
C. plate type element
D. spherical type element
73. Past ME Board Question
In pressure vessels, which of the following resists
internal pressure through bending?
A. shell-type element
B. cam type element
C. plate-type element
D. spherical type element
74. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following flanges is suitable for low and
(hindi q mabasa) pressure?
A. Ring flange
B. Lap joint flange
C. Tapered-hub flange
D. Welding neck type
75. Past ME Board Question
It is the study of body’s motion independent of the
forces on the body?
A. Kinetics
B. Dynamics
C. Kinematics
D. Mechanics
76. Past ME Board Question
What is the reciprocal of velocity ratio?
A. train value
B. ratio factor
C. modular value
D. none of these
77. Past ME Board Question It is the type of bolt
finished all over and has usually having coarse threads.
A. coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. Machine bolt
D. automobile bolt
78. Past ME Board Question
It is type of bolt distinguished by a short portion of
the shank and underneath the head being square of
finned or ribbed.
A. coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. Machine bolt
D. carriage bolt
79. Past ME Board Question
It is type of bolt threaded on both ends and can be
used where a through bolt impossible.
A. coupling bolt
B. carriage bolt
C. stud bolt
D. machine bolt
80. Past ME Board Question
It is cheap variety of bolt made in small sizes.
A. stud bolt
B. stove bolt
C. machine bolt
D. coupling bolt
81. Past ME Board Question
It is a locking device that is used to maintain pressure
between threads of the bolt and nut.
A. gasket
B. lock washer
C. lock nuts
D. filler
82. Past ME Board Question
37
What is the large wood screw used to fasten
machinery and equipment
A. lag screw
B. loss screw
C. wood screw
D. cross screw
83. Past ME Board Question
What is the minimum length of contact in tapped
hole for cast iron?
A. 1.7 D
B. 1.5 D
C. 1.2 D
D. 2.1 D
84. Past ME Board Question
It is the ratio of the mean diameter of the coil over
the coil diameters.
A. Wahl factor
B. Spring index
C. Coil ratio
D. Lead scale
85. Past ME Board Question
What is the overall length of the spring when it is
compressed until all adjacent coil touch?
A. free length
B. solid length
C. compressed length
D. expansion length
86. Past ME Board Question
It is the length of coil spring under no load.
A. compressed length
B. free length
C. solid length
D. none of these
87. Past ME Board Question
In general, the steel springs are made of relatively
high carbon steel usually:
A. 5%
B. less than 0.5%
C. more than 0.5%
D. 7.5%
88. Past ME Board Question
It is low cost spring material suitable where service is
not severe and dimensional precision is not needed.
A. helical spring wire
B. stainless steel
C. hard drawn wire spring
D. copper
89. Past ME Board Question
What is the hard drawn (80% reduction) spring wire
made of carbon steel?
A. oil tempered wire
B. music wire
C. tension wire
D. chromium wire
90. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following wires with good quality and is
used for impact loading?
A. Hard drawn wire
B. Cold drawn wire
C. Helical spring wire
D. Chromium-Silicon wire
91. Past ME Board Question
When heat-treated wire is coiled cold, it should be
stress relieved for bending stress and after cooling it or
heated at some:
A. 400 0F
B. 600 0F
C. 700 0C
D. 500 0F
92. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not a function of spring?
A. absorbs energy
B. source of potential energy
C. measure weight
D. measure thickness
93. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the type of spring made in
the form of dished Washer?
A. air spring
B. believe spring
C. volute spring
D. motor spring
94. Past ME Board Question
What is the type of failure due to unstability?
A. Buckling
B. Slenderness ratio
C. Stability
D. Euler’s failure
95. Past ME Board Question
What type of formula that is best applied to a very
slender column?
A. Column formula
B. Slenderness formulas
C. Moment formulas
D. Euler formula
96. Past ME Board Question
If two principal stresses is zero, the state of stress:
3A. Biaxial
B. Mono-axial
C. Uniaxial
D. Triaxial
97. Past ME Board Question
What do you call the system that has finite values of
principal stresses?
A. Triaxial
B. Uniaxial
C. Mono-axial
D. Biaxial
98. Past ME Board Question
A screw that requires positive torque to lower load or
to loosen the screw if it has been turned tight against a
resistance
A. power screw
B. lock screw
C. Self screw
D. self locking screw
99. Past ME Board Question
What is the rotating member used in transmitting
power?
A. shaft
B. countershaft
C. axle
D. washer
100. Past ME Board Question
For machinery shaft the permissible deflection is
approximately:
A. 0.02 in/ft
B. 0.03 in/ft
C. 0.01 in/ft
D. 0.05 in/ft
ELEMENTS 09
1.
Past ME Board Question
For shafts, the shear due to bending is a
maximum at the neutral plane where the
normal stress is:
A. Minimum
B. Constant
C. Maximum also
D. Zero
38
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Past ME Board Question
The minimum value of numerical combined
shock and fatigue factor to be applied in every
case to the computed bending moment of the
shaft is:
A. 2.0
B. 1.75
C. 1.5
D. 1.3
Past ME Board Question
What is the other name given to short shafts
on machines?
A. Spindles
B. Head shafts
C. Core shafts
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
What is the other name given to a line shaft?
A. Countershaft
B. Main shaft
C. Long shaft
D. Head shaft
Past ME Board Question
The speed at which the center of mass will be
equal the deflecting forces on the shaft; the
shaft with its attached bodies will then vibrate
violently, since the centrifugal force changes its
direction as the shaft turns in:
A. Nominal speed
B. Critical speed
C. Relative speed
D. Mean speed
Past ME Board Question
An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting
is that the deflection should not exceed _____
of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot
B. 0.08 in. per foot
C. 0.02 in. per foot
D. 0.05 in. per foot
Past ME Board Question
For transmission shafts the allowable
deflection is 1 degree in a length of _____
diameters.
A. 20
B. 25
C. 30
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
D. 40
Past ME Board Question
What is the limiting torsional deflection for
machinery shafts, if the criteria of limiting
torsional deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot of
length?
A. 1˚
B. 2.5˚
C. 2˚
D. 3.5˚
Past ME Board Question
Bevel gears of sizes 5 in. to 15 in. should not
be lift or depress more than _____, as Gleason
statement.
A. 0.004
B. 0.003
C. 0.002
D. 0.001
Past ME Board Question
What type of key that allows the hub to move
along the shaft but prevents the rotation of the
shaft?
A. Woodruff Key
B. Feather Key
C. Gibbs Key
D. Square Key
Past ME Board Question
What is the other name for Kennedy Key?
A. Tangential Key
B. Woodruff Key
C. Saddle Key
D. Roll pin
Past ME Board Question
What type of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit
B. Press fit
C. Sliding fit
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is used for permanent
fits and similar to involute splines except that
the pressure angle is 14.5˚?
A. Separation load
B. Spline shaft
C. Stub serrations
D. Involute serrations
Past ME Board Question
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
It is used a coupling or in addition to another
couplings where in case of overload there is
danfer of injury to machine or to material in
process.
A. Shear pin
B. Flange coupling
C. Involute serrations
D. King pin
Past ME Board Question
What is the maximum shaft angle for a single
Hooke’s coupling?
A. 10˚
B. 17˚
C. 15˚
D. 20˚
Past ME Board Question
What are the two principal parts of a Journal
Bearing?
A. Bearing and Journal
B. Shaft and Babbit
C. Clearance and Fitted
D. Shaft and Cylinder
Past ME Board Question
When line of action of the load bisects the arc
of partial bearing, the bearing is said to be:
A. Eccentrically loaded
B. Fully loaded
C. Centrally loaded
D. Partially loaded
Past ME Board Question
What is the difference in radii of the bearing
and Journal?
A. Even clearance
B. Clearance ratio
C. Odd clearance
D. Radial clearance
Past ME Board Question
When radii of both the bearing and the
journal are the same, then the bearing is said
to be:
A. Fitted bearing
B. Clearance bearing
C. Full bearing
D. Ambiguous bearing
Past ME Board Question
What is the line that passes through the
centers of the bearing and the journals?
39
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
A. Line of action
B. Line of centers
C. Line of symmetry
D. Tangent line
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is considered
advantageous for bearing materials?
A. Conformability
B. Compatibility
C. Embeddability
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
What is the recommended coefficient of
fluctuation of flywheels for punching, shearing,
pressing machine?
A. 0.005-0.1
B. 0.007-0.01
C. 0.03-0.05
D. 0.01-0.03
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following considers 200 series of
bearing?
A. Heavy
B. Medium
C. Light
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following considers the 300
series of bearing?
A. Heavy
B. Medium
C. Light
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
A type of roller bearing in which the balls are
assembled by the eccentric displacement of the
inner ring
A. Shallow groove ball bearing
B. Filling-slot ball bearing
C. Self-aligning ball bearing
D. Deep-groove ball bearing
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not a type of
bearing?
A. Shallow groove ball bearing
B. Filling-slot ball bearing
C. Self-aligning ball bearing
D. Deep-groove ball bearing
27. Past ME Board Question
What is the usual density of the leather belt?
A. 0.035 lb/in³
B. 0.0135 lb/in³
C. 0.025 lb/in³
D. 0.0465 lb/in³
28. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the approximate
density of a fat rubber belt?
A. 0.055 lb/in³
B. 0.0135 lb/in³
C. 0.045 lb/in³
D. 0.0465 lb/in³
29. Past ME Board Question
A toothed wheel whose tooth elements are
straight and parallel to the shaft axis or used to
transmit motion and power between parallel
shafts
A. Helical gear
B. Spur gear
C. Worm gear
D. Bevel gear
30. Past ME Board Question
The breaking strength of oak-tanned beltings
varies from 3 to more than:
A. 5 ksi
B. 6 ksi
C. 7 ksi
D. 9 ksi
31. Past ME Board Question
Experience suggests that the most economical
designs are obtained for a belt speed of:
A. 6000 to 7500 fpm
B. 3000 to 5000 fpm
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm
D. 5000 to 1000 fpm
32. Past ME Board Question
The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force
increasing rapidly above about:
A. 2500 fpm
B. 3000 fpm
C. 3500 fpm
D. 4000 fpm
33. Past ME Board Question
What is the recommended speed for leather
belts?
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
A. 6000 to 7000 fpm
B. 5000 to 6000 fpm
C. 7000 to 8000 fpm
D. 4500 to 5600 fpm
Past ME Board Question
What is the usual recommended speed for
fabric belts?
A. 4000 to 5000 fpm
B. 3000 to 4000 fpm
C. 2000 to 3000 fpm
D. 2000 and more fpm
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the recommended
initial tension of the belt?
A. 75 ib/in of width
B. 73 lb/in of width
C. 71 lb/in of width
D. 80 lb/in of width
Past ME Board Question
Two shafts at right angles to each other may be
connected by what arrangement?
A. Half turn
B. Quarter turn
C. ¾ turn
D. One turn
Past ME Board Question
What is the minimum number of teeth on a
smaller sprocket for low speed?
A. 12
B. 21
C. 17
D. 14
Past ME Board Question
What is the minimum number of teeth on a
smaller sprocket for moderate speed?
A. 17
B. 21
C. 12
D. 14
Past ME Board Question
What is the usual minimum number of teeth
on a smaller sprocket for high speed?
A. 21
B. 24
C. 12
D. 14
Past ME Board Question
40
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
Which of the following is the measure of
torsional stress?
A. Accuracy
B. Stiffness
C. Rigidity
D. Precision
Past ME Board Question
When tested in compression, ductile materials
usually exhibit _____ characteristics up to the
yield strength as they do when tested in
tension.
A. The same
B. More than
C. Less than
D. Approximately the same
Past ME Board Question
A tolerance where the size of a part is
permitted to be either larger or smaller than
the given dimension
A. Bilateral
B. Unilateral
C. Lateral
D. None of these
Past ME Board Question
A fit generally used on those dimensions
involved in a fit such as pin in a hole.
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. None of these
Past ME Board Question
It is a relatively finely spaced irregularity of the
surfaces.
A. Smoothness
B. Waviness
C. Lay
D. Roughness
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is the surface finish to
heavy cuts or coarse feed?
A. 200 rms
B. 400 rms
C. 80 rms
D. 500 or greater rms
Past ME Board Question
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Which of the following is the most dominant
cause (approximately 80 %) of machine
failures?
A. Torsion
B. Negligence
C. Fatigue failures
D. Compression
Past ME Board Question
For wrought steel in its commonly met
commercial forms, it is often assumed that the
average endurance limit for an average
(50
% survival) with the BrinellHardness is limited
to:
A. 500
B. 400
C. 240
D. 450
Past ME Board Question
What is the range of the endurance ratio or
Czaud quotes values for steel?
A. 0.23 to 0.65
B. 0.34 to 0.87
C. 0.63 to 0.93
D. 0.34 to 0.45
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following indicates the degree of
concentration?
A. Power factor
B. Service factor
C. Stress factor
D. Stress concentration factor
Past ME Board Question
The internal stresses that exists in any part of
the material that is subjected to temperature
and not acted upon by an external load
A. Residual stress
B. Form stress
C. Superposed stress
D. Control stress
Past ME Board Question
It is the process that cold works a limited
amount of material, thus giving a higher
strength, and it leaves a surface compressive
stress.
A. Surface finishing
B. Tensioning
C. Surfacing
D. Surface rolling
52. Past ME Board Question
Fatigue strength is increased by repeated loads
just below the normal fatigue limit followed by
small step by step increase of the loading.
A. Coaxing
B. Waxing
C. Mixing
D. Relieving
53. Past ME Board Question
It is the diameter of the imaginary cylinder that
bounds the crest of an external thread and the
roots of an internal thread.
A. Mean diameter
B. Root diameter
C. Stress diameter
D. Major diameter
54. Past ME Board Question
It is the distance in inches a screw thread (a
helix) advances axially in one turn.
A. Pitch
B. Mean pitch
C. Lead
D. Circular pitch
55. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following bolts is recommended
for general use?
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
56. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is frequently used bolt
in automotive and aircraft industries?
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
57. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is particular bolt used
in aeronautical equipment?
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
58. Past ME Board Question
41
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
What type of bolt usually used for highpressure pipe flanges, cylinder head studs etc.
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. 8 UN
Past ME Board Question
It is the stress or load induced by the
tightening operation.
A. Initial stress
B. Initial tension
C. Residual stress
D. None of these
Past ME Board Question
For non-metallic gaskets, it has been found
that they should have a certain minimum
amount of compression as _____ for a certain
cork gasket.
A. 62 %
B. 86 %
C. 68 %
D. 76 %
Past ME Board Question
It is a screw fastening with a nut on it
A. Bolt
B. U – bolt
C. Rivet
D. Screw
Past ME Board Question
A fastening which has no nut and turns in to a
threaded hole
A. Bolt
B. Fastener
C. Rivet
D. Screw
Past ME Board Question
An old name for an unfinished through bolt
comes with a square.
A. Coupling bolt
B. Stud bolt
C. Machine bolt
D. Automobile bolt
Past ME Board Question
It is a type of coil where the helical coil is
wrapped into a circle forming an annular ring.
A. Volute spring
B. Hair spring
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
C. Motor spring
D. Garter spring
Past ME Board Question
It is a type of spring where thin flat strip
wound up on itself as a plane spiral, usually
anchored at the inside end.
A. Motor spring
B. Garter spring
C. Volute spring
D. Helical spring
Past ME Board Question
It is the ratio of the length of the column and
the radius of gyration of the cross-sectional
area about a centroidal axis.
A. Contact ratio
B. Slenderness ratio
C. Centroidal ratio
D. Column ratio
Past ME Board Question
Under the theories of failure, for static loading
of ductile material, the design stress is:
A. Yield Stress / Factor of Safety
B. Ultimate Stress / Factor of Safety
C. Ultimate Stress / Proportional Limit
D. Yield point / Proportional Limit
Past ME Board Question
Under the theories of failure, the value of
shear stress is how many times that of a tensile
stress?
A. Four times
B. Half
C. Double
D. One-fourth
Past ME Board Question
The theory of mechanics of material shows
that the results from the octahedral shear stress
theory and those from maximum distortionenergy theory are:
A. The same
B. Less than
C. More than
D. Not related
Past ME Board Question
It is the distance measure axially from a point
on one thread to the corresponding point on
adjacent thread.
A. Axial pitch
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
B. Z – pitch
C. Lead
D. Lead angle
Past ME Board Question
It is the angle between a tangent to the pitch
helix and plane normal to the axis of the screw.
A. Helix angle
B. Lead angle
C. Tangent angle
D. Vertical angle
Past ME Board Question
It is suggested that the design factor on the
yield strength be about 1.5 for the smooth
load, about 2 to 2.25 for minor shock loading,
and up to _____ for severe shock loads,
especially when the loading reverses during
operation.
A. 4.5
B. 3.5
C. 3.0
D. 4.0
Past ME Board Question
A typical hub length fall between _____
A. 1.25D to 2.5D
B. 1.3D to 3.4D
C. 1.25D to 4.0D
D. D to 7.0D
Past ME Board Question
A key with one several patented methods of
keying is driven or pressed into a hole that is
small enough to dose the slit, assembled in
radial direction.
A. Fit key
B. Roll pin
C. Saddle key
D. Pin key
Past ME Board Question
A key that allows the hub to move along the
shaft but prevents the rotation of the shaft
A. Woodruff key
B. Gibbs key
C. Feather key
D. Square key
Past ME Board Question
For involute spline, the type of fits used:
A. Close fit
B. Sliding fit
42
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
C. Press fit
D. All of these
Past ME Board Question
A coupling that transmits power via the
frictional forces induced by pulling the flange
toward each other over slotted tapered sleeves.
A. Flange coupling
B. Ribbed compression coupling
C. Rigid coupling
D. Flanged compression coupling
Past ME Board Question
A coupling used for absorbing some shock and
vibration that may appear on the shaft and of
preventing the occurrence of reversed stresses
caused by the shaft deflecting at the coupling
preventing at the coupling
A. Rigid coupling
B. Flange coupling
C. Flexible coupling
D. None of these
Past ME Board Question
It is the difference in the radii of the bearing
and the journal.
A. Even clearance
B. Clearance ratio
C. Fit clearance
D. Radial clearance
Past ME Board Question
A bearing in which the radii of the journal and
the nearing are the same
A. Fitted nearing
B. Full bearing
C. Partial bearing
D. Clearance bearing
Past ME Board Question
What is the approximate length-to-diameter
ratio of hydrodynamic bearings?
A. 1
B. 4
C. 3
D. 2
Past ME Board Question
The operating temperature of oil films in the
bearing must approximately:
A. 140˚F to 150˚F
B. 140˚F to 160˚F
C. 120˚F to 190˚F
D. 120˚F to 190˚F
83. Past ME Board Question
At higher temperatures, oil oxidizes more
rapidly above:
A. 120˚F
B. 200˚F
C. 140˚F
D. 160˚F
84. Past ME Board Question
For thrust bearing, the speed at moderate
operating condition is:
A. 50 <Vm> 200 fpm
B. 50 <Vm> 250 fpm
C. 50 <Vm> 220 fpm
D. 50 <Vm> 250 fpm
85. Past ME Board Question
If the ends are joined by wire lacing with
machine, the usual efficiency of joint is:
A. 100 %
B. 75 %
C. 85 %
D. 88 %
86. Past ME Board Question
On high speed centrifugal blowers, it has been
observed that the arc of contact is reduced
from 180˚ at rest to _____ in motion.
A. 100˚
B. 90˚
C. 95˚
D. 110˚
87. Past ME Board Question
The recommended net belt pull for rubber belt
is:
A. 11.34 lb/ply per inch of width
B. 13.75 lb/ply per inch of width
C. 16.35 lb/ply per inch of width
D. 20.34 lb/ply per inch of width
88. Past ME Board Question
For minimum quietness, use sprockets with
_____ or more teeth.
A. 21
B. 23
C. 25
D. 27
89. Past ME Board Question
If two intersecting shafts re to be belt
connected, _____ guide pulleys are to be used.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Past ME Board Question
Wire ropes are made from cold-drawn with
_____ or more teeth.
A. 21
B. 23
C. 25
D. 27
Past ME Board Question
A wire rope that the wires and strands are
twisted in the opposite direction
A. Long lay
B. Perform
C. Regular lay
D. Lang lay
Past ME Board Question
A wire rope that the wires and strands are
twisted on the same direction
A. Long lay
B. Perform
C. Regular lay
D. Lang lay
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following ropes is used for
haulage, egging, guard rails?
A. 6 X 35 IWRC
B. 6 X 15 IWRC
C. 7 X 8 IWRC
D. 7 X 7 IWRC
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following has been considered as
general purpose rope?
A. 6 x 19 IWRC
B. 7 x 25 IWRC
C. 7 x 25 IWRC
D. 6 x 9 IWRC
Past ME Board Question
Which of the following ropes is used for lines,
hawsers, overhead cranes, and hoists?
A. 6 x 37 IWRC
B. 6 x 35 IWRC
C. 6 x 25 IWRC
D. 7 x 26 IWRC
Past ME Board Question
43
The regular materials wire ropes are made of:
A. Chromium
B. Wrought iron
C. Cast steel
D. High-carbon iron
97. Past ME Board Question
What is the minimum suggested design factor
of wire ropes for miscellaneous hoisting
equipment is:
A. 2
B. 3
C. 5
D. 4
98. Past ME Board Question
To avoid excessive wear rate the recommended
limiting pressure for 6 x 19 ropes is _____ for
cast steel.
A. 700 psi
B. 900 psi
C. 1000 pi
D. 1200 psi
99. Past ME Board Question
To avoid wear rate the recommended limiting
pressure for 6 x 19 ropes is _____ for
manganese cast steel.
A. 2500 psi
B. 2000 psi
C. 3000 psi
D. 2300 psi
100. Past ME Board Question
What friction devices that are used to connect
shafts?
A. Clutches
B. Spring
C. Brakes
D. Holders
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Elements 10
1.
2.
The total frictional energy that is stored in the
brake parts principally in the drum or disk is
approximately:
A. 56% up
B. 90% up
C. 86% up
D. 75% up
The brake capacity to absorb energy is known
as:
A. Energy
8.
9.
B. Power
C. Resistance brake
D. Braking torque
A kind of braking system such that if the band
wraps partly around the brake drum and the
braking action is obtained by pulling the band
tight into the wheel.
A. Block brake
B. Clutch
C. Band brake
D. Centrifugal brake
Which of the following clutches that has a
disadvantage of heavier rotating masses.
A. Multiple disc clutch
B. Cone clutch
C. Disc clutch
D. Twin clutching
Which of the following welds have been
considered as resistance weld which is usually
round in the same dorm as the electrodes that
press the sheets together?
A. Edge joints
B. Spot welds
C. CIG welds
D. TIG welds
A welding which consist of short lengths (2-3
in. long) of welds with space between as 6
inches on centers.
A. Intermittent weld
B. Spot weld
C. MIG weld
D. TIG weld
A welding operation that use hot flame and
metal rod.
A. Gas welding
B. Arc welding
C. Resistance welding
D. Automatic welding
The arc is covered with a welding composition,
and bare electrode wire is fed automatically.
A. Resistance welding
B. Induction welding
C. Submerged welding
D. Spot welding
What is the recommended coefficient of
fluctuation of flywheels for punching, shearing,
pressing machine is:
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
A. 0.005 – 0.1
B. 0.002 – 0.07
C. 0.03 – 0.05
D. 0.01 – 0.03
The part of the machine that absorbs the
energy delivered by a sharp force or blow.
A. Spring
B. Anvil
C. Brakes
D. Flywheel
It is the friction of wheel inclination from the
vertical position.
A. Camber
B. Toe-in
C. Caster
D. King pin inclination
Which of the following is a machine which
takes large quantities of raw or finished
materials and binds them with a rope or metal
straps or wires into a large package?
A. Bacher
B. Bending machine
C. Baler
D. Automatic screw machine
It is the grasping of an outside work piece in a
chunk or jawed device in a lathe.
A. Clucking
B. Clamping
C. Chucking
D. Clam shelling
Which of the following is a mechanical linkage
or mechanism that can turn about a center or
rotation?
A. Oscillation
B. Crank
C. Coupler
D. Drag link
What type of compound screw which produces
a motion equal to the difference in motion
between the two component screws?
A. Machine screw
B. Tanden screw
C. Differential screw
D. Variable screw
Which of the following bolts provided with a
hole at one end instead of usual head?
A. Stud bolt
44
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
B. Eye bolt
C. Machine bolt
D. Stove bolt
What operation generally carried out to divide
the parent coiled sheet into narrower coils?
A. Slotting
B. Squeezing
C. Squaring
D. Slitting
It is the process used to form shallow, round,
raised recessed troughs of uniform width in a
straight curved or circular form.
A. Hemming
B. Beading
C. Embossing
D. Bludging
The process of removing excess metals from
the edge of a strip to make it suitable for
drawing without wrinkling or to obtain final
complicated shape which was not directly
possible by blanking.
A. Lancing
B. Slugging
C. Notching
D. Trimming
Which of the following is the processed of
removing coarse scratches or tool marks?
A. Polishing
B. Buffing
C. Honing
D. Lapping
Which of the following ropes is galvanized and
consist of 6 strands, 7 wires each, and a hemp
core?
A. Reverse lay rope
B. Guy rope
C. Lang lay rope
D. Regular rope
It is a large lathe used for turning and boring
cannons.
A. Gun lathe
B. Engine lathe
C. Cannon lathe
D. Turret lathe
What devices on lathe used for carrying the
revolving spindle?
A. Head stock
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
B. Header
C. Head suction
D. None of these
The recommended means of supporting the
chuck during the mounting procedure to the
lathe spindle is to use:
A. Crane
B. Jack
C. Overhead
D. Ratchet
Too much ________ in flat belt operation
tend to cause excessive wear slippage and may
burn the belt.
A. Play
B. Slack
C. Stiffness
D. Tightness
It is a chromium steel tape in AISI-SAE
designation.
A. 10XX
B. 25XX
C. 50XX
D. 40XX
Which of the following is not recommended
for use in a driving speed exceeding 2000
ft/min.?
A. Flat leather belt
B. Herringbone gear
C. Silent sprocket
D. V-belt
It is a low cost bearing used worldwide for
automobile or low horsepower motor
application. It is made of thin coating of over
flat metal strip.
A. Babbitt
B. Cadmium brass
C. Lead
D. Tin
The most common tool to measure diameter
in machine shop operation but normally and
always used with steel scale for measurement.
A. Caliper
B. Micrometer
C. Protractor
D. Vernier
30. In impact force introduced to case the metal to
flow in shaped mold according to the shape to
dies made.
A. Hardness
B. Spinning
C. Swaging
D. Toughness
31. Find the polar section modulus of a steel
shafting with “D” as the diameter.
A. πD³/16
B. πD³/32
C. πD³/32
D. πD³/16
32. Forces of equal in magnitude but opposite in
direction are parallel are called:
A. Acceleration
B. Coplanar
C. Couple
D. Non-coplanar
33. Composition of forces is at the ______ of two
or more forces.
A. Combination
B. Opposition
C. Resultant
D. Summary
34. Circular pitch is measured along the ________
in the circular gear.
A. Circle
B. Line of action
C. Pitch center
D. Pitch diameter
35. Stiffness is the material’s ability to ______
deformation under stress.
A. Non-coplanar
B. Planar
C. Resist
D. Staffer
36. It imparts the ductility, toughness, and
plasticity of steel.
A. Annealing
B. Materializing
C. Quenching
D. Tempering
37. Which of the following type of wood is usually
used in making wood pattern in the foundry?
A. Dried sap wood
B. Hard wood
45
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
C. Kiln dried wood
D. Scrap wood
The progressive change in position of ______is
called motion.
A. Component
B. Couple
C. Link
D. Mass
Strain or _______ is a change in
geometry/shape of the body due to the action
of a force on it.
A. Bending stress
B. Deformation
C. Shear stress
D. Stress
The effective face width of a helical gear
divided by the axial pitch. This is sometimes
called face overlap.
A. Angle overlap
B. Axial overlap
C. Contact overlap
D. Helical overlap
For mass production of casting it is generally
cheaper to use ________ pattern for longer
life.
A. Aluminum
B. Brass
C. Metal
D. Wooden
It is a plane between mating teeth or the
amount of which a tooth space exceed the
thickness of an engaging tooth is called:
A. Backlash
B. Clearance
C. Pitting
D. Space
The forces that can be combined or called
_____component forces.
A. Different
B. Helical
C. Opposite
D. Parallel
Plane of rotation is defined as plane
perpendicular to a:
A. Gear axis
B. Gear ratio
C. Normal plane
D. Pitch diameter
45. Which of the following can be a con current?
A. Collinear
B. Couple
C. Parallel
D. All of these
46. Cutting lubricant used in drilling, reaming and
tapping for brass and bronze.
A. Dry
B. Soda water
C. Soluble oil
D. Turpentine
47. In general accepted limit of diamond wheel
speed should be in the range of _______ fpm.
A. 1000/2000
B. 2500/3500
C. 3000/4000
D. 5000/6000
48. Prepared tool bit will now consist of face, nose
and:
A. Cutting tool
B. Shank
C. Sharp tool
D. Tool edge
49. This is an alloy in bronze casting that assists
lubrication and in itself a lubricant.
A. Lead
B. Manganese
C. Phosphorous
D. Tin
50. For longer sprocket chain life the speed range
of ______ fpm is recommended.
A. 1200-1400
B. 1500-1600
C. 1800-2000
D. 2000-2100
51. All stainless steel type is SAE designation
except:
A. 92XX
B. 300XX
C. 304XX
D. 515XX
52. It is white metal with good oxidation and
corrosion resistance. This has also good
electrical magnetic properties.
A. Aluminum
B. Copper
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
C. Nickel
D. Titanium
It is a molybdenum steel-tape in AISI-SAE
designation.
A. 44XX
B. 45XX
C. 50XX
D. 51XX
Cutting lubricants used in drilling, reaming
tapping for hand spots in cast iron.
A. Dry
B. Kerosene
C. Soda water
D. Turpentine
In a ________ design, the lead of a single
thread is equal to the pitch.
A. Bevel gear
B. Bolt
C. Helical gear
D. Hypoid gear
A of chisels used in cutting of keyways, square
corner or slots.
A. Cape
B. Diamond head
C. Flat
D. Round
The maximum recommended ideal number of
teeth to use for bigger sprocket is:
A. 120
B. 127
C. 132
D. 143
A bolt for general application that posses a
stronger thread is a type _____ screw.
A. BUN
B. UNC
C. UNEF
D. WOOD
Maximum moment formula for beam simply
supported at both ends and subjected to a load
uniformly distributed over its length.
A. wL/2
B. wL²/8
C. wL²/16
D. wL/12
What is the special bearing used with high
deflection?
46
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
A. Babbitt
B. Ball
C. Roller
D. Self aligning
which of the following bearing is used for low
load and less expensive production
A. Babbitt
B. ball bearing
C. roller bearing
D. self aligning
the lateral strain in axial tension members can
be calculated by;
A. deformation
B. Hooke’s law
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. William’s line
it is abundantly used worldwide as coating on
top of the plate automobile.
A. Babbitt
B. lead
C. manganese
D. tin
a liquid metal at room temperature.
A. aluminum
B. mercury
C. zinc
D. zirconium
it is a steel with SAE specification 13XX
A. chromium
B. manganese
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
Property, which enables a material, be drawn
into a wire.
A. ductility
B. elasticity
C. plasticity
D. utility
The stress that causes the material to shorten.
A. bearing
B. compressive
C. shear
D. tensile
The most known lubricants bearing being
utilized in whatever category of load and speed
are oil, air grease and dry lubricants like:
A. bronze
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
B. graphite
C. lead
D. silicon
It is a gear commonly used in parallel shaft
transmission especially when a smooth
continuous action is essential as in high speed
drives up to 12000 fpm.
A. Bevel gear
B. Helical gear
C. Herringbone gear
D. Spur gear
The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio
of the pitch diameter to the number of teeth
A. clearance
B. involute
C. lead
D. module
What tool(s) will be used in making wood
pattern in the foundry shop?
A. Band saw
B. Drill machine
C. hammer
D. saw and chisel
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Acme threaded bolts
B. Hex bolt
C. Square threaded
D. Stud bolt
Ability of material to absorb strain energy and
will return to its original state.
A. creep
B. fatigue strength
C. hardness
D. resilience
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal
strain.
A. deformation
B. modulus of elasticity
C. poisson’s ratio
D. William’s line
Basic size is the same as design size if there is
no:
A. allowance
B. clearance
C. limits
D. tolerance
76. Forces that meet at a common point are called:
A. co-linear
B. concurrent
C. coplanar
D. couple
77. Pair of equal and opposite (not collinear)
forces that tend cause a rotation of a body.
A. centroids
B. couple
C. equilibrium
D. vector
78. Stress that resist being pulled apart.
A. compressive
B. shear
C. tensile
D. torsional
79. What is the other term applied to dynamic
seals?
A. gasket
B. packing
C. seal
D. shield
80. Which type of hardening will work to some
extent in all metals?
A. annealing
B. austenitizing
C. martempering
D. work hardening
81. What do impact tests determine?
A. Creep test
B. hardness
C. toughness
D. yield strength
82. Sound travels fastest in:
A. air at 0˚F and 1 atmospheric
B. air at 70˚F and 1 atmospheric
C. air at 70˚F and 0lbf /in
D. steel at 70˚F
83. The yield strength of common yellow brass
(70% Cu, 30%Zn)
A. annealing
B. chill casting
C. cold working
D. heat treatment
84. How do you call the forces not lie on the same
plane?
A. component
47
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
B. composition of forces
C. non-coplanar
D. resolution
the distance between the center of oscillation
and the point of suspension is called:
A. fix axis
B. center of gravity
C. center of percussion
D. radius of oscillation
if the velocity is variable and regular/
constantly increasing the rate of change is
called:
A. acceleration
B. constant work
C. moment
D. motion
The kinematics chain in which one link is
considered fixed for the purpose of analysis but
motion is possible in other link:
A. belting
B. frame
C. mechanism
D. sprocket chain
All forces in the same plane are called
A. coplanar
B. couple
C. parallel
D. resultant
The_____ is one of the rigid members / bodies
joined together to form a kinematics chain.
A. coplanar
B. frame
C. link
D. machine
The resultant of a pair of equal forces but
opposite in direction is called _____.
A. concurrent
B. couple
C. non-concurrent
D. resultant
The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut
after heat treatment should have a hardness in
the range of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear
teeth hardness on the other hand.
Ideally/normally should be at ______ BHN.
A. 250/320
B. 350/380
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
C. 400/345
D. 340/350
As a rule the center to center distance between
sprockets should not be less than _____ times
the diameter of the bigger sprocket and not
less than 30 times the pitch or more than
about 50 times to pitch.
A. 1.5
B. 2
C. 2.5
D. 3
What is the carbon content range of SAE 4140
chrome-molly steel after treatment?
A. 0.30/0.45
B. 0.38/0.43
C. 0.38/0.45
D. 0.30/0.50
Gear are manufactured usually in the following
processes: milling, generating, shaving,
grinding and
A. blanking
B. dinking
C. heat treatment
D. molding
Flat belt that is too tight will induce strain on
the bearing and belt ______.
A. Life will be shortened
B. Result to uneconomical operation
C. Suffer/ shatter
D. Will be sheared/cut
The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile
test specimen divided by the specimen original
area is called:
A. charpy test
B. % elongation
C. Impact test
D. Izod test
SAE 51XXX belongs to the ______ steel
family.
A. carbon
B. chromium
C. manganese
D. nickel
Which of the following gasket material which
should avoid hot liquid/steam application?
A. Asbestos fiber
B. Nylon fiber
C. Rubberized
D. Wool
99. Which of the following that describes the same
material properties all cover/ direction and at
any particular point in a structural member?
A. heterogeneous
B. homogenous
C. isentropic
D. isotropic
100. Arc produced by two tungsten electrodes into
which jet hydrogen is directed.
A. Atomic hydrogen welding
B. Electro-beam welding
C. Hydrogen bomb
D. Hydrogen lancing
Elements 11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A white metal, almost as bright as silver and is
malleable and ductile and can be welded.
A. Nickel
B. Aluminu
C. White Iron
D. Lead
It is a silvery dull, soft metal and the second
lightest of all metals used in the industry.
A. Nickel
B. Aluminum
C. White Iron
D. Lead
The least among iron ores for it contains many
impurities, poor in iron contact and commonly
used in England.
A. Hematite
B. Magnetite
C. Limanite
D. Siderite
Which of the following is not considered to be
precious metal?
A. Silver
B. Gold
C. Platinum
D. Steel
It is an alloy of copper and zinc. It is
approximately 1/3 zinc and 2/3 copper.
A. Brass
B. Bronze
C. Muntz metal
D. silver
48
6.
It is a copper-tin alloy and is named either bell
metal or brown metal.
A. Brass
B. Bronze
C. Muntz metal
D. silver
7. It is a furnace that converts pig iron into steel
by oxidizing out the surplus carbon and using
oxygen by throwing raw iron into the furnace.
A. Open-heart furnace
B. Electric furnace
C. Cupola
D. Bessemer
8. The most commonly-used series in the bulk
production of bolts, screws, nuts and other
general applications in the coarse-thread series.
A. UNC
B. UNF
C. White iron
D. Lead
9. What is the actual torque ratio of gear set
divided by its gear ratio?
A. approach ratio
B. clearance
C. contact ratio
D. efficiency
10. Which of the following has low coefficient of
expansion, corrosion resistant, weak in
strength, and used for non-ferrous applications
as alloying elements?
A. Aluminum
B. Aluminum oxide
C. Copper oxide
D. Copper
11. Which of the following material(s) is
recommended for large sprocket of large speed
ratio and having firm engagement?
A. nickel-chromium steel
B. copper
C. cast iron
D. aluminum
12. In which of the following carrying capacity
where roller bearing is utilized better than ball
bearing?
A. heavy load
B. low load
C. high temperature load
D. reversing load
13. Which of the following materials having
thermal expansion of about 10 times higher
than those of materials and has more heat
generated during machining?
A. Aluminum
B. Asbestos
C. Plastic
D. PVC
14. To avoid scoring in the bearing surface and the
shaft on to contamination/ absorption of the
time dirt in the bearing during operation/
lubrication the bearing material to apply
should have good ____________properties
A. anti-scoring
B. corrosion resistance
C. embeddability
D. Conformability
15. What do impact test measure?
A. Compactness
B. Ductility
C. Plasticity
D. Toughness
16. Which of the following types of gear transmit
power at a certain angle?
A. Bevel
B. Helix
C. Herringbone
D. Spur
17. Which of the following gasket material is not
use for high temperature?
A. Asbestos
B. Plastic nylon
C. Rubberized
D. Wool
18. How do you call a plane perpendicular to the
gear axis?
A. Normal plane
B. Pitch plane
C. Plane of rotation
D. Radius of gyration
19. Which of the following is the specification of
molybdenum alloy?
A. SAE 3XXX
B.SAE 4XXX
C. SAE 5XXX
D. SAE 6XXX
20. Which of the following is abundant for ferrous
metals?
A. Sulfur
B. Phosphorous
C. Manganese
D. Carbon
21. What machine is used to flatten surface on a
vertical, horizontal or even angular plane?
A. Shaper machine
B. power saw
C. boring machine
D. drilling machine
22. All of these are classifications of iron ore;
except what?
A. magnetite
C. siderite
B. hematite
D. sulfurite
23. It refers to the internal resistance of a material
to being deformed and is measured in terms of
the applied load.
A. stress
C. ductility
B. strain
D. malleability
24. The property of a material which resists forces
acting to pull the material apart.
A .tensile strength C. bending strength
B. compressive strength D. torsional strength
25. The property of a material to resist loads that
are applied
A. magnetite
C. siderite
B. hematite
D. sulfurite
26. The property of a material to resist various
kinds of rapidly alternating stresses.
A. fatigue strength B.bending strength
C. compressive strength D. impact strength
27. The ability of a material to resist loads that are
applied suddenly and often at high velocity.
A. fatigue strength B. bending strength
C. compressive strength D. impact strength
28. The ability of a material to stretch, ben, or
twist w/out breaking or cracking.
A.Ductility
B. Malleability
C. Hardness
D. Compressibility
29. Which of the ff. is considered to be the father
of all machine tools?
A. Lathe Machine B.Boring Machine
C. Drilling Machine D. Milling Machine
30. It is ability of a material to resist the loads that
are applied suddenly and often at high velocity.
49
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
A. Fatigue strength B. Impact strength
C.Hardness
D.Shock strength
A steel of carbon range of 0.05to 0.03 percent
is considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel
B. High carbon steel
C. Medium carbon steel
D. Very high carbon steel
A steel of carbon range of 0.30 to 0.45 percent
a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel
B. High carbon steel
C. Medium carbon steel
D. Alloyed Steel
A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to 0.75 percent
a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel
B. High carbon steel
C. Medium carbon steel
D. Alloyed Steel
A steel of carbon range of 0.45 to 0.75 percent
a considered as what type of steel?
A. Low carbon steel
B. High carbon steel
C. Medium carbon steel
D. Very high carbon steel
Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will
tend to increase its strength w/out decreasing
its toughness or ductility and w/ its large
quantities the steel become tough but develop
high resistance to corrosion and shock?
A. chromium
B. manganese
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will
produce the greatest hardening effect like
carbon and at the same time reduces the
enlargement of its grain structure.
A. chromium
B. manganese
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel will
produce fine grain structure and promotes
greater toughness and ductility?
A. chromium
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
B. manganese
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
Which of the ff. alloying elements of steel w/c
makes it extremely hard and resistance to
_w/out making it brittle?
A. chromium
B. manganese
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
It is the elements used mostly in steels
designed for metal cutting tools. The steels
added by this element are tough, hard and very
resistant to wear.
A. chromium
B. tungsten
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
It is the element whose chief function is to
strengthen the ferrite. It is used w/ tungsten to
develop red hardness or the ability to remain
hard when red hot.
A .chromium
B. cobalt
C. molybdenum
D. nickel
It also known as the strain drawing. It is the
process whereby certain degree of hardness is
sacrificed in order to reduce brittleness and
increase the toughness of steel tool.
A. Tempering
B. Normalizing
C. Annealing
D. Quenching
It is the heat treatment of steel that produces
extremely hard surface. The process consists of
exposing the steel to hot ammonia gas for
some hours.
A. Nitriding
B. Cyaniding
C. Carburizing
D. Ammonia bath
How do you call the metals that contain large
amount of carbon content?
A. ferrous metal
B. non ferrous metal
C. base metal
D. precious metal
44. All these are the basic kinds of cast iron ,
Except:
A. gray iron
B. malleable iron
C. white iron
D. red iron
45. Which of the ff. are the basic kinds of cast iron
is harder and more difficult to machine
because it contains carbon in carbide state?
A. gray iron
B. malleable iron
C. white iron
D. wrought iron
46. How do you call metals that have no carbon
content?
A. ferrous metal
B. malleable iron
C. non ferrous metal
D. white iron
47. Which of the ff. is the type of cast iron that
can stand more shock and blow than regular
cast iron?
A. nodular iron
B. malleable iron
C. wrought iron
D. gray iron
48. It is a metal of almost pure iron, ductile and
very tough. It can be hammered and shaped at
high temperature. It has a fibrous structure
because the presence of slag.
A. nodular iron
B. malleable iron
C. wrought iron
D. gray iron
49. A type of ferrous metal w/c is formed by
remelting pig iron and scrap iron in a cupola
furnace. It is brittle and usually gray in color,
and commonly used in making casting.
A. cast iron
B. malleable iron
C. wrought iron
D. gray iron
50. A classification of iron ore w/c contains 70%
iron when pure and 50% iron when mined.
A. Hematite
B. Magnetite
50
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
C. Limanite
D. Siderite
.A classification of iron ore w/c contains
72.5% iron when pure and the remaining
percentages are impurities.
A. Hematite
B. Magnetite
C. Limanite
D. Siderite
Which of the ff. iron ores also known as
“brown hematite” or ferric oxide a yellowish
brown powder?
A. Hematite
B. Magnetite
C. Limanite
D. Siderite
Which of the ff. represents manganese steel?
A .13XX
B.40XX
C.50XX
D.10XX
It is another kind of furnace where cast iron is
remelted to make them into cast iron. The
furnace is charges w/ layers of coke and pig
iron plus scrap iron.
A. Open-hearth furnace
B. electric furnace
C. Cupola
D. Bessemer
A furnace w/c consists of blowing a stream of
air through a molten mass of iron pig. A
stream of air is turned on through the wind
box and enters the converter at the bottom.
Manganese, carbon and other elements of
varying amounts are added to produce steel
w/c is then poured and solidifies.
A. Open-hearth furnace
B. electric furnace
C. Cupola
D. Bessemer
A furnace similar to open hearth. This
principal difference is the method of heating
the charged .It is used in producing quality of
steels because melting and refining is closely
controlled.
A. Open-hearth furnace
B. electric furnace
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
C. Cupola
D. Bessemer
It is the process of reheating or drawing of
metal that has been hardened to a
comparatively low temperature in order to
relieve the hardening strain and increase the
toughness of the steel.
A. Tempering
B. Annealing
C. Cyaniding
D. Normalizing
Case hardening is the process of hardening the
outer surface of the metal and the inner parts
are soft .What percentage of carbon content
that this type of hardening is allowed.
A.15% and above
B.10 to 20% only
C. less than 5% only
D. Any of the ff.
Steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1018 and
contains 0.10% to 0.30% carbon.
A. Low carbon steel
B. Medium carbon steel
C. High carbon steel
D. Very high carbon steel
A steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1035 when not
rolled and contains 0.30% to 0.60% carbon.
A. Low carbon steel
B. Medium carbon steel
C. High carbon steel
D. Very high carbon steel
A steel numbered SAE-AISI, C1035 when not
rolled and contains 0.60% to 1.30% carbon
and used when extra hardness is required.
A. Low carbon steel
B. Medium carbon steel
C. High carbon steel
D. Very high carbon steel
Which of the ff. alloying elements used in
making high speed steel.
A .Molybdenum
B. nickel
C. manganese
D. Silicon
Which of the ff. alloying elements used in
springs to make more reliant.
A Silicon
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
B. Tungsten
C. hardness and resistance
D. Nickel
It refers to that property in steel w/c resist
indention or penetration .It is usually
expressed in forms of the area of an indention
made by a special ball under standard load, or
the depth of a special indenter.
A. Hardness
B. Ductility
C. Malleability
D. wears resistance
The distance from the point on a screw thread
to a corresponding point on a adjacent thread,
measured parallel to the axis.
A. Pitch
B. lead
C. thread
D. crest
The top surface joining the two sides of a
thread.
A. pitch
B. crest
C. lead
D. space
The amount of variation permitted in the size
of a part is the difference between the limits of
maximum and the minimum dimensions of a
given part. It may be expressed at plus, minus,
or as both plus and minus.
A. tolerance
B. limits
C. variation
D. clearance
The instrument used to reshape a grinding
wheel that is grooved or out of round is called
a:
A. wheel aligner
B. wheel emery
C. wheel dresser
D. wheel cutter
The instrument used to remove old packing
from cacking glands and stuffing boxes are
called:
A. packing tools
B. gland box cleaner
C. packing bits
51
D. packing screw
70. When working on bearings and checking for
high spots, it is customary to apply what?
A. white lead
B. dykem blue
C. red lead
D. prussian blue
71. If you wanted to check the face of a pump slide
valve or other flat-faced valve ,you could check
for trueness on a:
A. flat board
B. piece of glass
C. surface plate
D. bearing plate
72. Which of the ff. is used to keep a metal clean
while soldering?
A. flax
B. flux
C. torch
D. insulated
73. Before splicing electric wires, they should be:
A. tinned
B. soldered
C. cleaned and tinned
D. insulate
74. To check the speed of a motor or other rotary
machine one would use a:
A. galvanometer
B. tachometer
C. micrometer
D. Geiger counter
75. Before drilling a hole in a piece of metal , it
should be:
A. marked w/ chalk
B. scribed
C. center punch
D. protracted
76. A tap or die marked ¼-20 indicates:
A.1/4”2 radius-20 cm. long
B.1/4” diameter-20 threads per in
C.1/4” radian -20 threads per in
D.1/42 turn-20 times
77. After a piece of pipe has been cut, the hole is
clean out w/ a:
A. piper reamer
B. pipe taper
C. pipe cleaner
D. hole cleaner
78. What do you call the tool(s) used for cutting
threads?
A. pipe cutter
B. pipe threader
C. pipe stock’ and die`
D. pipe ratchet cutter
79. How do you call the tool used when working
large size of pipe?
A .chain pipe wrench
B. chain holder
C. chains tongs
D.A or B
80. What tool is used when preparing to put
fittings on copper tubing?
A. tube spreader
B. tube retarder
C. flaring tool
D. tube countersink
81. Which of the ff. is not a standard thread form?
A. square
B. double flute
C. American national D.60 deg. sharp V
82. How do you call the tool used to cut the
threads in a hole?
A .top
B.bit
C.tap
D. reamer
83. Hand taps are provided in sets of three. Which
of the ff. set of three?
A. taper, plug, and end
B. taper, plug and bottom
C. short, taper and bottom
D. short, medium and long
84. Which of the ff. taps should be used to start a
thread?
A. plug
B. bottom
C. short
D. taper
85. Which of the ff. size of the drill is used in
preparing to tap a hole?
A. equal to the size of the tap
B. larger than the size of the tap
C. smaller than the size of the tap
D. none of the above
86. Pipe taps are:
A. the same size from end to end
B. tapered
C. not fluted
D. not hardened
87. When preparing to tap a hole pipe fitting the
size of the drill will be:
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
A. larger than the tap size
B. smaller than the tap size
C. equal to the size of the tap
D. none of the above
Which of the ff. does not have to be lubricated
when drilling?
A. steel
B. monel
C. brass
D. tool steel
How do you call the tool used when cutting a
hole in the side of a round piece of metal?
A. vise
B.”V” block
C.jaw holder
D. chuck
When measuring a drill for size measure across
the:
A. margin
B. shank
C. flutes
D. porx
IN threaded members, w/c of the ff. defines
N.C?
A. neutral cut
B. national cut
C. national course
D. not center
In threaded members, w/c of the ff. represents
N.F?
A. national file
B. neutral file
C. National fine
D. not found
What tool used in precision work to smooth or
enlarge_______
A. round out
B. reamer
C. drift pin
D. protractor
Which of the ff. chisels would be used for
cutting a groove?
A. diamond –point chisel
B. round nose chisel
C. cold chisel
D. hot chisel
Which of the ff. is not a cut of file?
52
A. smooth
B. half-round
C. Second cut
D. bastard
96. How do you call the tool used for cleaning
files?
A. files cleaner
B. file oilstone
C. file card
D. scraper
97. Which of the ff. is the smallest size drill?
A. #80
B. #1
C. #60
D. #0
98. Which of the ff. is the largest size drill?
A. A
B.Z
C.X
D.XX
99. The size of a drill is stamped on the:
A. point
B. margin
C. shank
D. flute
100. A. operator must wear goggles
B. the surface to be babbitted must be free of
moisture
C. the surface to be babbitted must be clean
D. all of the above
ELEMENTS 12
1.
2.
3.
4.
Which of the following safety precautions
should be followed when renewing a
flange gasket?
A. drain the line thoroughly
B. tie down isolation valves
C. isolate the section to be worked on
D. all of these
In installing a new flange gasket, which of
the following must be done first?
A. Flange faces are painted
B. Flange faces are absolutely clean
C. Isolating valves are open
D. Old gasket is in place
Which of the following is correct about
standard wire gage?
A. #10 is larger than #5
B. #1 is smaller than #2
C. #25 is smaller than #20
D. #30 is larger than #25
Which of the following tools would be
most useful when taking leads on
bearings?
A. Dividers
B. Micrometer
C. Outside calipers
D. Center gage
5. What is the wrench size for a ¾” nut?
A. 1-1/4”
B. ¾”
C. 1- 1/2”
D. 10/24”
6. Which of the following would cause hot
bearings?
A. Improper oil
B. Improper alignment
C. Dirt in oil
D. All of the above
7. What is the approximate melting point of
Babbitt?
A. 1000 deg. F
B. 750 deg. F
C. 650 deg. F
D. 500 deg. F
8. Which of the following is correct in
pouring Babbitt?
A. It can be done in several pouring
B. Must be poured all at one time
C. Can be done at intervals
D. Must be done in cool place
9. Which of the following groups of pipe
sizes is correct?
A. ¼, 1/2, ¾, 7/8, 1
B. ¼, 3/8, ½, ¾, 1
C. ¼, 3/8, ½, 5/8, ¾, 1
D. ¼, ½, 5/8, ¾, 1
10. Which of the following where pipe
wrench (Stillson) was designed to be used?
a. Hexagonal objects
b. Square objects
c. Round objects
d. Flat objects
11. In which of the following where pipe is
measured?
a. Inside diameter
b. Thickness of wall
c. Outside diameter
d. Wire gage
12. In which of the following where tubing is
measured by:
a. Inside diameter
b. Thickness of wall
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
c. Outside diameter
d. Wire gage
How do you call the tool used to cut
threads on pipe?
a. Pipe tool
b. Pipe vise
c. Pipe stock
d. Pipe cutter
How do you call the pipe fitting which
has two openings and provides a turn of
90 degrees?
a. An elbow
b. A coupling
c. A tee
d. A union
In which of the following where plug cock
offers?
a. More resistance to flow than a
globe valve
b. The same resistance to flow as a
globe valve
c. Less resistance to flow than a
globe valve
d. The same resistance to flow as
an angle valve
What is the common flux to be used
when soldering brass, copper or tin?
a. Tallow
b. Borax
c. Rosin
d. Sal ammoniac
In one turn of the screw in a micrometer,
it moves the spindle by what amount?
a. 0.25”
b. 0.025”
c. 0.205”
d. 0.110”
What is the process used to retard
corrosion on iron pipe?
a. Soldering
b. Tempering
c. Annealing
d. Galvanizing
On XX heavy pipe the extra metal is
added to which of the following?
a. Outside
b. Inside
53
c.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Half on the inside, half on the
outside
d. Three quarters in the outside,
one quarter on the inside
Which is very necessary when installing
packing in a packing box?
a. Leave one old turn at the
bottom of the packing box
b. Remove one turn and install
one new turn of packing
c. Leave sufficient and clearance
on each turn to allow for
expansion
d. Place end cuts directly in line
with each other
A square foot of steel plate 1/8” thick
weighs 5 pounds. The weight of a steel
plate 10 feet long and 4 feet wide would
be how much?
a. 200 lbs
b. 20 lbs
c. 2000 lbs
d. 20,000 lbs
Cast iron weighs 640 pounds per cubic
foot. How much is the weight of cast iron
block 14”x12”x18”?
a. 1200 lbs
b. 1120 lbs
c. 1000 lbs
d. 1088 lbs
A tank 28” in diameter and 14’ high is
filled with water. The total pressure on
the bottom of the tank is:
a. 3741 lbs
b. 2573 lbs
c. 4257 lbs
d. 3000 lbs
A double-bottom tank is 18’ wide, 24’
long and 4’ deep. It is filled with fresh
water. The total capacity in tons is:
a. 50
b. 55
c. 48
d. 45
Sheet metal of #18 gage is heavier than:
a. 12 gage
b. 22 gage
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
c. 14 gage
d. 16 gage
What is the use of shims?
a. Separate fresh and salt-water
lines
b. Replace fuses
c. Adjust cylinder liners
d. Adjust bearing clearances
How do you call the process used to
retard corrosion (rust) on iron pipe and
fitting?
a. Tinning
b. Galvanizing
c. Soldering
d. Sulphurizing
In pipe fittings the term “offset” refers to
what?
a. A cut-off running at right angles
to the original piping
b. Two pipes running parallel to
each other
c. A bend in the pipe
d. Two sizes of pipe in the same
run
In machine shop, if the lips of the drill
are of different lengths then which of the
following will likely happen?
a. The drill will not cut
b. The hole will be larger than
the drill
c. The hole will be smaller than
the drill
d. None of these will happen
Which of the following statement(s) is
correct for the “brazed joint”/
a. Stronger than a soldered joint
b. Weaker than a soldered joint
c. The same strength as a soldered
joint
d. Three times as strong as a
soldered joint
Brazing requires which of the following/
a. Hot solder
b. More heat
c. Soft solder
d. A and B
32. What is/are the primary reason(s) why
lead is used in solder?
a. It has a high melting
b. It is cheap
c. It has a low melting
d. B and C
33. What is the name of the taper shank used
on drills?
a. Miller
b. Starrett
c. Morse
d. Stanley
34. What is the effect if the melting point of
solder is very high?
a. Weaker the solder joint
b. Stronger the solder joint
c. Softer the solder joint
d. Harder the solder joint
35. Which of the following will likely happen
if the angle on a drill is less than 59 deg.?
a. The drill will make a larger hole
b. The drill will make a smaller
hole
c. The hole will take longer to
drill and more power is
required to drive the drill
d. The drill will not center
properly
36. What is/are the reason(s) of soda being
added to water and used for cooling
instead of water?
a. It reduces the amount of heat
generated
b. It improves the finish
c. It overcomes rusting
d. All of these
37. What will likely happen if the drill’s speed
is too high?
a. Cut faster
b. Cut slower
c. Lose its temper
d. Not cut
38. The lip clearance of a drill should be
approximately how many degrees?
a. 20 deg. – 25 deg.
b. 12 deg. – 15 deg.
c. 5 deg. – 10 deg.
54
d. 15 deg. – 20 deg.
39. If the cutting edges of a drill are cut at
different angles:
a. The drill will not cut
b. The hole will be larger than
the drill
c. The hole will be smaller than
the drill
d. None of the above
40. What is the correct cutting angle on a
drill for ordinary work?
a. 45 deg.
b. 59 deg.
c. 50 deg.
d. 65 deg.
41. A piece of stock 8” long is 4” diameter on
one end and 1” diameter on the other
end. The taper per foot is:
a. 4”
b. 4 – ¼”
c. 4 – ½”
d. 4 – 1/16”
42. A piece of stock 8” long is 3” diameter at
one end and 1 – ½” diameter at other
end. The taper per inch is:
a. ½”
b. 3/16”
c. ¾”
d. 5/16”
43. A piece if stock 6” long is 2” diameter at
one end and is cut with a taper of ½” to
the foot. The diameter of the smaller end
will be:
a. 1 – ½”
b. 1 – ¼”
c. 1 – ¾”
44. If a piston ring is to be made 1/64” larger
in diameter per inch diameter of the
cylinder which it is to fit , the required
diameter of the piston ring to fit an 8”
cylinder will be:
a. 8 – ¼”
b. 8 – 3/16”
c. 8 – 1/8”
d. 8 – 5/32”
45. What is the reason why drill “squeal’s”
when cutting?
46.
47.
48.
49.
a. Drill being ground improperly
b. Insufficient lubrication
c. Drill being too hot
d. Any of the above
In what operation where “center drilling”
is to be found?
a. Drilling center in an oddshaped piece of metal
b. Drilling and countersinking
with one tool
c. Centering with one tool and
drilling with another
d. Drilling a center in a piece of
stock in a drill press
Which of the following defines “pitch” in
threads?
a. A distance of the full length of
the thread
b. The distance from a point on
one thread to a corresponding
point on the next thread
measured parallel to the axis
c. The distance from the top of
one thread to the bottom of the
next thread
d. The distance from the bottom
of a head on a bolt to the first
thread
A tool bit for cutting an American
National thread should be ground with
what angle?
a. 45˚
b. 60˚
c. 90˚
d. 30˚
An approximate safe rule for cutting new
pistons for steam pumps is to allow:
a. 0.002” between piston and
cylinder for each inch diameter
of piston
b. 0.001” between piston and
cylinder for each inch
diameter of piston
c. 0.010” between piston and
cylinder for each inch diameter
of piston
d.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
0.0001” between piston and
cylinder for each inch diameter
of piston
An approximate safe rule for cutting new
piston rings for steam pumps is to make
the ring:
a. 1/32” larger in diameter per
inch diameter of cylinder
b. 1/16” larger in diameter than
that of the cylinder
c. 1/16” larger in diameter per
inch diameter of cylinder
d. 0.005” larger in diameter per
inch diameter of cylinder
What is the approximate gap clearance for
new piston rings for steam pumps?
a. 0.003” for each inch of
diameter of cylinder
b. 0.001” for each inch of
diameter of cylinder
c. 0.010” for each inch of
diameter of cylinder
d. 0.050” for each inch of
diameter of cylinder
The familiar “3/8 – 16” in machine shop
means what?
a. 6 pieces, 3/8” long
b. Gear with 16 teeth and a 3/8”
arbor hole
c. 3/8” square , 16” lone
d. 3/8” diameter, 16 threads per
inch
The work should be held ______, when
using a drill press.
a. The hand
b. A vise or clamp
c. A gloved hand
d. Pliers
What is/are the reason/s why tapered
shanks are used on large drill presses?
a. The drill can be centered more
easily
b. The drill can be easily forced
out of a sleeve with a drift
c. The shank will not turn when
cutting
55
d.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
The shank can be reground
when worn
Which of the following is not a common
drill shank?
a. Straight
b. Fluted
c. Taper
d. Bit
What is the usual cutting angle on a drill
for drilling mild steel?
a. 39 deg.
b. 59 deg.
c. 49 deg.
d. 69 deg.
When installing a new grinding wheel,
always use:
a. Blotting paper gaskets on each
side of the wheel
b. Copper gasket on each side of
the wheel
c. Only the steel washers provided
with the machine
d. None of the above
What is the other term for the operation
of “truing” a grinding wheel?
a. Centering
b. Sizing
c. Dressing
d. Rounding
What tool is used to check external pipe
threads?
a. Plug gage
b. Pitch gage
c. Thread gage
d. Ring gage
What tool is used to check internal pipe
threads?
a. Plug gage
b. Pitch gage
c. Thread gage
d. Ring gage
Which of the following is used to cut
gears?
a. Gear cutter
b. Gear center
c. Gear hob
d. Gear threader
62. If you use dry grinding wheel for
sharpening tool bits, dip the end of the
bit in water frequently to prevent:
a. Burning your fingers
b. Annealing the cutting edge of
the bit
c. Hardening of the tip
d. The tip from crystallizing
63. A piece of tool steel held against an emery
wheel will give off:
a. White sparks with stars on the
ends
b. Yellow sparks
c. No sparks
d. Green sparks
64. Grinding wheels have a range of soft to
hard abrasive materials depending on the
use. Most manufacturers letter their
wheels from A to Z. Which of the
following marks represents the hardest?
a. E
b. Z
c. A
d. E1
65. What is the main difference between a
planer and a shaper?
a. The planer has an offset table
and the shaper has a horizontal
table
b. The shaper has a rotting table
and the planer has a horizontal
table
c. The table of a planer has a
reciprocating motion past the
tool head while the table of the
shaper is stationary and the
tool head has a reciprocating
motion
d. One is larger than the other
66. One of the factors involved in the choice
of grinding wheel is:
a. The kind of material to be
ground
b. The amount of stock to be
removed
c. The kind of finish required
d. All of the above
67. The “tang” of a file is the part that:
a. Does the cutting
b. Has no teeth
c. Fits into the handle
d. Is opposite the handle
68. In general, files are divided into two
classes called:
a. Single-cut and double-cut
b. Rough and smooth
c. Fine and coarse
d. Heel and sizes
69. The length of a file is measured from:
a. End to end
b. Point to end
c. Point to heel
d. Heel to end
70. Which of the following where “pillar”
files are used?
a. Filling slots
b. Filing against a shoulder
c. Filing keyways
d. Any of the above
71. Which of the following will usually
happen to the blade of flexible hacksaw
applied by too much pressure?
a. Snap easily
b. Buckle or run out of line
c. Cut too fast
d. Cut on a slant
72. Which of the following best defines
soldering?
a. It is holding two metals
together by heating
b. It is joining two metals by a
third soft metal that is applied
in molten state
c. It is holding two different kind
of metals together by heating
d. It is joining two metals together
by heating
73. What is the use of flux in soldering?
a. Keep the solder from running
off the metal
b. Keep the metal from getting too
hot
56
c.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
Keep the tip of the soldering
iron clean
d. Remove and prevent oxidation
of the metals
A surface should be prepared for
soldering by:
a. Filing the surface
b. Acid-cleaning the surface
c. Scraping the surface
d. Any of the above
What is (are) the hand tool(s) used for
cutting threads on round stocks?
a. Stock and die
b. Stock
c. Die wrench
d. Stock cutter
A tapered piece of stock is 2” long, 1-1/8”
diameter at one end and ¾” diameter at
the other end. The taper per foot is:
a. 2”
b. 2 – ¼”
c. 2 – ½”
d. 2 – 1/16”
Which of the following best defines
sweating?
a. Soldering two different kinds of
metal together
b. Separating two pieces of metal
that have been soldered
together
c. Tinning two surfaces,
applying, flux between them,
holding the two together and
heating
d. None of the above
If muriatic acid is used as a flux, the
soldered area must be cleaned thoroughly
afterwards to prevent:
a. Anyone touching it from
getting burned
b. Remaining acid from eating
the metal
c. The acid from evaporating and
the solder disintegrating
d. None of the above
Solder will not unite with a metal surface
that has:
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
a. Grease on it
b. Oxidation on it
c. Dirt on it
d. Any of the above
Prepared soldered paste flux is most
popular if you did not have any, you
could use:
a. Hydrochloric acid
b. Nitric acid
c. Sulfuric acid
d. Any of the above
Hard solder is made of which of the
following?
a. Copper and zinc
b. Tin and copper
c. Tin and zinc
d. Tin and lead
Which of the following is the flux usually
used for hard soldering?
a. Rosin
b. Barium
c. Borax
d. Alum
In which of the following where straight
muriatic acid is often used as a flux?
a. Galvanized iron
b. Sheet steel
c. Cast iron
d. Any of the above
For aluminum, special solders are being
used and will usually require which of the
following?
a. More heat
b. The same heat as copper wire
c. Less heat
d. The same heat as sheet metal
Copper is annealed by heating to a cherry
red color and _____.
a. Dousing in cold water
b. Dousing in oil
c. Cooling slowly in air
d. Dousing in hot water
Soft solder is made of which of the
following?
a. Copper and zinc
b. Tin and copper
c. Tin and lead
d. Tin and zinc
87. A piece of mild steel held against an
emery wheel will give off ____.
a. Bright shiny sparks
b. No sparks
c. Light straw-colored sparks
d. Green sparks
88. A gear wheel making 156 RPM has 56
teeth. It drives another gear at 91 RPM.
The number of teeth on the second gear
is:
a. 65
b. 50
c. 90
d. 96
89. Tool steel can be hardened by which of
the following?
a. Heating red hot and plunging
into water
b. Heating red hot and cooling in
a blast of air
c. Heating red hot and plunging
into linseed or cottonseed oil
d. Any of the above, depending
on type and use
90. At what temperature where soft solder
approximately melts?
a. 250 deg.
b. 450 deg.
c. 350 deg.
d. 550 deg.
91. What material where a scriber is made
from?
a. Carbon steel
b. Tool steel
c. Cold-rolled steel
d. Hot-rolled steel
92. What should be done first before
applying layout blue on a piece of metal?
a. Roughened
b. Clean
c. Hot
d. cold
93. How many flutes does a drill bit have?
a. 4 flutes
b. 2 flutes
c. 3 flutes
57
d. No flutes
94. Where is the correction position of the
tool bit when facing off a piece of
material in the lathe chuck?
a. Above center
b. Below center
c. At the center
d. Off center
95. Standard vise has ______ jaws?
a. Soft
b. hard
c. semi-hard
d. semi-soft
96. In machining, which of the following
could be the reason if tool bit burns?
a. Speed is too slow
b. Material is too hard
c. Speed is too fast
d. Material cannot be cut
97. Which of the following where the lathe
compound is used?
a. Angle cutting
b. Facing
c. Grooving
d. Any of the above
98. When the dial on the cross-feed is turned
0.010”, how much is removed from the
diameter of the stock being cut?
a. 0.010”
b. 0.005”
c. 0.020”
d. 0.015”
99. Which of the following describes a
flexible back hacksaw blade?
a. Only the teeth hardened
b. A movable back
c. Flexible ends
d. Only the back hardened
100. The flexible type hacksaw blade is best suited for
which of the following materials?
A. Channel iron
B. Aluminum
C. Tubing
D. Any of the above
Elements 13
1. Hacksaw blades are made of what materials?
A. tool steel
B. tungsten alloy steel
C. high-speed steel
D. any of the above
2. A hacksaw blade with 24 TPI is best suitable for
cutting which of the following materials?
A. tubing
B. brass and copper
C. sheet metal over 18 gage
D. any of the above
3. Which of the following is a "must"for all hard hacksaw
blades?
A. It has a hard back and flexible teeth
B. It has a flexible back and hard teeth
C. It has the entire blade hardened
D. It will only fit a solid frame hacksaw
4. How many positions can a hacksaw blade be placed in
a frame?
A. Two positions
B. One position
C. Four position
D. Three position
5. Files are divided into two general classes. How are
these classified?
A. Rough and smooth
B. Single-cut and double-cut
C. Large and small
D. Glat shapes and round shapes
6. The term "set" of a saw best defines what?
A. To set properly in the frame
B. Alternate teeth are turned slightly to left and
right to make cutting slot slightly wider than
the thickness of the blade
C. The teeth have been case-hardened for better
cutting
D. The teeth are set evenly apart
7. All hard hacksaw blades is best suited for work on
which of the following?
A. Brass
B. Cast iron
C. Tool steel
D. Any of the above
8. Which of the following is the best instrument for
measuring thousandths of an inch?
a. Caliper
b. Micrometer
c. Tachometer
d. Pyrometer
9. A hacksaw blade with 34 teeth per inch should be
used for cutting which of the following materials?
a. Brass
b. Heavy stock
c. Cast iron
d. Thin wall tubing
10. Where is the hacksaw blade should be placed in the?
a. The teeth pointing forward
b. The teeth pointing backward
c. One end looser than the other end
d. The teeth facing in any direction
11. Which of the following is the usual procedure when
cutting a long thin piece of metal?
a. Turn the blade upside down in the frame
b. Turn the blade at right angles to the frame
c. Use a blade with fewer teeth per inch
d. Set the blade in the frame with the teeth
facing toward you
12. A hacksaw blade with 18 teeth per inch is best suited
for cutting what materials?
a. Solid stock
b. Aluminum
c. Cast iron
d. Any of the above
13. What is the used of coolant in the power hacksaw
when cutting materials?
a. Absorb the heat of friction
b. Prevent the blade from over heating
c. Prevent the blade from losing its temper
d. All of the above
14. What is the used for finishing a piece of work to size
with a file?
a. Double-cut-fine tooth file
b. Mill file
c. Single-cut fine tooth file
d. Crossing file
15. The process of finishing off a piece of metal with a
real smooth finish.
a. Draw - filing
b. Mill-filing
c. Side-filing
d. Flat-filing
16. How do you call a small piece of metal clogged
between the teeth on the file?
a. Clogs
b. Pins
c. Flats
58
d. Bumps
17. Which of the following is described as the "safe edge"
of tge file?
a. The end opposite the handle
b. The edge with no teeth
c. The one with the handle
d. None of the above
18. The best procedure when filing a piece of metal in a
lathe is to take:
a. Short even strokes
b. Long fast strokes
c. Long slow strokes
d. Short fast strokes
19. Which of the following information is necessary
when ordering a file?
a. Size (length)
b. Type of teeth
c. Shape
d. All of the above
20. Which of the following is the best file to be used
when finishing sharp corners or slots and grooves?
a. Mill file
b. Knife file
c. Square
d. Jeweler's file
21. How is "eleven-sixteenths" of an inch expressed in
decimal?
a. 0.6785
b. 0.6875
c. 0.7685
d. 0.6578
22. What is the approximate distance of the marking on
a micrometer barrel?
a. 0.025" apart
b. 0.0025" apart
c. 0.250" apart
d. 2.50" apart
23. Which of the following is the effect if the lathe is put
into back gear?
a. Go backward of the same speed
b. Faster
c. Slower
d. At a lower speed backward
24. The work should be held with _______ when using a
drill press?
a. The hand
b. A vise or clamp
c. A pair of pliers
d. Gloves on
25. What is normally used in drilling a hole in a piece of
work held in a lathe chuck?
a. Compound rest
b. Tailstock and drill chuck
c. Cross-feed
d. Headstock
26. Copper is annealed by heating to a cherry red color
and:
a. Dousing in cold water
b. Dousing in oil
c. Cooling slowly in air
d. Dousing in hot water
27. What is the main purpose of "annealing" a metal?
a. To make the metal harder
b. To make the metal softer
c. To make the metal harder medium-hard
d. To make the metal harder shiny
28. Te purpose of "tempering” is to make a metal what?
a. Harder
b. Less brittle
c. Softer
d. More brittle
29. What is the minimum diameter of a piece of round
stock necessary to make a square key 3/4 on a side?
a. 1.5"
b. 1.0"
c. 1.06"
d. 0.75"
30. A scriber is made from what materials?
a. Carbon steel
b. Tool steel
c. Cold-rolled steel
d. Hot-rolled steel
31. Before applying layout blue on a piece of metal, it
must be:
a. Roughened
b. Cleaned
c. Heated
d. Cold
32. A drill bit has how many flutes?
a. 4 flutes
b. 2 flutes
c. 3 flutes
d. No flutes
33. Te alignment of coupling faces can be checked by
what process?
a. Inserting an inside micrometer
b. Inserting a thermocouple
c. Inserting a feeler gage between the coupling
faces at various points around the circumference
d. rotating and measuring to nearest
permanent fitting
34. A piece of cast iron held against emery wheel will gas
off what?
a. Dull yellow sparks
b. Red sparks
c. Bright shiny sparks
d. No sparks
35. When cutting materials in a lathe, the softer the
materials being cut, the tool bit should have:
a. More top rake
b. Double top rake
c. Less top rake
d. Any of the above
36. After grinding a tool bit, the cutting should be:
a. Case-hardened
b. Stoned with an oilstone
c. Rubbed with emery cloth
d. Rubbed with crocus cloth
37. When turning a piece of round metal in a lathe, the
front clearance should be smaller for:
a. Large-diameter cutting
b. Cutting angles
c. Small-diameter cutting
d. None of the above
38. When cutting the materials in a lathe, the harder the
materials being cut, the tool bit should be:
a. More side rake
b. More top rake
c. Less side rake
d. No side rake
39. What is the primary purpose of knurling?
a. Smooth material
b. Roughen material
c. Polish material
d. Sharpen material
40. What do you call the process of removing the sharp
edges from a piece of stock?
a. Knurling
b. Planning
c. Chamfering
59
d. Turning
41. At what speed that carbon steel drill should be
operated?
a. Speed greater than that when using a high
speed drill
b. Speed less than that when using a high
speed drill
c. The same speed as that when using a high
speed drill
d. None of the above
42. A specific method of zinc galvanizing in which parts
are tumbled in zinc dust at high temperatures.
a. Sheradizing
b. Super finishing
c. Polishing
d. Pickling
43. Abrasion of parts against wheels or belts coated with
polishing compounds.
a. Sheradizing
b. Super finishing
c. Polishing
d. Pickling
44. A super fibe grinding operation used to expose no
fragmented, crystalline base metal.
a. Sheradizing
b. Super finishing
c. Polishing
d. Pickling
45. The process in which the metalis dipped in dilute
acid solutions to remove dirt grease and oxides.
a. Sheradizing
b. Super finishing
c. Polishing
d. Pickling
46. A hot-dip or electroplate application of tin to steel.
a. Tin-plating
b. Metal spraying
c. Organic finishes
d. Lapping
47. A fine grinding operation used to obtain exact fit and
dimensional accuracy.
a. Tin-plating
b. Metal spraying
c. Organic finishes
d. Lapping
48. The covering of surfaces with an organic film of paint
enamel or lacquer.
a. Tin-plating
b. Metal spraying
c. Organic finishes
d. Lapping
49. The spraying of molten metal onto product. Methods
include metalizing,metal powder spraying and plasma
frame spraying.
a. Tin-plating
b. Metal spraying
c. Organic finishes
d. Lapping
50. Application of a thin phosphate on steel to improve
corrosion resistance.
a. Parkerizing
b. Honing
c. Hand surfacing
d. Galvanizing
51. This process is known as bonderizing when used as a
partner for paints.
a. Parkerizing
b. Honing
c. Hand surfacing
d. Galvanizing
52. The grinding operation using stones moving in a
reciprocating pattern. Leaves a characteristic cross-hatch
pattern
a. Parkerizing
b. Honing
c. Hand surfacing
d. Galvanizing
53. The creation (by sprayng,plating, fusion welding, or
heat treatment) of a hard metal surface in a softer
product.
a. Parkerizing
b. Honing
c. Hand surfacing
d. Galvanizing
54. A zinc coating applied to low carbon steel to improve
corrosion resistance. The coating can be applied in a file
dip bath, by electroplating or by dry tumbling
(sheradizing)
a. Parkerizing
b. Honing
c. Hand surfacing
d. Galvanizing
55. The electro-deposition of a coating onto the
workplace. Electrical current is used to drive ions in
solution to the part. The workpiece is the cathode in the
electrical circuit.
a. Electroplating
b. Calorizing
c. Burnishing
d. Buffing
56. The diffusing of aluminum into a steel
surface,producing an aluminum oxide that protects the
steel from high-temperature corrosion
a. Electroplating
b. Calorizing
c. Burnishing
d. Buffing
57. How do you call the process of fine grinding it
peering operation designed to leave a "characteristic
pattern on the surface of the workplace"?
a. Electroplating
b. Calorizing
c. Burnishing
d. Buffing
58. A fine finishing operation, similar to polishing, using
a very fine polishing compound.
a. Electroplating
b. Calorizing
c. Burnishing
d. Buffing
59. Rotating parts in a barrel filled with an abrasive or
non abrasive medium. Widely used to remove burrs,
flash, scale, and oxides
a. Abrasive cleaning
b. Calorizing
c. Barrel finishing
d. Anodizing
60. An electroplating - acid bath oxidation process for
aluminum and magnesium. The workplace is the anode
in the electrical circuit.
a. Abrasive cleaning
b. Tumbling
c. Barrel finishing
d. Anodizing
61. Shooting sand (i.e sand blasting), steel grit, or steel
shot against work pieces to remove casting sand, scale
and oxidation.
a. Abrasive cleaning
b. Tumbling
c. Barrel finishing
d. Anodizing
60
62. What is the other term for barrel finishing?
a. Abrasive cleaning
b. Tumbling
c. Barrel finishing
d. Anodizing
63. Brittle materials produce discrete fragments known as
a. A chip breaker grooves
b. Discontinuous chips
c. Non-segmented chips
d. Type-two chips
64. Ductile materials form long helix-coiled string chips
known as:
a. Continuous chips
b. Discontinuous chips
c. Segmented chips
d. Type-one chips
65. Often ground in the cutting tool face to cause long
chips to break into shorter, more manageable pieces.
a. A chip breaker grooves
b. Discontinuous chips
c. Non-segmented chips
d. Type-two chips
66. What is the typical chip ratio?
a. 0.50
b. 0.75
c. 0.25
d. 1.00
67. The angle at which the tool meets the workpiece is
characterized by:
a. True rake angle
b. Clearance angle
c. Relief angle
d. Wedge angle
68. Which of the following is the sum of the rake,
clearance of wedge angles?
a. 90deg.
b. 180deg.
c. 45deg.
d. 75deg.
69. What is the relative velocity difference between the
tool and the workpiece?
a. Cutting speed
b. Chip velocity
c. Shear velocity
d. Rake velocity
70. How do you call the velocity of the chip relative to
the act face?
a. Cutting speed
b. Chip velocity
c. Shear velocity
d. Rake velocity
71. How do you call the velocity of the chip relative to
the work piece?
a. Cutting speed
b. Chip velocity
c. Shear velocity
d. Rake velocity
72. Which of the following is the primary parameter
affecting the cutting energy requirement?
a. Compressive stress
b. Shear stress
c. Torsional stress
d. Bending stress
73. The energy expended per unit volume removed is
known as:
a. Specific cutting energy
b. Metal removal rate
c. Cutting horsepower
d. Absolute cutting energy
74. A plain carbon steel with approximately 0.9 to 1.3%
carbon, which has been hardened and tempered?
a. Carbon tool steel
b. High speed steel
c. Low speed steel
d. Medium speed steel
75. Contains tungsten or chromium and retains its
hardness up to approximately 600C.
a. Carbon tool steel
b. High speed steel
c. Low speed steel
d. Medium speed steel
76. Cast non-ferrous tools are brittle but can be used up
to approximately:
a. 1000 C
b. 925 C
c. 1500 C
d. 750 C
77. Which of the following is produced through powder
metallurgy from non-ferrous metals?
a. Sintered carbides
b. Ceramic tools
c. Diamonds
d. Cast non-ferrous
78. Ceramic tools operate at what temperatures?
a. Below 2000F
b. Below 2200F
c. Above 2000F
d. Above 2200F
79. Which of the following is manufactured from
aluminum oxide have the same expected life as carbide
tools but can operate at speeds from two to three times
higher? They operate below 1100 C.
a. Sintered carbides
b. Ceramic tools
c. Diamonds
d. Cast non-ferrous
80. Which of the following are used in specific case,
usually finishing operations?
a. Sintered carbides
b. Ceramic tools
c. Diamonds
d. Cast non-ferrous
81. Used as finishing operation since very fine and
dimensionally accurate surface can be produced.
a. Grinding
b. Snagging
c. Honing
d. Lapping
82. Describes very rough grinding, such as t5hat
performed in foundries to remove gates, fins, and risers
from cesting.
a. Grinding
b. Snagging
c. Honing
d. Lapping
83. Grinding in very much little material, 0.001 to 0.005
is removed.
a. Grinding
b. Snagging
c. Honing
d. Lapping
84. Which of the following is not a measuring device?
a. Orsatanalyser
b. Thermometer
c. Micrometer caliper
d. Divider
85. A plain carbon steel with approximately 0.9 to 1.3%
carbon which has been hardened and tempered.
a. Carbon tool steel
b. Cast non-ferrous
61
c. High speed steel
d. Diamond
86. Carbon tool steel can be given a good edge, but is
restricted to use below:
a. 400 to 600 F
b. 300 to 400 F
c. 700 to 800 F
d. 800 to 1000 F
87. Which of the following contains tungsten or
chromium and retains its hardness up to approximately
1100 F, a property known as red harness?
a. Ceramic tools
b. Diamonds
c. High speed Steel
d. Carbon tool steel
88. Cast non-ferrous tools are brittle but can be used up
to approximately:
a. 1700 F
b. 2200 F
c. 2000 F
d. 600 F
89. They are produced through powder metallurgy from
non-ferrous materials.
a. Diamonds
b. Cast non-ferrous
c. Ceramic tools
d. Sintered Carbides
90. Sintered carbide operates as cutting speeds how many
times as fast as HSS tools:
a. 2 to 5
b. Thrice
c. 5 to 7
d. Twice
91. Which of the following is manufactured from
aluminum oxide have the same expected life as carbide
tools but can operate at speeds from two to three times
higher?
a. Ceramic tools
b. High speed steels
c. Diamonds
d. Carbon tool steel
92. Able in the presence of high temperature iron used
in specific cases, usually in finishing operations.
a. Ceramic tools
b. Diamonds
c. High speed steel
d. Aluminum
93. Percent of the heat developed in cutting is due to
friction between the tool and the work piece is?
a. Approximately 50%
b. Approximately 10%
c. Approximately 25%
d. Approximately 75%
94. Which of the following is used to reduced friction,
removed heat, remove chips and protect against
corrosion.
a. Water vapor
b. Carbon
c. Air
d. Cutting fluid
95. Which of the following is a good heat remove but it
promote rust?
a. Air
b. Kerosene
c. Carbon Dioxide
d. Water
96. Addition of ___________ to water produces an
efficient inexpensive cutting fluid that does not promote
rusting.
a. Sal soda
b. Kerosene lubricants
c. Straight cutting oil
d. Air
97. It reduces friction and do not cause rust but are less
efficient of heat removal than water:
a. Sal soda
b. Kerosene lubricants
c. Straight cutting oil
d. Air
98. Taylor’s equation relates cutting speed v and tool life
T for particular combination of tool and workplace, VTn
= constant. This equation is also known as:
a. Flank wear
b. Nose failure
c. Crater wear
d. Tool life
99. After any cutting or standard grinding operation, the
surface of the workplace will consist of:
a. Smear metal
b. Ultrafinishing
c. Superfinishing
d. Centerless grinding
100. A method that does not require clamping,
chucking, or holding round work pieces.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Centerless grinding
Laser machining
Chemical milling
Ultrafinishing
ELEMENTS 14
1. Which of the following uses high-energy electrical
discharges to shape electrically conducting work
piece?
A. electrochemical machining
B. electrochemical grinding
C. electrical discharge machining
D. ultrasonic grinding
2. For common brass tools, wear ratios for the tool
and work piece vary between:
A. 4:1
B. 20:1
C. 20:1
D. 8:1
3. For expensive tool materials, wear ratios for the
tool and work piece vary between:
A. 4:1
B. 20:1
C. 10:1
D. 8:1
4. It removes heat by electrolysis in a high current
deplating operation
A. electrochemical machining
B. electronic erosion
C. electrospark machining
D. electrical discharge machining
5. What is the other name of electrolytic grinding?
A. laser grinding
B. electrochemical grinding
C. ultrasonic grinding
D. chemical milling
6. It is typically used in the manufacture of printed
circuit boards, is the selective removal of material
not protected by a mask.
A. chemical milling
B. laser machining
C. ultrasonic machining
D. electronic erosion
7. It can be used to shape hard brittle materials such
as glass, ceramics, crystals and gem stones, as well as
tool steels and other metals.
A. chemical milling
B. laser machining
62
C. ultrasonic machining
D. electronic erosion
8. It is used to cut or burn very small holes in the
work piece with high dimensional accuracy.
A. electrochemical machining
B. laser machining
C. chemical milling
D. electronic erosion
9. A general term used to denote the blanking,
bending and forming and shearing of thin-gage
metals.
A. presswork
B. transfer die
C. strip die
D. brake
10. Used with dies and punches to form the work
pieces
A. station
B. transfer die
C. strip die
D. presses
11. With ___________ the work piece advances
through a sequence of operations:
A. presswork
B. brakes
C. tonnage
D. progressive dies
12. Cut pieces from flat plates, strips and coil stock
A. shearing
B. bends allowance
C. forming dies
D. spring back
13. It produces usable pieces, leaving the source
piece behind as scrap
A. punching
B. drawing
C. blanking
D. coining
14. The operation of removing scrap blanks from
the work piece, leaving the source piece as the final
product
A. punching
B. drawing
C. clanking
Coining
15. A cold forming process that converts a flat into
hollow vessel
A. embossing
B. drawing
C. swaging
d. punching
16. It is used in the production of coins, is a severe
operation requiring high tonnage, due to the fact
that the metal flow is completely confined within
the die cavity
A. coining
B. embossing
C. swaging
D. blanking
17. Forms shallow raised letters or other designs in
relief on the surface of sheet metal blanks
A. coining
B. embossing
C. swaging
D. blanking
18. Reduce the work piece area by cold flowing the
metal into die cavity by a high compressive force or
impact
A. coining
B. embossing
C. swaging
D. blanking
19. The repeated hammering of a work piece to
obtain the desired shape
A. spring back
B. blanking
C. punching
D. forging
20. Relies on closed impression dies to produce the
desired shape
A. hammer forging
B. open die forging
C. smith forging
D. drop forging
21. What is the other name give to gravity drop
hammers?
A. board hammers
B. press forging
C. powered hammers
D. impactor forging
22. The forging blows are repeated at the rate of
several times a minute for
A. gravity drop hammers or board hammers
B. press forging
C. powered hammers
D. impactor forging
23. The forging blows are repeated at the rate of
more than 300 times a minute for
A. gravity drop hammers or board hammers
B. press forging
C. powered hammers
D. impactor forging
24. The work piece is held in position while the dies
are hammered horizontally into it from both sides
A. gravity drop hammers or board hammers
B. press forging
C. powered hammers
D. impactor forging
25. Involves holding and applying pressure to round
heated blanks
A. upset forming
B. flash
C. pickling
D. parting line
26. With_________, the part is shaped by a slow
squeezing reaction, rather than impacts
A. drop forging
B. impactor forging
C. press forging
D. upset forging
27. Following forging, the part will have a thin
projection of excess metal as ________at the
parting line
A. pickling
B. flash
C. trimmer dies
D. upset
28. The flash is trimmed off by ___________in a
subsequent operation
A. pickling
B. upset
C. trimmer dies
D. forging
29. With________, a mold is produced by packing
and around a pattern
A. sand molding
B. gravity molding
C. die casting
D. plastic molding
63
30. To facilitate the removal of the pattern, all
surfaces parallel to the direction of withdrawal are
slightly tapered. This taper is called
A. gate
B. riser
C. sprue
D. draft
31. In the gating system, the metal is poured into a
sprue hole and enters a vertical passage known as
A. gates
B. downgate
C. draft
D. risers
32. Serve as accumulators to feed molten metal into
the cavity during initial shrinkage
A. gates
B. downgate
C. draft
D. risers
33. An entrance to the cavity maybe constricted to
control the rate of fill and such constrictions are
known as__________
A. gates
B. downgate
C. sprue
D. risers
34. Molten metal is poured into a metal or graphite
mold where pressure is not used to fill the mold
A. sand molding
B. plastic molding
C. gravity molding
D. non-gravity molding
35. Suitable for creating parts of zinc, aluminum,
copper, magnesium, and lead/tin alloys
A. die casting
B. investment casting
C. centrifugal casting
D. continuous casting
36. More than how may percent of all die casting
uses zinc alloys?
A. 50%
B. 25%
C. 75%
D. 80%
37. Molten metal is forced under pressure into a
permanent metallic mold known as
A. die
B. mold
C. alloy
D. torpedo
38. The cast iron flywheels are commonly designed
with a factor of safety of ________________
A. 14 to 15
B. 8 to 9
C. 10 to 13
D. 6 to 12
39. A pair of equal and opposite (not collinear)
forces that tend cause a rotation of a body
A. couple
B. equilibrium
C. centroids
D. vector
40. It is the ratio of the pitch diameter in inches to
the number of teeth
A. pitch circle
B. module
C. English module
D. pitch diameter
41. When the motion is diminished /decreasing
instead of increasing is called
A. deceleration
B. retarded motion
C. uniform negative impulse
D. all of these
42. Which of the following is a unit or energy
A. ft-lb
B. BTU/hr
C. hp
D. watt
43. When high strength and durability are a
requirements for choosing gear materials it is
preferable to use _________material
A. hardened bronze
B. phenolic laminated
C. steel
D. white iron
44. Which of the forces whose line of actions are
parallel but not necessarily equal in magnitude
A. couple
B. resultant
C. non collinear
D. non concurrent
45. The product of the mass and the velocity of the
center of gravity of the body is called
A. linear momentum
B. linear impulse
C. angular impulse
D. angular momentum
46. Two parallel shaft connected by pure rolling
turn in the same direction and having a speed ratio
of 2.75, what is the distance of the two shaft if the
smaller cylinder is 22cm in diameter
A. 16.60cm
B. 25.25cm
C. 30.25cm
D. 19.25cm
47. The distance between similar equality-spaced
tooth surfaces in a given direction and along a given
line
A. pitch circle
B. pitch
C. pitch plane
D. pitch diameter
48. It is simply defined as a simple push and pull
A. power
B. work
C. inertia
D. force
49. How did you call opposite directional forces
equal in magnitude and parallel
A. non coplanar
B. couple
C. centroid
D. coplanar
50. Which of the following terms is applied to
quantities such as time, volume and density?
A. couple
B. components
C. resultants
D. scalar
51. The use of hardened steel for the mating metal
gear appears to give the best results and longer
operational life. The usual hardness in the range of
A. over 600 BHN
B. below 350 BHN
C. 300 to 400 BHN
D. over 400 BHN
52. It is the product of the resultant of all forces
acting on a body and the time
A. linear momentum
B. angular momentum
64
C. linear impulse
D. all of these
53. The separate forces which can be so combined
are called
A. concurrent forces
B. couple
C. non concurrent forces
D. component forces
54. Continuous stretching under load even if the
stress is less than the yield point
A. plasticity
B. creep
C. elasticity
D. ductility
55. The most known lubricants being utilized in
whatever category of load and speed are oil, air,
grease and dry lubricants like
A. bronze
B. silicon
C. lead
D. graphite
56. A coupling that allows axial
flexibility/movement in the operation. Made of
alternate bolting of steel, leather, fabric and/or
plastic material into the two flanges
A. flexible disk coupling
B. flexing Oldham coupling
C. flexible toroidal spring coupling
D. elastic-material bonded coupling
57. It consists of two cranks, a stationary piece
called the line of centers and the connecting rod is
A. five bar linkage
B. three-crank linkage
C. four-crank braces
D. four-bar linkage
58. Used to change rotary motion to reciprocating
motion
A. rack gears
B. helical gears
C. hypoid gears
D. herringbone gears
59. The effective face width of a helical gear divided
by gear axial pitch
A. approach ratio
B. arc of recess
C. arc of action
D. face overlap
60. Pitch diameter less the diameter of the roller
chain is equal to
A. top land
B. addendum
C. bottom diameter
D. face overlap
61. Generally applied on speed reducer due to large
speed ratio
A. bevel gears
B. worm gears
C. helical gears
D. hypoid gears
62. If shaft size is specified as-diameter 2.00’’ max,
and 1.99’’ min in diameter then the 0.010’’ could
be defined as
A. allowance
B. variance
C. fit
D. tolerance
63. A material plane was subjected to a load. When
the load was removed the strain disappeared. From
the structural change which of the following can be
considered about this material?
A. it has high modules of elasticity
B. it is plastic
C. it does not follow Hookes law
D. it is elastic
64.For an evenly distributed and uniform wear on
each meshing gear tooth, the ideal design practice is
to considered a
A. wear resistance alloy addition to tooth gears
B. heat treatmentof the gears
C. hardening of each tooth
D. hunting tooth addition
65. helix angle in the range of _____________
degree is recommended for wide-face helical gears
A. less than 15
B. 20 to 35
C. less than 20
D. 20 to 22
66. Difference between maximum material limits
mating parts. Or it is a minimum clearance or
maximum interference between parts
A. tolerance
B. variance
C. fits
D. allowance
67. The changes in shape or geometry of the body
due to action of a force on it is called deformation
or
A. shear stresses
B. compressive stress
C. stresses
D. strains
68. The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio
of the pitch diameter to the no. of teeth
A. lead
B. involute
C. module
D. clearance
69. One of these materials is not a structural steel?
A. low carbon steel
B. stainless steel
C. tool and die steel
D. medium carbon steel
70. In elastic body whose primary function is to
deflect order load
A. clutch
B. brake
C. stopper
D. spring
71. Flat leather belting not recommended for used
in a speed in excess of______________ fpm
A. 3600
B. 6000
C. 4800
D. all of these
72. The angle included between the sides of the
thread measured in an axial plane in a screw thread
A. angle of thread
B. helix angle thread
C. angle between thread or 40
D. half angle thread or 20
73. When an air entrainment agent is put into a
concrete mix
A. the water/cement ratio must be reduced
B. the strength will decrease
C. minimal effect
D. the strength will suffer up to 50%
74. The ratio of moment of inertia on a crosssection of a beam to this section modulus is
A. a measure of distance
B. equal to the radius of gyration and compression
65
C. multiplied by the bending moment of inertia
determine the yield stress
D. equal to the area of the cross-section and tension
75. The ratio of moment of inertia of the cross
section of a beam to the section modulus
is___________?
A. equal to the radius of gyration
B. equal to the area of the cross section
C. multiplied by the bending moment to determine
the stress
D. measure of distance
76. Poisson’s ratio is the ratio of
A. elastic limit to yield strength
B. lateral deformation to the longitudinal
deformation
C. shear strain to unit strain
D. elastic limit to shear strength
77. Alloy that improves strength of steel at high
temperature application
A. aluminum
B. silicon
C. manganese
D. chromium
78. The differential of the shear equation is the
A. deflection of the beam
B. tensile strength of beam
C. comprehensive strength of the beam
D. load on the beam
79. Length of contact between two mating parts in a
screw and nut threads measured axially is
termed___________
A. length of engagement
B. arc of contacts
C. axis of contact
D. depth of engagement
80. The sum of their addendums and deddendum is
A. whole depth
B. width of space
C. full depth
D. working depth
81. It is recommended not to have a direct drive
between driven and drive sprockets if the ratio of
their teeth exceeds ____________. Use 2 or more
step combination
A. 10 times
B. 5 times
C. 8 times
D. 6 times
82. Stresses that are independent of loads is
called________________
A. working stress
B. simple stress
C. residual stress
D. combined stress
83. Ability to resist deformation under stress
A. plasticity
B. stiffness
C. toughness
D. all of these
84. The property of material wherein the content is
continuously distributed through its entire mass
A. plasticity
B. homogeneity
C. malleability
D. all of these
85. Material having a high electrical resistance and
should not be used as conductor of electrical
current
A. nickel
B. silicon base alloys
C. aluminum oxide
D. iron oxide
86. The best materials for brake drums is
A. aluminum
B. steel material
C. cast iron
D. wrought iron
87. The property that characterizes a material’s
ability to be drawn into a wire
A. tensile strength
B. endurance limit
C. ductility
D. thermal conductivity
88. The alloy materials used in the production of
metal working tools
A. titanium, phosphorus
B. vanadium, chromium, molybdenum
C. tungsten, silicon, hadfield
D. high carbon steel
89. Which of the phases of steel elements has a facecentered cubic structure?
A. pyrite
B. cementite
C. austenite
D. all of these
90. The rigidity of polymer can be increased by
A. furnace melting
B. crystallization
C. normalizing
D. shot opening
91. The difference between cast steel and cast iron
A. all of these
B. cast steel has usually less than 1%
C. while cast iron has 2% or 3.6% carbon range
D. cast iron has lower strength more brittle and
has lower ductility than cast steel
92. It is a general practice to use the following
allowable stresses 4000 psi for maintransmitting
shaft and 8500 psi for small short shafts and
counter shaft for lineshaft carrying pulley it
is___________ psi
A. 7800
B. 6000
C. 7000
D. 6500
93. The properties of metal to withstand loads
without breaking down is
A. elasticity
B. plasticity
C. strength
D. strain
94. Almost always the soldering materials are a
combination of the following alloys
A. all of these
B. tin & antimony
C. lead & tin
D. lead & antimony
95. The most popular of all soldering materials in
use has composition of
A. 45/55% tin & lead
B. all of these
C. 50/50% tin & lead
D. 60/40% tin & lead
96. The relative strength of a cut welding could be
safety assumed as___________% efficiency
A. 95
B. 90
C. 98
D. 92
97. It is a work-supporting device which is bolted to
the saddle of the lathe machine. I t travels with the
66
cutting tool it is a prevention of the springing away
of the work piece from cutting tools
A. rubber-flex collets
B. follower rest
C. tool post
D. carriage stop
98. Which of the following raw materials are used
in the foundry molding operation?
A. silica sand, bentonite, flour/paste water
B. silica sand paste, graphite electrode
C. silica sand and paste
D. silica sand, linseed oil, flour
99. Which of the following is not a part of
micrometer caliper?
A. thimble
B. spindle
C. head screw
D. anvil
100.
A. normalizing
B. flame hardening
C. tempering
D. annealing
Elements 15
1.
2.
3.
Which of the following is the allowable tensile
strength of the steel plates?
A. 396.41 N/m2
B. 379.31 N/m2
C. 296.12 N/m2
D. 310.11 N/m2
Which of the following standard SAE
designation of manganese steel?
A. 13xx
B. 11xx
C. 10xx
D. 8xx
Compute the torque received by the motor
shaft running at 4250 rpm. Transmitting 11hp,
through a 10 inch diameter 20o involute gear.
The shaft is supported by ball bearing at both
ends and the gear is fixed at the middle of 8”
shaft length.
A. 163 in lb
B. 132 in lb
C. 167 in lb
D. 138 in lb
4.
The SAE 2340 shafting contains how many
percent nickels?
A. 3.85 Ni
B. 3.25 to 3.75% Ni
C. 4% Ni
D. 3.84% Ni
5. Which of the following standard SAE
designation for chromium steel?
A. 92 xx
B. 3 xxx
C. 5 xxx
D. 11xx
6. In general, alloys with high nickel content
retain toughness to quiet low temperatures up
to how many degrees Fahrenheit?
A. -380
B. -260
C. -400
D. -320
7. The length of the hub should not be maid
lesser than the face width of the gear. Hub
lengths usually vary from 1.25 D to 2 D where
D is the shaft diameter. What should be the
reasonable diameter of the steel hub?
A. 2 D
B. 1.55 D
C. 1.8 D
D. 1.20 D
8. Torsional deflection is a significant
consideration in the design of shaft and the
limit should be in the range of how many
degrees/foot of length?
A. 0.4 to 1
B. 0.08 to 1
C. 0.1 to 1
D. 0.6 to 1
9. If the pitch of a screw is 2/9 find the thread
per inch.
A. 0.34
B. 5.4
C. 4.5
D. 17
10. Steel spring material is usually hardened from
400 to 500 BHN and the carbon content is in
the range of how many percent?
A. 0.50 to 0.90%
B. 0.45 to 0.48
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C. 0.96 to 0.97
D. All of these
Shafts readily available in the market are made
in many ways and wide variety of material
composition. It is likely be cold drawn carbon
steel in size smaller than _____ inches
diameter.
A. 3.75
B. 5
C. 4
D. 51/2
Plain carbon steel standard designation SAE
______.
A. 6xxx
B. 10xx
C. 13xx
D. 2xxx
If the inertia is 90 lb ft2 and the speed of the
driver shaft is to be increased from 0 to 2500
rpm in 5 seconds, shaft material is of SAE
4140 with yield strength of 110000 lbs. /in2,
find the clutch starting torque in in–lb ft.
A. 159
B. 146
C. 128
D. 191
How many 5/16 inch holes can be punch in
one motion in a steel plate made of SAE 1010
steel 7/16 inch thick using a force of 55 tons.
The ultimate strength for shear is 50 ksi and
use 2 factor of safety.
A. 5.8
B. 5
C. 3.7
D. 6.5
Which of the following cannot be used in
drilling machine?
A. Reaming
B. Lapping
C. Spot facing
D. Broaching
A kilowatt is equal to:
A. 8851.2 in-lb/secs.
B. 57 BTU/min
C. 1140 joule/sec
D. 44.200 ft-lb/min
67
17. Molybdenum-chromium-nickel steel
designation.
A. SAE48xx
B. SAE56xx
C. SAE43xx
D. SAE46xx
18. Single force which produce the same effect
upon a mass replacing two or more forces
acting together is called:
A. Vector
B. Component of forces
C. Resultant
D. Resolution
19. Permissible variation of the
manufactured/machined dimension is called:
A. Intolerance fits
B. Allowance
C. Deviation
D. Tolerance
20. Peculiar strength of the metal to resist being
crushed:
A. Shear strength
B. Compressive strength
C. Ultimate strength
D. Elastic limit
21. What pressure is required for punching a hole
2’’ diameter thru 1/4 ‘’ steel plates?
A. 40 tons
B. 45 tons
C. 50 tons
D. 35 tons
22. What is the working strength of a 2’’ bolt
which is screwed up tight in a packed joint
when the allowable working stress is 12000 psi?
A. 20.4 ksi
B. 23.4 ksi
C. 22.4 ksi
D. 18 ksi
23. Determine the bursting steam pressure of a
steel shell with a diameter of 10inches and
made of ¼ thick steel plates. The joint
efficiency is at 70% and the tensile strength is
60 ksi.
A. 4400 psi
B. 42.8 ksi
C. 10.5 ksi
D. 8500 psi
24. Commonly used by steel melter as deoxidizer
because of its easy availability and cheap price.
A. Silicon
B. Zinc
C. Aluminum
D. Manganese
25. Curve formed by the path of a point on a
straight line as it rolls along a convex base
curve. The base curve is usually a circle and
generally used as the profile of gear.
A. Axial plane
B. Arc of recess
C. Involute
D. Arc of action
26. Resultant of two or more component forces is
called:
A. Composition of forces
B. Component
C. Resultant
D. Collinear of forces
27. A material having a high electrical resistance
and should not be used for conductor for
electric current.
A. Alloyed magnesium
B. Nickel
C. Silicon base alloy
D. Zinc
28. It improves red hardness of steel.
A. Silicon
B. Cobalt
C. Lead
D. Manganese
29. Designated pipe color used in communication.
A. Silver gray
B. Bare
C. Aluminum gray
D. White
30. The design stress and factor of safety are
related in the following manner.
A. Design stress= ultimate stress/ factor of
safety
B. Ultimate stress = factor or safety / design
stress plus concentration factor
C. Factor or safety = design stress / ultimate
stress
D. Design stress= factor of safety / time stress
concentration factor
31. Not adaptable to welding due to low tensile
strength and poor ductility etc.
A. Copper parts
B. Aluminum parts
C. Cast iron materials
D. Bronze parts
32. Bearing surface that completely surrounds the
journal is also called:
A. Offset bearing
B. Centrally loaded bearing
C. Full bearing
D. Babbit bearing
33. The purpose of lubrication is as mentioned
except :
A. To lighten the load
B. Prevent adhesion
C. Prevent corrosion/oxidation
D. Cool the moving elements
34. Tools usually used in wood pattern making in
foundry shop.
A. Saws and chisel
B. Knives and drills
C. Band saw
D. Drill machine
35. It is a plane perpendicular to the axial plane
and to the pitch plane in gears the parallel axes
and the plane of rotation coincides.
A. Tangent line
B. Transverse
C. Straight line
D. Reference angle
36. A 36 tooth pinion with a turning speed of 300
rpm drives 120 tooth gear of 14 1/2 o d
involute full depth pressure angle. What would
be the speed of the driven gear?
A. 1000 rpm
B. 90 rpm
C. 100 rpm
D. 140 rpm
37. Several force which can be combined is called:
A. Resultant
B. Components
C. Composition of forces
D. Collinear forces
38. The surface along the fillet curve or between
the fillets radius of the two adjacent tooth or a
gear:
68
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
A. Bottom land
B. Fillet
C. Flank
D. Top land
Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the range of:
A. Bottom land
B. Fillet
C. Flank
D. Top land
Ideal herringbone gear helix is in the range of:
A. 30 to 45
B. 25 to 30
C. 35 to 50
D. 15 to 20
A three extension coil spring is hooked in
series that supports a single weight of 100 kgs.
The first spring is rated at 0.400 kg/mm and
the other 2 lower springs is rated at .64 kg/in.
Compute the total deflection.
A. 263 mm
B. 156 mm
C. 268 mm
D. None of these
The lack of backlash in spur gear
design/operation may result to:
A. Overloading
B. All of these
C. Jamming
D. Overheating
The distance from a point on a screw thread to
corresponding points on the next thread
measure along the axis.
A. Flank
B. Crest
C. Lead
D. Pitch
As recommended the center to center distance
between sprockets should not be less than
______ times the bigger sprocket.
A. 2.216
B. 1 1/2
C. 1 3/4
D. 2.59
Machine shop instrument for checking the
flatness of plane surface to 10ths of
thousandths of the centimeter.
A. Blade type micrometer
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
B. Planimeter
C. Dial caliper
D. Micrometer
Molybdenum steel standard designation SAE.
A. 88xx
B. 40xx
C. 48xx
D. 46xx
Also called eccentrically loaded bearing is:
A. Full bearings
B. Partial bearings
C. Offset bearings
D. Fitted bearings
In the selection of wire rope, regular lay means
wire and strands arrange in the following
manner.
A. Twisted in the same direction
B. Twisted in opposite direction
C. Twisted in any direction
D. Twisted in along direction
In involute teeth, the pressure angle is often
defined as the angle between the line of action
and the line tangent to the pitch circle. It is
also termed as:
A. Helix angle
B. Angle of obliquity
C. Angle of recess
D. Arc of action
Instantaneous center is also called:
A. Centro
B. Virtual center
C. Rot Opole
D. All of these
What is the stress to strain ratio within the
elastic limit?
A. Elastic limit
B. Elastically
C. Modulus of elasticity
D. Compressive ratio
A material plane was subjected to a load.
When the load was removed the strain
disappeared. From the structural change which
of the following can be considered about this
material?
A. It does not follow Hooke’s Law
B. It is elastic
C. It has high modulus of elasticity
D. It is plastic
53. Allowance added in the casing pattern to
compensate for the contraction of metal
A. Tapering allowance
B. Finish allowance
C. Shrinkage allowance
D. Draft pattern
54. Ratio of the angle of action to the pitch angle
A. Contact ratio
B. Ratio gearing
C. Approach ratio
D. Module
55. General purpose grade of steel used for broiler
plate, structure etc. usually with carbon
content of:
A. 0.20 to 30%C
B. 0.35 to 0.50%C
C. 0.15 to 0.25%C
D. All of these
56. The angle made by the helix of the thread(in a
straight thread) at the pitch diameter with a
plane perpendicular to the axis called:
A. Angle of thread
B. Lead angle
C. Truncation
D. Lead
57. The principle materials used in the production
of metal working tools:
A. High carbon steel
B. Titanium, phosphorous
C. Tungsten, silicon, had field Mn
D. Vanadium, chromium, molybdenum
58. In the interest of design simplification and
good kinematics compromise bevel gears
adopted a standard pressure angle of ______
degrees/
A. 200 involute stub
B. 14 1/2 involute full depth
C. 200
D. 17 1/2
59. The property of material that relates the lateral
strain to longitudinal strain.
A. Stress
B. Poisson’s ratio
C. Strain
D. Endurance limit
69
60. It is generally recommended and normal for a
designer to add a hunting tooth to evenly
distribute the wear on meshing teeth like a 53
teeth gears mesh with 30 teeth pinion. Find
the rotation of pinion to mesh with same pair
of teeth again.
A. 120
B. 61
C. 81
D. 53
61. The shaft whose torque varies from 2000 to
6000 in lbs has 1 1/2 in in diameter and
60000 psi yield strength. Compute for the
shaft mean average stress.
A. 6036 psi
B. 5162 psi
C. 6810 psi
D. 5550 psi
62. The angle made by the helix of the thread(in a
straight thread) at the pitch diameter with a
plane perpendicular to the axis is called:
A. Lead angle
B. Lead
C. Truncation
D. Angle of thread
63. The rule of thumb in journal bearing design;
the clearance ratio/clearance should be.
A. 0.0090
B. 0.0010
C. 0.0042
D. 0.00120
64. The moment of inertia of a rectangle whose
base is “b” height “h” about its based is:
A. bh3/4
B. bh3/24
C. bh3/12
D. bh3/3
65. Cold rolled shafting is not available in
diameter larger than:
A. 6 inches
B. 6 ½ inches
C. 5 inches
D. 5 ½ inches
66. Height of tooth above pitch circle or the radial
distance between pitch circle and top land of
the tooth.
A. Top root
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
B. Land
C. Addendum
D. Hunting tooth
The function of clutch in the machine tool is?
A. Lowering of drive speed
B. To disconnect or connect at will the
drive
C. Alignment of the drive shaft
D. To insure that two shaft line up at high
speed
A resulting force that replace two or more
forces acting together.
A. Vector
B. Resultant
C. Couple
D. Equilibrant
Stress relieving is also _____ for the purpose of
reducing the internal stresses of steel
material/metal.
A. Normalizing
B. Annealing
C. Tempering
D. All of these
Matensite (stainless steel) contains 4 to 26%
Cr. And a maximum of _____% nickel
A. 2.5
B. 3.5
C. 3.25
D. 2.0
Matensite (stainless steel) contains 4 to 26%
Cr. And a maximum of _____% nickel
A. 2.5
B. 3.5
C. 3.25
D. 2.0
Compute the deflection of a 18 coil helical
soaring having a load of 100kgs. The modulus
of elasticity in shear of spring is 96.62 Gpa,
OD of 9256 cm and width diameter of 9525
mm. The spring is square and ground ends.
A. 9 mm
B. 112 mm
C. 101 mm
D. 14 mm
A flanged bolt coupling has ten (10) steel 25.4
mm diameter bolts evenly tighten around a
415 mm bolt circle. Determine the torque
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
capacity of the connection if the allowable
shearing stress in the bolt is 50 MN/m2.
A. 59.95 KN-m
B. 46.15 KN-m
C. 52.6 KN-m
D. 43.8 KN-m
The material that can cut/wear hardest
substance subjected to:
A. Carbide
B. Tungsten
C. Abrasive
D. Vanadium
A ridge of uniform section in the form of a
helix cut around the circumference of a
cylinder and advancing along the axis.
A. Thread roots
B. Screw threads
C. Helix thread
D. Chamfers
Cast iron flywheel are commonly designed
with factor of safety of
A. 10 to 13
B. 10 to 14
C. 10 to 12
D. 8 to 13
Class of material exhibiting decreases electrical
conductivity with increasing temperature.
A. Aluminum
B. Metals
C. P-type semiconductor
D. N-type semiconductor
The welding made along the edges of two
parallel plates is called:
A. Groove joint
B. Edge joint
C. Fillet joint
D. Corner joint
Not part and in fact should not be used in the
steel melting process:
A. Coke
B. Zinc
C. Silicon
D. Aluminum
Rule of thumb in calculating the equipment
foundation mass should be _____ times the
weight of the machinery it is supposed to
support.
70
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
A. 3 – 5
B. 3 – 9
C. 3 – 6
D. 2 – 4
The strength of non ferrous alloys is at
maximum at room temperature while that
ferrous metal has a maximum strength at
______0F
A. 400
B. 450
C. 1200
D. 350
The ratio of stress acting on an elastic
substance to the decrease in volume per unit
volume.
A. Bulk modulus
B. Elastic limit
C. Modulus of resilience
D. Modulus of elasticity
The normal helix angle in helical gear is
recommended in the range of _____ degrees.
A. Less than 18
B. 15 to 25
C. 20 to 35
D. 20 to 30
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Stud bolt
B. Hex bolt
C. Acne threaded bolt
D. Square threaded bolts
It is rigid piece which serves to transmit force
from a piece another piece or to cause /
control motion.
A. Follower
B. Cam motion
C. Crank
D. Link
A 20 kgs. Cast iron piece rest on a plain
horizontal aluminum surface. To move the
object it needs a force of 7 lbs. The density of
AI is 0.098 lb/in3 and iron is 0.260 lb/in3
A. 0.172
B. 1.601
C. 0.186
D. 0.160
87. Which of the following is an iron based alloy
containing 9 – 16% chromium?
A. Mn Hadfield steel
B. Stainless steel
C. Chrome-molly steel
D. High chrome steel
88. Shafting up to 3 inches in diameter is usually
made from cold rolled steel and the common
biggest diameter cold rolled steel is:
A. 4 1/4 inches
B. 6 3/4 inches
C. 6 7/8 inches
D. 5 inches
89. It is ideal for maximum quietness in sprockets
drive operation to choose _____ or more
teeth.\
A. 24
B. 27
C. 18
D. 21
90. All associate with standard material
specification except:
A. American Iron and Steel Institute
B. Society of Automotive Engineers
C. Southeast Asia Iron and Steel Institute
D. American Society for Testing Material
91. For stable equipment foundation the total
combined engine driven equipment and
foundation center of gravity must be kept
below the foundations too that usually about
______ times the usual total combined weight
of the machinery it is supposed to support.
A. 3 to 4
B. 2 to 4
C. 3 to 7
D. 3 to 5
92. A cylinder tank with 10” inside diameter
contains oxygen gas at 2500 psi. Calculate the
required wall thickness in (mm) under stress of
28 000 psi.
A. 11.34 mm
B. 12.44 mm
C. 10.24 mm
D. 10.54 mm
93. The process of peening the joint portion
immediately after the welding greatly improves
the fusion structures avoids possible cracking,
avoid possible distortion etc. Peening can also
____process at the same time.
A. Tempering
B. Normalizing
C. Mar tampering
D. Annealing
94. What do you call the distance between rivet
center nearest each other in adjacent rows?
A. Pitch
B. Margin
C. Back pitch
D. Diagonal pitch
95. Which of the following is a major alloy in tool
steel?
A. Cr
B. Cobalt
C. Fen
D. Mn
96. Should two equal and opposite collinear forces
is added to the forces already in equilibrium,
which of the following statement is true?
A. Unbalance moment is maintained
B. Equilibrium is maintained
C. Equilibrium is disturbed
D. It creates an unbalanced situation
97. In the pressure vessels, which of the following
resists internal pressure through bending?
A. Shell – type element
B. Cam – type element
C. Plate – type element
D. Spherical – type element
98. Which of the following flanges is suitable for
low and moderate pressure?
A. Ring – flange
B. Lap joint flange
C. Tapered - hub flange
D. Welding neck type
99. It is the process of pre – stressing or over –
stressing of a hollow cylindrical member
beyond the elastic range.
A. Pre-stage
B. Autofrettage
C. Stress relieving
D. Countersinking
100. It is the phenomenon occurring when two
touching surfaces have a high contact pressure
71
and when these surfaces have minute relative
motion.
A. Pre-stressing
B. Fretting
C. Friction
D. Carving
ELEMENTS 16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For ordinary steel, the modulus of elasticity
usually falls between __________ million
pounds.
A. 20 to 30
B. 35 to 45
C. 20 to 35
D. 25 to 30
The modulus of elastic for metals in
compression is usually taken as that in:
A. Tension
B. Bearing
C. Yield
D. ultimate
Which of the following is the ratio of moment
and stress?
A. Strain
B. section modulus
C. contraction
D. passions ratio
What is the flexural stress when of a
symmetrically cross-section beam when the
vertical shear is maximum?
A. Infinity
B. Zero
C. maximum
D. minimum
The riveted joint in ASME Code has as design
surface compressive stress ________ higher
than the design tensile stress.
A. 70%
B. 60%
C. 35%
D. 50%
What is the ratio of the minimum strength of
joint to the strength of solid joint in the
pressure vessel?
A. Efficiency
B. relative strength
C. performance factor
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D. joint efficiency
What is the usual factor of safety for a pressure
vessel?
A. 4
B. 1.5
C. 3
D. 5
It is the permissible variation of the size.
A. Tolerance
B. Limit
C. fits
D. none of these
Considering that there is no fit, what is the
permissible liberal tolerance in machining
work?
A. ±0.010
B. ±0.090
C. ±0.020
D. ±0.050
Which of the following is the tolerance where
the size of a part may be larger only, or smaller
only, than the given dimension?
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. none of these
A tolerance where the size of the part is
permitted to be either larger or smaller than
the given dimension.
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. none of these
Which of the following is the basis for ASA
fits?
A. Basic number system
B. basic hole system
C. basic size system
D. unit system
When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will
take force or pressure to put the cold parts
together. In such case the allowance is
negative. Which of the following terms is
appropriate for such allowance?
A. Negative fits of metal
B. interference of metal
C. positive fits of the metal
D. intangible fits
14. What is the direction of the predominant
surface pattern?
A. Smoothness
B. Waviness
C. lay
D. roughness
15. It is the irregularities of departures from the
nominal surface of greater spacing than
roughness?
A. Waviness
B. roughness
C. lay
D. smoothness
16. It is the surface finish of micrometer in rms.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
17. Which of the following gears has the simplest
type of teeth?
A. Helical gears
B. spur gears
C. bevel gears
D. worm gears
18. In gears, an imaginary circle on which the lever
arm is based in;
A. Base circle
B. pitch circle
C. addendum circle
D. clearance circle
19. It is the circle tangent to the addendum of the
meshing gears.
A. Clearance circle
B. base circle
C. Addendum circle
D. pitch circle
20. The distance from a point on one gear to the
corresponding point measured along the base
circle.
A. Normal pitch
B. circular pitch
C. axial pitch
D. diametral pitch
21. A line passing through the pitch point that is
tangent to both base circles of a gear is:
A. Pressure line
72
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
B. perpendicular line
C. tangent line
D. center line
Which of the following is the contact ratio for
a good gear design?
A. 1.5:1
B. 1:1.3
C. 1:3
D. 1.2:2
In pressure vessels, which of the following
resists internal pressure through tension?
A. Shell-type element
B. cam type element
C. plate-type element
D. spherical type element
It is the study of the body’s motion
independent of the forces on the body.
A. Kinetics
B. Dynamics
C. Kinematics
D. mechanics
What is the reciprocal of the velocity ratio?
A. Train value
B. Ratio factor
C. modular value
D. none of these
It is a type of bolt finished all over and has
usually having coarse threads.
A. Coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. machine bolt
D. automobile bolt
It is a type of bolt distinguishes by a short
portion of the shank underneath the head
being square or finned or ribbed.
A. Coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. machine bolt
D. carriage bolt
It is a type of bolt threaded on both ends and
can be used where a through bolt impossible.
A. Coupling bolt
B. carriage bolt
C. stud bolt
D. machine bolt
Which of the following is not a type of bolt?
A. Stud bolt
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
B. Steel bolt
C. machine bolt
D. coupling bolt
It is a locking device that is used to maintain
pressure between threads of the bolt and nut.
A. Gasket
B. lock washer
C. lock nut
D. filler
What is the large wood screw used to fasten
machinery and equipment.
A. Lag screw
B. loss screw
C. wood screw
D. cross screw
What is the minimum length of contact in a
tapped hole for cast iron?
A. 1.7D
B. 1.5D
C. 1.2D
D. 2.1D
It is the ratio of the mean diameter of coil over
the coil diameters.
A. Wahl factor
B. spring index
C. coil ratio
D. lead scale
What is the overall length of springs when it is
compress until all adjacent coils touched?
A. Free length
B. solid length
C. compressed length
D. expansion length
It is the length of a coil spring under no load?
A. Compressed length
B. free length
C. solid height
D. none of these
In general, the steels springs are made of
relatively of relative height carbon steel usually;
A. 5%
B. less than 0.5%
C. more than 0.5%
D. 7.5%
It is a low cost spring materials, suitable where
service is not severe and dimensional precision
is not needed.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
A. Helical spring wire
B. stainless steel
C. hard drawn wire spring
D. copper
What is the hard drawn (80% reduction)
spring wire made of high carbon steel?
A. Oil tempered wire
B. music wire
C. tension wire
D. chromium wire
Which of the following wires with good quality
and is used for impact loading?
A. Hard drawn wire
B. song wire
C. helical spring wire
D. chromium-silicon wire
When heat-threated wire is coiled cold, it
should be stress relieved for bending stress and
after cooling it is heated at some:
A. 400°F
B. 600°F
C. 700°C
D. 500°F
Which of the following is not a function of
spring?
A. Absorbs energy
B. source of potential energy
C. measure weight
D. measure thickness
Which of the following is the type of spring
made in the form of dished washer?
A. Air spring
B. believe spring
C. volute spring
D. motor spring
What is the type of the failure due to
instability?
A. Buckling
B. slenderness ratio
C. Stability
D. Euler’s failure
What type of formula that is best applied to a
very slender column?
A. Column formula
B. slenderness formulas
C. moment formulas
D. Euler formula
73
45. If two principal stresses is zero, the state of
stress is:
A. Biaxial
B. mono-axial
C. uniaxial
D. triaxial
46. What do you call the system that has finite
values of principal stresses?
A. Triaxial
B. Uniaxial
C. monoaxial
D. biaxial
47. A screw that requires positive torque to lower
the load, or to loosen the screw if it has been
turned tight against a resistance.
A. Self locking screw
B. lock screw
C. self screw
D. power screw
48. What is the rotating member used in
transmitting power?
A. Shaft
B. counter shaft
C. axle
D. washer
49. For machineries shop the permissible
deflection is approximately:
A. 0.02in/ft
B. 0.03in/ft
C. 0.01in/ft
D. 0.05in/ft
50. For shafts, the shear due to bending is a
maximum at the neutral plane where the
normal stress is:
A. Minimum
B. Constant
C. maximum also
D. zero
51. The minimum value of numerical combined
shock and fatigue factor to be applied in every
case to the computed bending moment of the
shaft is:
A. 2.0
B. 1.75
C. 1.5
D. 1.3
52. What is the other name given to short shafts in
machines?
A. Spindles
B. head shafts
C. core shafts
D. all of these
53. The other name given to a line shaft.
A. Countershaft
B. Main shaft
C. Long shaft
D. Head shaft
54. The speed at which the center of mass will be
equal the deflecting forces on the shaft; the
shaft with its attached bodies will then vibrate
violently, since the centrifugal force change its
direction as the shaft turns in:
A. Nominal speed
B. Critical speed
C. Relative speed
D. Mean speed
55. An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting
is that the deflection should not exceed
_________ of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot
B. 0.08 in. per foot
C. 0.02 in. per foot
D. 0.05 in. per foot
56. For transmission shafts the allowable
deflection is 1 degree in a length of
__________ diameters.
A. 20
B. 25
C. 30
D. 40
57. What is the limiting torsional deflection for
machinery shafts, if the criteria of limiting
torsional deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot of
length?
A. 1˚
B. 2.5˚
C. 2˚
D. 3.5˚
58. Bevel gears of sizes 5 inches to 15 inches
should not be lift or depress more
than__________, as Gleason statement.
A. 0.004
B. 0.003
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
C. 0.002
D. 0.001
What type of key that allows the hub to move
along the shaft but prevents the rotation of the
shaft?
A. Woodruff key
B. Feather key
C. Gibbs key
D. Square key
What is the other name for Kennedy key?
A. Tangential key
B. Woodruff key
C. Saddle key
D. Roll pin
What type of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit
B. Press fit
C. sliding fit
D. All of these
It is used for permanent fits and similar to
involute splines except that the pressure angle
is 14.5˚.
A. Separation load
B. Splines shaft
C. Stub serrations
D. Involute serrations
It is used in a coupling or in addition to
another coupling where, in case of overload,
there is danger of injury to machine or to
material in process.
A. Shear pin
B. Flange coupling
C. Involute serrations
D. King pin
What is the maximum shaft angle for a single
Hooke’s coupling?
A. 10˚
B. 17
C. 15˚
D. 20˚
What are the two principal parts of a Journal
Bearing?
A. Bearing and journal
B. Shaft and babbit
C. Clearance and fitted
D. Shaft and cylinder
74
66. When the line of action of the load bisects the
arc of partial bearing, the bearing said to be:
A. Eccentrically loaded
B. Fully loaded
C. Centrally loaded
D. Partially loaded
67. What is the difference in radii of the bearing
and Journal?
A. Even clearance
B. Clearance ratio
C. Odd clearance
D. Radial clearance
68. When radii of both the bearing and the
journal are the same, then the bearing is said
to be:
A. Fitted bearing
B. Clearance bearing
C. Full bearing
D. Ambiguous bearing
69. What is the line that passes through the
centers of the bearing and the journal?
A. Line of action
B. Line of centers
C. Line of symmetry
D. Tangent line
70. Which of the following is considered
advantageous for bearing materials?
A. Conformability
B. Compatibility
C. Embed ability
D. All of these
71. A conclusion repeatedly verified by experiment
is that the smoother surface:
A. Has the greater load capacity of the
bearing
B. Has the lesser capacity of the bearing
C. Has constant load
D. None of these
72. Which of the following considers the 200
series of bearing?
A. Heavy
B. Medium
C. Light
D. All of these
73. Which of the following considers the 300
series of bearing?
A. Medium
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
B. Heavy
C. Light
D. All of these
A type of roller bearing in which the balls are
assembled by the eccentric displacement of the
inner ring.
A. shallow groove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-groove ball bearing
Which of the following is not a type of ball
bearing?
A. shallow groove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-groove ball bearing
Which of the following is the approximate
density of the leather belt?
A. 0.035 lb/in3
B. 0.0135 lb/in3
C. 0.025 lb/in3
D. 0.0465 lb/in3
Which of the following is the approximate
density of a fat rubber belt?
A. 0.055 lb/in3
B. 0.0135 lb/in3
C. 0. 045 lb/in3
D. 0.0465 lb/in3
A toothed wheel whose tooth elements are
straight and parallel to the shaft axis or used to
transmit motion and power between parallel
shafts.
A. Helical gear
B. Spur gear
C. Worm gear
D. Bevel gear
The breaking strength of oak-tanned beltings
varies from 3 to more than:
A. 5 ksi
B. 6 ksi
C. 7 ksi
D. 9 ksi
Experience suggests that the most economical
designs are obtained for a belt speed of:
A. 6000 to 7500 fpm
B. 3000cto 5000 fpm
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm
D. 5000 to 1000 fpm
81. The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force
increasing rapidly above about:
A. 2500 fpm
B. 3000 fpm
C. 35000 fpm
D. 4000 fpm
82. For leather belts, recommended speed is:
A. 6000 to 7000 fpm
B. 5000 to 6000 fpm
C. 7000 to 8000 fpm
D. 4500 to 5600 fpm
83. The recommended initial tension of the belt is:
A. 75 lb/in of width
B. 73 lb/in of width
C. 71 lb/in of width
D. 80 lb/in of width
84. Two shafts at right angles to each other may be
connected by what arrangement?
A. Half turn
B. Quarter turn
C. ¾ turn
D. One turn
85. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for low speed is:
A. 12
B. 21
C. 17
D. 14
86. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for moderate speed is:
A. 17
B. 21
C. 12
D. 14
87. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for high speed is:
A. 21
B. 24
C. 12
D. 14
88. The resultant of a pair of equal forces but
opposite in direction is:
A. Concurrent
B. Couple
C. Non-concurrent
D. Resultant
75
89. The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut
after heat treatment should have a hardness in
the range of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear
teeth hardness on the other hand
ideally/normally should be at __________
BHN.
A. 250/320
B. 350/380
C. 400
D. 340/350
90. As a rule, the center distance between
sprockets should not be less than __________
times the diameter of the bigger sprocket and
not less than 30 times the pitch nor more than
about 50 times to pitch.
A. 1.5
B. 2
C. 2.5
D. 3
91. A single force which produces the same effect
upon a mass as two or several forces acting
together is called:
A. Components
B. Composition forces
C. Resolution forces
D. Resultant
92. All forces in the same plane are called:
A. Coplanar
B. Couple
C. Parallel
D. Resultant
93. Which of the following laws which states that
the force of attraction between two bodies is
directly proportional to the product of their
masses and inversely proportional to distance
square between their centers.
A. Hooke’s law
B. Law of gravitation
C. Law of motion
D. Newton’s law
94. Any object thrown upward will return to earth
with the magnitude of the terminal velocity
equal to:
A. 50% of the initial velocity
B. 80% of the initial velocity
C. About 90% of the initial velocity
D. The initial velocity
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce strain on
the bearing and belt __________.
A. Life will be shortened
B. Result to uneconomical operation
C. Suffer/shatter
D. Will be sheared/cut
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile
test specimen divided by the specimen original
area is called:
A. Charpy test
B. % elongation
C. Impact test
D. Izod test
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the __________ steel
family.
A. Carbon
B. Chromium
C. Manganese
D. Nickel
98. In itself, it is a lubricant and usually one of the
important elements in casting non-ferrous
metals like bronze, for example:
A. Antimony
B. Babbit
C. Lead
D. Zinc
99. Gasket material, which should avoid hot
liquid/steam applications.
A. Asbestos fiber
B. Nylon fiber
C. Rubberized
D. Wool
100. The same material properties all over / direction
and at any particular point in a structural
member is:
A. Heterogeneous
B. Homogenous
C. Isentropic
D. Isotropic
Elements 16
1.
For ordinary steel, the modulus of elasticity
usually falls between __________ million
pounds.
A. 20 to 30
B. 35 to 45
C. 20 to 35
D. 25 to 30
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The modulus of elastic for metals in
compression is usually taken as that in:
A. Tension
B. Bearing
C. yield
D. ultimate
Which of the following is the ratio of moment
and stress?
A. Strain
B. section modulus
C. contraction
D. passions ratio
What is the flexural stress when of a
symmetrically cross-section beam when the
vertical shear is maximum?
A. Infinity
B. Zero
C. Maximum
D. minimum
The riveted joints in ASME Code have as
design surface compressive stress __________
higher than the design tensile stress.
A. 70%
B. 60%
C. 35%
D. 50%
What is the ratio of the minimum strength of
joint to the strength of solid joint in the
pressure vessel?
A. Efficiency
B. relative strength
C. performance factor
D. joint efficiency
What is the usual factor of safety for a pressure
vessel?
A. 4
B. 1.5
C. 3
D. 5
It is the permissible variation of the size.
A. Tolerance
B. limit
C. fits
D. none of these
Considering that there is no fit, what is the
permissible liberal tolerance in machining
work?
76
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
A. ±0.010
B. ±0.090
C. ±0.02
D. ±0.050
Which of the following is the tolerance where
the size of a part may be larger only, or smaller
only, than the given dimension?
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. none of these
A tolerance where the size of the part is
permitted to be either larger or smaller than
the given dimension.
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. none of these
Which of the following is the basis for ASA
fits?
A. Basic number system
B. basic hole system
C. basic size system
D. unit system
When the hole is smaller than the shaft, it will
take force or pressure to put the cold parts
together. In such case the allowance is
negative. Which of the following terms is
appropriate for such allowance?
A. Negative fits of metals
B. interference of metal
C. positive fits of the metal
D. intangible fits
What is the direction of the predominant
surface pattern?
A. Smoothness
B. Waviness
C. Lay
D. roughness
It is the irregularities of departures from the
nominal surface of greater spacing than
roughness?
A. Waviness
B. Roughness
C. Lay
D. smoothness
It is the surface finish of micrometer in rms.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
Which of the following gears has the simplest
type of teeth?
A. Helical gears
B. spur gears
C. bevel gears
D. worm gears
In gears, an imaginary circle on which the lever
arm is based in;
A. Base circle
B. pitch circle
C. addendum circle
D. clearance circle
It is the circle tangent to the addendum of the
meshing gears.
A. Clearance circle
B. base circle
C. Addendum circle
D. pitch circle
The distance from a point on one gear to the
corresponding point measured along the base
circle.
A. Normal pitch
B. circular pitch
C. axial pitch
D. diametral pitch
A line passing through the pitch point that is
tangent to both base circles of a gear is:
A. Pressure line
B. perpendicular line
C. tangent line
D. center line
Which of the following is the contact ratio for
a good gear design?
A. 1.5:1
B. 1:1.3
C. 1:3
D. 1.2:2
In pressure vessels, which of the following
resists internal pressure through tension?
A. Shell-type element
B. cam type element
C. plate-type element
D. spherical type element
24. It is the study of the body’s motion
independent of the forces on the body.
A. Kinetics
B. Dynamics
C. Kinematics
D. Mechanics
25. What is the reciprocal of the velocity ratio?
A. Train value
B. Ratio factor
C. modular value
D. none of these
26. It is a type of bolt finished all over and has
usually having coarse threads.
A. Coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. machine bolt
D. automobile bolt
27. It is a type of bolt distinguishes by a short
portion of the shank underneath the head
being square or finned or ribbed.
A. Coupling bolt
B. stud bolt
C. machine bolt
D. carriage bolt
28. It is a type of bolt threaded on both ends and
can bbe used where a through bolt impossible.
A. Coupling bolt
B. carriage bolt
C. stud bolt
D. machine bolt
29. Which of the following is not a type of bolt?
A. Stud bolt
B. Steel bolt
C. machine bolt
D. coupling bolt
30. It is a locking device that is used to maintain
pressure between threads of the bolt and nut.
A. Gasket
B. lock washer
C. lock nut
D. filler
31. What is the large wood screw used to fasten
machinery and equipment.
A. Lag screw
B. loss screw
C. wood screw
D. cross screw
32. What is the minimum length of contact in a
tapped hole for cast iron?
A. 1.7D
B. 1.5D
C. 1.2D
D. 2.1D
33. It is the ratio of the mean diameter of coil over
the coil diameters.
77
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
A. Wahl factor B. spring index
C. coil ratio
D. lead scale
What is the overall length of springs when it is
compress until all adjacent coils touched?
A. Free length
B. solid length
C. compressed length D. expansion length
It is the length of a coil spring under no load?
A. Compressed length
B. free length
C. solid height
D. none of these
In general, the steels springs are made of
relatively of relative height carbon steel usually;
A. 5%
B. less than 0.5%
C. more than 0.5% D. 7.5%
It is a low cost spring materials, suitable where
service is not severe and dimensional precision
is not needed.
A. Helical spring wire B. stainless steel
C. hard drawn wire spring D. copper
What is the hard drawn (80% reduction)
spring wire made of high carbon steel?
A. Oil tempered wire B. music wire
C. tension wire
D. chromium wire
Which of the following wires with good quality
and is used for impact loading?
A. Hard drawn wire B. song wire
C. helical spring wire D. chromium-silicon
wire
When heat-threated wire is coiled cold, it
should be stress relieved for bending stress and
after cooling it is heated at some:
A. 400°F B. 600°F C. 700°C D. 500°F
Which of the following is not a function of
spring?
A. Absorbs energy B. source of potential energy
C. measure weight D. measure thickness
Which of the following is the type of spring
made in the form of dished washer?
A. Air spring
B. believe spring
C. volute spring
D. motor spring
What is the type of the failure due to
instability?
A. Buckling
B. slenderness ratio
C. stability
D. Euler’s failure
What type of formula that is best applied to a
very slender column?
A. Column formula B. slenderness formulas
C. moment formulas D. Euler formula
45. If two principal stresses is zero, the state of
stress is:
A. Biaxial
B. mono-axial
C. uniaxial
D. triaxial
46. What do you call the system that has finite
values of principal stresses?
A. Triaxial
B. uniaxial
C. monoaxial
D. biaxial
47. A screw that requires positive torque to lower
the load, or to loosen the screw if it has been
turned tight against a resistance.
A. Self locking screw
B. lock screw
C. self screw
D. power screw
48. What is the rotating member used in
transmitting power?
A. Shaft
B. counter shaft
C. axle
D. washer
49. For machineries shop the permissible
deflection is approximately:
A. 0.02in/ft
B. 0.03in/ft
C. 0.01in/ft
D. 0.05in/ft
50. For shafts, the shear due to bending is a
maximum at the neutral plane where the
normal stress is:
A. Minimum
B. constant
C. maximum also D. zero
51. The minimum value of numerical combined
shock and fatigue factor to be applied in every
case to the computed bending moment of the
shaft is:
A. 2.0
B. 1.75
C. 1.5
D. 1.3
52. What is the other name given to short shafts in
machines?
A. Spindles
B. head shafts
C. core shafts
D. all of these
53. The other name given to a line shaft.
A. Countershaft
B. Main shaft
C. Long shaft
D. Head shaft
54. The speed at which the center of mass will be
equal the deflecting forces on the shaft; the shaft
with its attached bodies will then vibrate violently,
since the centrifugal force change its direction as the
shaft turns in:
A. Nominal speed B. Critical speed
C. Relative speed D. Mean speed
55. An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting
is that the deflection should not exceed
_________ of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot
B. 0.08 in. per foot
C. 0.02 in. per foot
D. 0.05 in. per foot
56. For transmission shafts the allowable deflection
is 1 degree in a length of __________ diameters.
A.20
B. 25
C. 30
D. 40
57. What is the limiting torsional deflection for
machinery shafts, if the criteria of limiting torsional
deflection vary from 0.08˚ per foot of length?
A.1˚
B. 2.5˚
C.2˚
D. 3.5˚
58. Bevel gears of sizes 5 inches to 15 inches should
not be lift or depress more than__________, as
Gleason statement.
A. 0.004 B. 0.003 C. 0.002 D. 0.001
Answer: B
59. What type of key that allows the hub to move
along the shaft but prevents the rotation of the
shaft?
A. Woodruff key B. Feather key
C. Gibbs key
D. Square key
60. What is the other name for Kennedy key?
A. Tangential key B. Woodruff key
C. Saddle key
D. Rollpin
61. What type of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit
B. Press fit
C. Sliding fit
D. All of these
62. It is used for permanent fits and similar to
involute splines except that the pressure angle
is 14.5˚.
A. Separation load B. Spline shaft
C. Stub serrations D. Involute serrations
63. It is used in a coupling or in addition to
another coupling where, in case of overload,
there is danger of injury to machine or to
material in process.
A. Shear pin
B. Flange coupling
C. Involute serrations
D. King pin
64. What is the maximum shaft angle for a single
Hooke’s coupling?
A.10˚
B. 17˚
C. 15˚
D. 20˚
78
65. What are the two principal parts of a Journal
Bearing?
A. Bearing and journal B. Shaft and babbit
C. Clearance and fitted D. Shaft and cylinder
66. When the line of action of the load bisects the
arc of partial bearing, the bearing said to be:
A. Eccentrically loaded
B. Fully loaded
C. Centrally loaded D. Partially loaded
67. What is the difference in radii of the bearing
and Journal?
A. Even clearance B. Clearance ratio
C. Odd clearance D. Radial clearance
68. When radii of both the bearing and the
journal are the same, then the bearing is said
to be:
A. Fitted bearing B. Clearance bearing
C. Full bearing
D. Ambiguous bearing
69. What is the line that passes through the
centers of the bearing and the journal?
A. Line of action B. Line of centers
C. Line of symmetry
D. Tangent line
70. Which of the following is considered
advantageous for bearing materials?
A. Conformability B. Compatibility
C. Embeddability D. All of these
71. A conclusion repeatedly verified by experiment
is that the smoother surface:
A. Has the greater load capacity of the
bearing
B. Has the lesser capacity of the bearing
C. Has constant load
D. None of these
72. Which of the following considers the 200
series of bearing?
A. Heavy
B. Medium
C. Light
D. All of these
73. Which of the following considers the 300
series of bearing?
A .Medium
B. Heavy
C. Light
D. All of these
74. A type of roller bearing in which the balls are
assembled by the eccentric displacement of the
inner ring.
A. shallow groove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-groove ball bearing
75. Which of the following is not a type of ball
bearing?
A. shallow groove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-groove ball bearing
76. Which of the following is the approximate
density of the leather belt?
A.0.035 lb/in3
B. 0.0135 lb/in3
3
C. 0.025 lb/in
D. 0.0465 lb/in3
77. Which of the following is the approximate
density of a fat rubber belt?
A.0.055 lb/in3
B. 0.0135 lb/in3
3
C. 0.045 lb/in
D. 0.0465 lb/in3
78. A toothed wheel whose tooth elements are
straight and parallel to the shaft axis or used to
transmit motion and power between parallel
shafts.
A. Helical gear
B. Spur gear
C. Worm gear
D. Bevel gear
79. The breaking strength of oak-tanned beltings
varies from 3 to more than:
A.5 ksi
B. 6 ksi
C. 7 ksi
D. 9 ksi
80. Experience suggests that the most economical
designs are obtained for a belt speed of:
A.6000 to 7500 fpm B. 3000 to 5000 fpm
C. 3500 to 4700 fpm D. 5000 to 1000 fpm
81. The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force
increasing rapidly above about:
A.2500 fpm
B. 3000 fpm
C. 35000 fpm
D. 4000 fpm
82. For leather belts, recommended speed is:
A.6000 to 7000 fpm B. 5000 to 6000 fpm
C. 7000 to 8000 fpm D. 4500 to 5600 fpm
83. The recommended initial tension of the belt is:
A.75 lb/in of width B. 73 lb/in of width
C. 71 lb/in of width D. 80 lb/in of width
84. Two shafts at right angles to each other may be
connected by what arrangement?
A. Half turn
B. Quarter turn
C. ¾ turn
D. One turn
85. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for low speed is:
A.12
B. 21
C. 17
D.14
86. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for moderate speed is:
A.17
B. 21
C. 12
D. 14
87. The minimum number of teeth on a smaller
sprocket for high speed is:
A.21
B. 24
C. 12
D. 14
88. The resultant of a pair of equal forces but
opposite in direction is:
A. Concurrent
B. Couple
C. Non-concurrent
D. Resultant
89. The helical and herringbone gear teeth cut
after heat treatment should have a hardness in
the range of 210/300BHN. The pinion gear
teeth hardness on the other hand
ideally/normally should be at __________
BHN.
A.250/320
B. 350/380
C. 400
D. 340/350
90. As a rule, the center distance between
sprockets should not be less than __________
times the diameter of the bigger sprocket and
not less than 30 times the pitch nor more than
about 50 times to pitch.
A.1.5
B. 2
C. 2.5
D. 3
91. A single force which produces the same effect
upon a mass as two or several forces acting
together is called:
A. Components
B. Composition forces
C. Resolution forces
D. Resultant
92. All forces in the same plane are called:
A. Coplanar
B. Couple
C. Parallel
D. Resultant
93. Which of the following laws which states that
the force of attraction between two bodies is
directly proportional to the product of their
masses and inversely proportional to distance
square between their centers.
A. Hooke’s law
B. Law of gravitation
C. Law of motion D. Newton’s law
94. Any object thrown upward will return to earth
with the magnitude of the terminal velocity
equal to:
A. 50% of the initial velocity
B. 80% of the initial velocity
79
C. About 90% of the initial velocity
D. The initial velocity
95. Flat belt that is too tight will induce strain on
the bearing and belt __________.
A. Life will be shortened
B. Result to uneconomical operation
C. Suffer/shatter
D. Will be sheared/cut
96. The resulting cross-sectional area of the tensile
test specimen divided by the specimen original
area is called:
A. Charpy test
B. % elongation
C. Impact test
D. Izod test
97. SAE 51XXX belongs to the __________ steel
family.
A. Carbon
B. Chromium
C. Manganese
D. Nickel
98. In itself, it is a lubricant and usually one of the
important elements in casting non-ferrous
metals like bronze, for example:
A. Antimony
B. Babbit
C. Lead
D. Zinc
99. Gasket material, which should avoid hot
liquid/steam applications.
A. Asbestos fiber B. Nylon fiber
C. Rubberized
D. Wool
100. The same material properties all over /
direction and at any particular point in a
structural member is:
A. Heterogenous B. Homogenous
C. Isentropic
D. Isotropic
ELEMENTS 17
1.
2.
3.
For large speed ratio and large sprocket utilized
it is recommended cast ____________
material since the large sprocket teeth are
having fewer engagements.
A. allowed steel
B. high treated steel
C. iron
D. malleable iron
Roller bearing is utilized on _________
carrying capacity and is better than ball in this
condition.
A. Heavy load
B. high temperature load
C. low load
D. reserving load
To enhance mechanical properties, fabrication
characteristics or any other attributes of steel,
some elements are added in melting in specific
ranges or minimum aside from carbon and
generally termed:
A. Alloy steel
B. AISI steel
C. Bessemer steel
D. SAE steel
4. Materials is having thermal expansion of about
10 times higher than those of materials and
has more heat generated during machining is:
A. Aluminum
B. Asbestos
C. Plastic
D. PVC
5. To hold to minimum, the axial direction of
deflection/movement, a separate thrust
bearing or preloaded bearing capable of
absorbing considerable load is required. The
type of bearing to use is a __________ bearing.
A. Deep grove ball
B. double row angular contract
C. tapered roller bearing
D. wide type self-aligning
6. Pulley made of ________ ordinary is 45 to
55% less in weight and 2.35 to 2.70% less
slippage compared with________ pulley.
A. Iron/steel
B. steel/iron
C. wood/iron
D. wood/steel
7. To avoid scoring in the bearing surface and the
shaft due to __________
contamination/absorption of the fine dirt in
the bearing during operation/lubrication the
bearing material to apply should have good
lubrication.
A. Anti-scoring B. resistance conformability
C. corrosion resistance D. embed ability
8. What do impact tests measure?
A. Compactness
B. Ductility
C. Plasticity
D. Toughness
9. Corresponding piping color for alkaline.
A. Blue
B. Green
B. C. Red
D. Violet
10. Type of gear that transmits power at an angle.
A. Bevel B. Helix
C. Herringbone
D. Spur
11. Which of the following gasket material is not
used for high temperature?
A. Normal Plane B. Plastic Nylon
C. Rubberized
D. Wool
12. A plane perpendicular to the gear axis.
A. Asbestos
B. Pitch Plane
C. Plane of Rotation
D. Radius of gyration
13. Specification of molybdenum alloy.
A. SAE3XXX
B. SAE4XXX
C. SAE5XXX
D. SAE6XXX
14. A_________ chain is an assembly of lines and
joints.
A. Dynamic
B. Kinetic
C. Sprocket
D. Static
15. The recommended means of supporting the
chuck during the mounting procedure to the
lathe spindle is to use:
A. Crane B. Jack C. Overhead D. Racket
16. Too much __________ in a flat belt operation
tend to cause excessive wear slippage and may
burn
A. load B. Lack C. Usage D. Tightness
17. It is a chromium steel tape in AISI-SAE
designation.
A. 10XX
B. 25XX
C.50XX
D. 40XX
18. Which of the following is not recommended
for use in a driving space exceeding
2000ft/min?
A. Flat leather belt B. Herringbone gear
C. Silent sprocket
D. V-Belt
19. It is low cost bearing used worldwide for
automobile or low horse power motor
applications. It is made of thin coating of over
flat metal strip.
A. Babbit
B. Cadmium brass
C. Lead D. Thin
20. The most common useful tools to measure
diameter in machine shop operation but
normally and always used with steel scale for
measurement.
A. Caliper
B. Micrometer
C. Protractor
D. Vernier
21. In impact force introduce to cause the metal in
a shape mold according to the shape to dies
made.
A. Hardness
B. Spinning
C. Swaging
D. Toughness
22. Forces of equal in magnitude but opposite in
direction are parallel called
A. Acceleration
B. Coplanar
C. Couple
D. Non-coplanar
23. Composition of force is at the____________
of two or more forces.
80
A.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Combination
B. Opposition
C. Resultant
D. Summary
Circular pitch is measured along the
__________ in the circular gear.
A. Circle
B. Line of action
C. pitch center
D. pitch diameter
Stiffness is the materials ability to__________
deformation under stress.
A. Non-polar
B. planar
C. resists D. Staffer
The pipe color in steam is:
A. Blue
B. Gray
C. Silver gray
D. White
What method is used the yield point of some
brittle materials?
A. Offset ratio
B. modulus of resilience
C. modulus measurement D. parallelogram
method
Wood pattern in the foundry is normally
constructed out of:
A. Dried sap wood
B. hard wood
C. kiln dried wood
D. scrap wood
The progressive change in position of
is called motion.
A. Component
B. couple
C. link
D. mass
Strain or ________ is a change in geometry /
shape of the body due to action of a force on
it.
A. Bending Stress
B. Deformation
C. Shear stress
D. stress
The effective face width of a helical gear
divided by the axial pitch. This sometimes
called face overlap.
A. Angle overlap
B. Axial overlap
C. Contact overlap D. Helical overlap
For mass production of casting it is generally
chapter to use:______ longer life.
A. Gear axis
B. normal plane C.
contact overlap
D. pitch diameter
It is a place between mating teeth or the
amount of which a tooth space exceed the
thickness of an engaging tooth is called:
A. Backlash
B. Clearance
C. Pitting
D. Space
The forces that be combined or called
component forces.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
A. Different
B. Helical
C. Opposite
D. parallel
Plane of rotation is defined as plane
perpendicular to a
A. gear axis
B. gear ratio
C. normal plane
D. pitch diameter
Cutting lubricant used used in drilling reaming
and tapping for brass and bronze
A. Dry
B. Soda water
C. Soluble oil
D. Turpentine
Non-concurrent forces when in action are:
A. Collinear
B. Couple
C. parallel
D scalar
The general accepted limit of diamond wheel
speed should be in the range of ________
fpm.
A. 1000/2000
B. 2500/3500
C. 3000/4000 D. 5000/6000
Prepared tool bit will now consist of face , nose
and
A. Cutting tool
B. shank
C sharp tool
D tool edge
This is an alloy in bronze casting that assist
lubrication and in itself a lubricant:
A. Lead
B. manganese
C phosphate
D .tin
For longer sprocket chain life the speed range
of_______ fpm is recommended.
A. 92xx
B. 300xx C. 304xx D. 515xx
All stainless type is SAE designation except:
A. 92XX
B. 300XX
C. 304XX
D. 515XX
It is white metal with good oxidation and
corrosion resistance. This has also electrical
magnetic properties.
A. Aluminum
B. Copper
C. Nickel
D. Titanium
It is molybdenum steel – tape in AISI_SAE
designation
A. 44XX
B. 45XX
C. 50XX
D. 51XX
Cutting lubricant used used in drilling reaming
and tapping for brass and bronze
A. Dry
B. Soda water
C. Soluble oil
D.
Turpentine
46. In a ______ design, the lead of a single thread
is equal to the pitch.
A. bevel gear
B. bolt
C. helical gear
D. hypoid gear
47. A type of chisel used in cutting of keyways,
square corners or slots.
A. Cape
B. Diamond head
C. Flat
D. Round
48. The maximum recommended ideal number
of teeth to use for bigger sprocket is:
A. 120
B. 127
C. 132
D. 143
49. The teeth on the outer ring surface is called
the external gear:
A. Develop
B. Flank
C. Gear
D. Involute
50. A bolt general application that posses a
stronger thread is a type of _____ screw.
A. BUN
B. UNC
C. UNEF
D. WOOD
51. Maximum moment formula for beam simply
supported at both and subject to a load
uniformly disturbed over its length.
A. wL/2
B. wL/8
C. wL/8
D. wL/12
52. Special bearing used with high deflection.
A. Babbitt
B. ball
C. Roller
D. Self aligning
53. For low load and less experience production.
A. Babbitt
B. ball
C. Roller
D. Self aligning
54. The lateral stain in axial tension members can
be calculated by
A. Deformation
B. Hooke’s law
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. William’s law
55. The most abundant being used in automobiles
worldwide is coated with_______ on top of
the plate.
A. Babbitt B. lead C. manganese D. tin
56. A liquid metal at room temperature.
A. Aluminum
B. mercury
C. Zinc
D. Zirconium
57. Steel with SAE specification 13XX.
A. Chromium
B. Manganese
C. Molybdenum
D. Nickel
58. Property, which enables a material to be drawn
into a wire.
81
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
A. Ductility
B. Elasticity
C. Plasticity
D. Utility
Heating a metal to a temperature above the
critical temperature and from cooling slowly
usually done in the furnace to reduce the
hardness and improve the machinability is a
process called
A. Annealing
B. Normalizing
C. quenching
D. tempering
The stress that causes the material to shorten:
A. Bearing
B. Compressive
C. Shear
D. tensile
The most common lubricants being utilized in
whatever category of load and speed are oil,
grease and dry lubricants like
A. Bronze
B. Graphite
C. Lead
D. Silicon
Commonly used in parallel shaft transmission
especially when a smooth continuous action is
essential as in high speed drives up to 12,000
fpm.
A. Bevel gear
B. Helical gear
C. Herringbone gear
D. Spur gear
The reciprocal of a diametral pitch or the ratio
of the pitch diameter to the number of teeth.
A. Clearance
B. Involute
C. Lead
D. Module
What tool will be used in making wood
pattern in the foundry shop?
A. Band saw B. Drill machine
C. Hammer
D. Saw and chisel
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Acme threaded bolts
B. Hex bolt
C. Hardness
d. Stud bolt
Ability of a material to absorb strain energy
and will return to its original state.
A. Creep
B. Fatigue strength
C. Hardness
D. Resilience
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal
strain.
A. Deformation
B. Modulus of
elasticity
C. Poisson’s ratio
D. William’s line
Basic size is the same as design size if there is
no:
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
A. Allowance
B. Clearance
C. Limits
D. Tolerance
Forces that meet at common point is called:
A. Co-linear
B. concurrent
C. coplanar
D. couple
A pair of equal and opposite (not collinear)
forces that tend to cause a rotation of a body.
A. Centroids
B. Couple
C. Equilibrium
D. Vector
Stress that resist being pulled apart.
A. Compressive
B. Shear
C. Tensile
D. Torsional
Dynamic seal is also known as:
A. Gasket
B. packing
C. seal
D. shield
Acceleration is proportional to the force.
A. Hooke’s law
B. Law of gravitation
C. Law of motion D. Newton’s law
Which type of hardening will work to some
extent in all metals?
A. Annealing
B. Austenitizing
C. Martempering D. Work hardening
Sound travel fastest in :
A. Air at 00 F and 1 atmosphere
B. Air at 700 F and 1 atmosphere
C. Air at 700 F and 0 lbf/ in2
D. steel at 700 F
The yield strength of common yellow brass (
70%Cu, 30%Zn) can be increased by:
A. Annealing
B. chill casting
C. cold working
D. heat treatment
Forces not on the same place is called______
A. Component
B. Composition of forces
C. Non-coplanar
D. Resolution
The distance between the center of oscillation
and the point of suspension is called:
A. Fix axis
B. Center of gravity
C. Center of percussion
D. Radius of oscillation
If the velocity is variable and
regularly/constantly increasing the rate of
change is called:
A. Acceleration
B. Constant work
C. Moment
D. Motion
80. The kinematic chain in which one link is
considered fixed for the purpose of analysis but
motion is possible in other links.
A. Belting
B. Frame
C. Mechanism
D. Sprocket chain
81. The ____ is one of the rigid members / bodies
joined together to form a kinetic chain.
A. Coplanar
B. Frame
C. Link
D. Machine
82. For large speed ratio and large sprocket utilized
it is recommended cast _______ material since
the large sprocket teeth are having fewer
engagements.
A. Alloyed steel
B. heat treated steel
C. Iron
D. Malleable iron
83. Roller bearing is utilized on______ carrying
capacity and is better than ball in this
condition.
A. Heavy load
B high temperature load
C. low load
D. reversing load
84. To enhance mechanical properties, fabrication
characteristics or any other attributes of steel,
some elements are added in melting in specific
ranges or minimum aside from carbon and
generally termed:
A. Alloy steel
B. AISI steel
C. Bessemer steel
D. SAE steel
85. Materials is having thermal expansion of about
10 times higher than those of materials and
has more heat generated during machining is:
A. Aluminum
B. Asbestos
C. Plastic
D. PVC
86. To hold to minimum, the axial direction of
deflection/movement, a separate thrust
bearing or preloaded bearing capable of
absorbing considerable load is required. The
type of bearing to use is a _______ bearing.
A. Deep grove ball
B. double row angular contract
C. tapered roller bearing
D. wide type self-aligning
87. Pulley made of ______ ordinary is 45 to 55%
less in weight and 2.35 to 2.70% less slippage
compared with _______ pulley.
A. Iron/steel
B. steel/iron
C. wood/iron
D. wood/steel
88. A plane perpendicular to the gear axis.
82
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
A. Normal plane
B. Pitch plane
C. Plane of rotation d. Radius of gyration
The minimum value of numerical combined
shocks and fatigue factor to be applied in every
case to the computed bending moment of the
shaft is:
A. 2.0
B.1.75
C. 1.5
D. 1.3
What is the other name given to short shafts
on machines?
A. Spindles
B. head shafts
C. core shafts
D. all of these
The other given to a line shaft is:
A. Countershafts
B. main shaft
C. long shaft
D. head shafts
The speed at which the center of mass will be
equal the deflecting forces on the shafts; shaft
with its attached bodies will then vibrate
violently, since the centrifugal forces changes
its direction as the shaft turns in:
A. Nominal speed
B. critical speed
C. relative speed
D. mean speed
An old rule of thumb for transmission shafting
is that the deflection should not exceed ____
of length between supports.
A. 0.01 in. per foot
B. 0.08 in. per foot
C. 0.02 in. per foot D. 0.05 in. per foot
For transmission shaft the allowable deflection
is 1 degree in a large of _____ diameters.
A. 20
B. 25
C. 30
D. 40
What is the limiting torsional deflection for
machinery shafts, if the criteria of limiting
torsional deflection vary from 0.08% per foot
of length?
A. 10
B. 2.50
C. 20
D. 3.50
Bevel gear with size 5 in. to 15 in should not
be lift or depress more than____, as Gleason
statement.
A. 0.004 B. 0.003 C. 0.002 D. 0.001
What type of key that allows the hub to move
along the shaft but prevents the rotation of the
shaft?
A. Woodruff Key
B. Feather Key
C. Gibbs Key
D. Square Key
What is the other name for Kennedy Key:
A. Tangential key
B. woodruff key
C. saddle key
D. roll pin
99. What type of fits used for involute spline?
A. Close fit
B. press fit
C. sliding fit
D. all of these
100. It is used for permanent fits and similar to
involute splines except that the pressure angle
is 14.50.
A. Separation load B. spline shaft
C. stub serration D. involute serration
7.
8.
ELEMENTS 18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Which of the following has been considered as
general purpose rope?
A. 6 x 19 IWRC
B. 7 x 25 IWRC
C. 7 x 25 IWRC
D. 6 x 9 IWRC
What is the maximum shaft angle for a single
Hooke’s coupling?
A. 10
B. 17
C. 15
D. 20
What are the two principal parts of a Journal
Bearing?
A. bearing and journal
B. shaft and babbit
C. clearance and fitted
D. shaft and cylinder
When the line of action of the load, bisects the
arc of partial bearing, the bearing is said to be?
A. eccentrically loaded
B. fully loaded
C. centrally loaded
D. partially loaded
When radii of both the bearing and the
journal are the same, then the bearing is said
to be:
A. fitted bearing
B. clearance bearing
C. full bearing
D. ambiguous bearing
Which of the following cannot be a possion’s
ratio of a material
A. 0.35
B. 0.40
C. 0.75
D. 0
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
A conclusion repeatedly verified by experiment
is that the smoother surface:
A. has the greater load capacity of the
bearing
B. has the lesser capacity of the bearing
C. has constant load
D. none of these
Which of the following considers the 200
series of bearing?
A. heavy
B. medium
C. light
D. all of these
Which of the following considers the 300
series of bearing?
A. heavy
B. medium
C. light
D. all of these
A type of roller bearing in which the balls are
assembled by the eccentric displacement of the
inner ring.
A. shallow grove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-grove ball bearing
Which of the following is not a type of ball
bearing?
A. shallow grove ball bearing
B. filling-slot ball bearing
C. self-aligning ball bearing
D. deep-grove ball bearing
Which of the following is the approximate
density of the leather belt?
A. 0.035
B. 0.0135
C. 0.025
D. 0.0465
Which of the following is the approximate
density of a fat rubber belt?
A. 0.055
B. 0.0135
C. 0.045
D. 0.0465
A toothed wheel whose tooth elements are
straight and parallel to the shaft axis or used to
83
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
transmit motion and power between parallel
shafts.
A. helical gear
B. spur gear
C. worm gear
D. bevel gear
The breaking strength of oak-tanned belting
varies from 3 or more than:
A. 5
B. 6
C. 7
D. 9
Experience suggests that the most economical
designs are obtained for a belt speed of:
A. 6000 to 7500
B. 3000 to 5000
C. 3500 to 4700
D. 5000 to 1000
The tension in the belt due to centrifugal force
increasing rapidly above about:
A. 2500
B. 3000
C. 3500
D. 4000
For leather belts recommended speed is?
A. 6000 to 7000
B. 5000 to 6000
C. 7000 to 8000
D. 4500 to 5600
For fabric belts, recommended speed is:
A. 4000 to 5000
B. 3000 to 4000
C. 2000 to 3000
D. 2000 and more
The recommended initial tension of the belt is:
A. 75
B. 73
C. 71
D. 80
Two shafts at right angles to each other may be
connected by what arrangement?
A. Half turn
B. Quarter turn
C.
turn
D. One turn
22. A statement of how the total moment is
derived from a number of forces acting
simultaneously at a point.
A. Goodman’s theorem
B. Soderberg’s theorem
C. Varignon’s theorem
D. Moore’s theorem
23. A simple mechanical machine with the ability
to increase an applied force.
A. Hinges
B. Roller
C. Lever
D. Spring
24. Any device used to raise or lower an object.
A. Hoist
B. Spring
C. Lever
D. Roller
25. A measure of the material’s ability to yield and
absorb highly localized and rapidly applied
stresses.
A. Hardness
B. Stiffness
C. Toughness
D. Resilience
26. A material can fail after repeated loadings even
if the stress level never exceeds the ultimate
strength.
A. Fatigue failure
B. Ductile failure
C. Brittle failure
D. Mechanical failure
27. The load at which a column fails is known as:
A. Dead load
B. Critical load
C. Moving load
D. Dynamic load
28. The percentage difference of solid and working
deflections is known as:
A. Cash allowance
B. Spring rate
C. Spring allowance
D. Spring index
29. A shaft’s natural frequency of vibration is
referred to as the: normal speed
A. high speed
B. critical speed
C. low speed
30. A fine finishing operation, similar to polishing,
is using a very fine polishing compound.
Burnishing
A. Buffing
B. Calorizing
C. Electroplating
31. A process in which metal is dipped in dilutes
acid solutions to remove dirt, grease, and
oxides.
A. Pickling
B. Sheradizing
C. Polishing
D. Pakerizing
32. Which of the following is used to change the
direction of an applied tensile force?
A. Gears
B. Flywheels
C. Pulleys
D. Ropes
33. For most wire ropes and chains with 180
contact, the loss factor at low speed varies
between:
A. 1.03 to 1.06
B. 1.20 to1.50
C. 1.07 to 1.10
D. 1.60 to 1.80
34. What method to determine the reactions on
continuous beams?
A. two-moment equations
B. three-moment equations
C. second moment equations
D. third moment equations
35. What is the best method for increasing a
spring’s fatigue life?
A. Sprickling
B. Stress relieving
C. Shot peening
D. Shot relieving
36. The distance from a point on one gear to the
corresponding point measured along the base
circle.
A. Diametral pitch
B. Normal pitch
C. Circular pitch
D. Chordal pitch
84
37. Which of the following is a single measure that
combines the external dynamic load of an
application with a gear drive’s reliability and
operating life?
A. ratio factor
B. reliability factor
C. service factor
D. life factor
38. Describes very rough grinding, such as that
performed in foundries to remove gates, fins,
and risers from casting.
A. Snagging
B. Lapping
C. Honing
D. Snuggling
39. A fine grinding operation used to obtain exact
fit and dimensional accuracy.
A. Honing
B. Lapping
C. Buffing
D. Burnishing
40. The process of separating different sizes of the
same material.
A. Screening
B. Sieving
C. Separation
D. Fractioning
41. The process of separating a material into a
variety of specifically sized groups.
A. Centrifuging
B. Sieving
C. Fractioning
D. Screening
42. An interrupted quenching process resulting in
an austenite-to-banite transition.
A. Austempering
B. Martempering
C. Austenitizing
D. Martenitizing
43. The material will become progressively
stronger, harder, and more brittle until it
eventually fails.
A. Hot working
B. Tempering
C. Cold working
D. Normalizing
44. A swinging support constructed as part of the
vessel and that supports the man way cover
when it is unbolted and moved aside.
A. Nozzles
B. Handholes
C. Davit
D. Orifice
45. Which of the following is the measure of
torsional stress?
A. accuracy
B. stiffness
C. rigidity
D. quality
46. When tested in compression, ductile materials
usually exhibit _____ characteristics up to the
yield strength as they do when tested in
tension.
A. the same
B. more than
C. more than
D. approximately the same
47. A tolerance where the size of a part is
permitted to be either larger or smaller than
the given dimension.
A. Bilateral
B. unilateral
C. lateral
D. None of these
48. A fit generally used on those dimensions
involved in such as pin in a hole.
A. Unilateral
B. Lateral
C. Bilateral
D. None of these
49. It is relatively finely spaced irregularities of the
surface.
A. Smoothness
B. Waviness
C. Lay
D. Roughness
50. It is the surface finish of heavy cuts or coarse
feed.
A. 200rms
B. 400rms
C. 80rms
D. 500 or greater rms
51. Which of the following is the most dominant
cause (approximately 80%) of machine
failures?
A. Torsion
B. Negligence
C. Fatigue failures
D. Compression
52. Wrought steel in its commonly met
commercial, it is often assumed that the
average endurance for an average Su (50%
survival) the Brinell hardness is limited to:
A. 500
B. 400
C. 240
D. 450
53. What is the range of the endurance ratio or
Czaud votes values for steel?
A. 0.23 to 0.65
B. 0.34 to 0.87
C. 0.63 to 0.93
D. 0.34 to 0.45
54. Which of the following indicates the degree of
concentration?
A. Power factor
B. Service factor
C. Stress factor
D. Stress concentration factor
55. The internal stresses that exist in any part of
the material that is subjected to temperature
and not acted upon by an external load.
A. Residual stress
B. Form stress
C. Superposed stress
D. Control stress
56. It is the process that cold works a limited
amount of material, thus giving a higher
strength, and it leaves a surface compressive
stress.
A. Surface finishing
B. Tensioning
C. Surfacing
D. Surface rolling
57. Fatigue strength is increased by repeated loads
just below the normal fatigue limit, followed by
small step by step increase of the loading.
A. Coaxing
B. Triaxing
85
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
C. Mixing
D. Relieving
It is the diameter of the imaginary cylinder that
bounds the crest of an external thread and the
roots of an internal thread.
A. Mean diameter
B. Root diameter
C. Stress diameter
D. Major diameter
It is the distance in inches a screw thread ( a
helix) advances axially in one turn
A. Pitch
B. Mean pitch
C. Lead
D. Circular pitch
Which of the following bolts is recommended
for general use?
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
It is frequently used bolt in automotive and
aircraft industries.
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
Which of the following is particular bolt used
in aeronautical equipment?
A. UNC
B. UNEF
C. UNF
D. NC
What type of bolt usually used for highpressure pipe flanges, cylinder head studs etc?
A. UNC
B. UNF
C. UNEF
D. 8 UN
It is the stress or load induced by the
tightening operation.
A. Initial stress
B. Initial tension
C. Residual stress
D. None of these
For non-metallic gaskets, it has been found
that they should have a certain minimum
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
amount of compression as ______ for a certain
cork gasket.
A. 62%
B. 86%
C. 68%
D. 76%
It is a screw fastening with a nut on it.
A. Bolt
B. U-bolt
C. Rivet
D. Screw
A fastening which has no nut and turns in to a
threaded hole.
A. Bolt
B. Fastener
C. Rivet
D. Screw
An old name for an unfinished through bolt
comes with square.
A. Coupling bolt
B. Stud bolt
C. Machine bolt
D. Automobile bolt
It is a type of coil where the helical coil is
wrapped into a circle forming an annular ring.
A. Volute spring
B. Hairspring
C. Motor spring
D. Garter spring
It is a type of spring where thin flat strip
wound up on itself as a plane spiral, usually
anchored at the inside end.
A. Motor spring
B. Garter spring
C. Volute spring
D. Helical spring
The ratio of the length of the column and the
radius of gyration of the cross-sectional area
about a centroidal axis.
A. Contact ratio
B. Slenderness ratio
C. Centroidal ratio
D. Column ratio
Under the theories of failure, for static loading
of ductile material, the design stress is:
A. Yield Stress/Factor of Safety
B. Ultimate stress/Factor of Safety
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
C. Ultimate stress/Proportional Limit
D. Yield point/Proportional Limit
Under theories of failure, the value of shear
stress is how many times that of the tensile
stress?
A. Four times
B. Half
C. Double
D. One-fourth
The theory of mechanics of material shows
that the result from the octahedral shear stress
theory and those from the maximum
distortion-energy theory are:
A. the same
B. less than
C. more than
D. not related
It is the distance measure auxiliary from a
point on one thread to the corresponding
point on an adjacent thread.
A. Axial pitch
B. Z-pitch
C. Lead
D. Lead angle
It is the angle between a tangent to the pitch
helix and plane normal to the axis of the screw.
A. Helix angle
B. Lead angle
C. Tangential angle
D. Vertical angle
It is suggested that the design factor on the
yield strength be about 1.5 for the smooth
load, about 2 to 2.25 for minor shock loading,
and up to _____ for sever shock loads,
especially when the loading reverses during
operation.
A. 4.5
B. 3.5
C. 3.0
D. 4.0
A typical hub length fall between:
A. 1.25D to 2.5D
B. 1.3D to 3.4D
C. 1.25D to 4.0D
D. D to 7.0D
A key that are square or flat and tapered with
head
86
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
A. Pin keys
B. Gib-head keys
C. Saddle keys
D. None of these
A key that may either straight of tapered. It is
usually a drive fit.
A. Pin keys
B. Gib-head keys
C. Saddle keys
D. None of these
A key with one several patented methods of
keying is driven or pressed into a hole that is
small enough to close the slit, assembled in
radial direction.
A. Fit key
B. Roll pin
C. Saddle key
D. Pin key
A key that allows the hub to move along the
shaft but prevents the rotation of the shaft.
A. Woodruff key
B. Gibs key
C. Feather key
D. Square key
For involute spline, the type of fits used:
A. Close fit
B. Sliding fit
C. Press fit
D. All of these
A coupling that transmits power via the
frictional forces induced by pulling the flange
toward each other over slotted tapered sleeves.
A. Flange coupling
B. Ribbed compression coupling
C. Rigid coupling
D. Flanged compression coupling
A coupling used for absorbing some shock and
vibration that may appear on one shaft and of
preventing the occurrence of reversed stresses
caused by the shaft deflecting at the coupling
preventing at the coupling.
A. Rigid coupling
B. Flange coupling
C. Flexible coupling
D. None of these
It is the difference in the radii of the bearing
and the journal.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
A. Even clearance
B. Clearance ratio
C. Fit clearance
D. Radial clearance
A bearing in which the radii of the journal and
the bearing are the same.
A. Fitted bearing
B. Full bearing
C. Partial bearing
D. Clearance bearing
What is the approximate length-to-diameter
ratio of hydrodynamic bearings?
A. 1
B. 4
C. 3
D. 2
The operating temperature of oil films in the
bearing must approximately:
A. 1400F to 1500F
B. 1400F to 1600F
C. 1200F to 1900F
D. 1200F to 1900F
At the higher temperatures, oil oxidizes more
rapidly above:
A. 1200F
B. 2000F
C. 1400F
D. 1600F
For thrust bearing, the special at moderate
operating condition is:
A. 50<Vm>200fpm
B. 50<Vm>250fpm
C. 50<Vm>220>fpm
D. 50<Vm>250fpm
If the ends are joined by wire lacing with
machine, the usual efficiency of joint is:
A. 100%
B. 75%
C. 85%
D. 88%
On high speed centrifugal blowers, it has been
observed that the arc of contact is reduced
from 1800 at rest to _____ in motion.
A. 1000
B. 900
C. 950
D. 1100
94. The recommended net belt pull for rubber belt
is:
A. 11.34lb/ply per inch of width
B. 13.75lb/ply per inch of width
C. 16.35lb/ply per inch of width
D. 20.34lb/ply per inch of width
95. For minimum quietness, use sprockets with
_____ or more teeth.
A. 21
B. 23
C. 25
D. 27
96. If two intersecting shafts are to be belt
connected _____ guide pulleys are to be used.
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
97. Wire ropes are made from cold-drawn with
_____ or more teeth.
A. 21
B. 23
C. 25
D. 27
98. A wire rope that the wires and strands are
twisted in the opposite direction.
A. Long lay
B. Perform
C. Regular lay
D. Lang lay
99. A wire rope that the wires and strand are
twisted in the same direction.
A. Long lay
B. Perform
C. Regular lay
D. Lang lay
100. Which of the following ropes is used for
haulage, rigging, and guard rails?
A. 6 x 35 IWRC
B. 6 x 15 IWRC
C. 7 x 8 IWRC
D. 7 x 7 IWRC
ELEMENTS 19
1.
Which of the following ropes is used for lines,
hawsers, overhead cranes, and hoist?
A. 6 x 37 IWRC
87
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B. 6 x 35 IWRC
C. 6 x 25 IWRC
D.7 x 26 IWRC
The regular materials for wire ropes are made
of?
A. chromium
B. wrought iron
C. cast steel
D. high-carbon iron
What is the minimum suggested design factor
of wire ropes for miscellaneous hoisting
equipment is?
A. 2
B. 3
C. 5
D.4
To avoid excessive wear rate the recommended
limiting pressure for 6 x 19 ropes is
___________for cast steel.
A. 700 psi
B. 900 psi
C. 1000 psi
D.1200 psi
5. To avoid excessive wear rate the
recommended limiting pressure for 6 x 19
ropes is ___________for manganese cast steel.
A. 2500 psi
B. 2000 psi
C. 3000 psi
D.2300 psi
What friction device that are used to connect
shafts?
A. clutches
B. spring
C. brakes
D.holders
The total frictional energy that is stored in the
brake parts principally in the drum or disk is
approximately?
A. 56% up
B. 90% up
C. 86% up
D.75% up
The brake capacity to absorb energy is known
as?
A. energy
B. power
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
C. resistance brake
D. centrifugal brake
a kind of braking system such that if the band
wraps partly around the brake drum and the
braking action is obtained by pulling the band
tight into the wheel.
A. block brake
B. clutch
C. band brake
D.centrifugal brake
Which of the following clutches that has a
disadvantage of heavier rotating masses?
A. multiple disc clutch
B. cone clutch
C. disc clutch
D.tin clutching
Which of the following welds have been
considered as resistance weld which is usually
round in the same dorm as the electrodes that
press the sheet together?
A. edge joints
B. spot welds
C. CIG welds
D.TIG welds
A welding which consist of short lengths ( 2-3
long ) of welds with space between as 6 inches
on centers.
A. intermittent weld
B. spot weld
C. MIG weld
D.TIG weld
A welding operation that use hot flame and
metal rod.
A. gas welding
B. arc welding
C. resistance welding
D.automatic welding
The arc is covered with a welding composition
and bare electrode wire is fed automatically.
A. resistance welding
B. induction welding
C. submerged welding
D.spot welding
What is the recommended coefficient of
fluctuation pf flywheels for punching, shearing,
pressing machine is?
A. 0.005-0.1
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
B. 0.002
C. 0.03-0.05
D.0.01-0.03
The part of machine that absorbs the energy
delivered by a sharp force or blow.
A. spring
B. anvil
C. brakes
D.flywheel
It is the friction of wheel inclination from the
vertical position.
A. camber
B. toe-in
C. caster
D.king pin inclination
Which of the following is a machine which
takes large quantities of raw or finished
materials and binds them with a rope or metal
straps or wires into a large package?
A. bacher
B. bending machine
C. baler
D.automatic screw machine
It is the grasping of an outside work piece in a
chunk or a jawed device in a lathe.
A. clucking
B. clamping
C. chucking
D.clam shelling
Which of the following is a mechanical linkage
or mechanism that can turn about a center or
rotation?
A. oscillation
B. crank
C. coupler
D.drag link
What type of compound screw which produces
a motion equal to the difference in motion
between the two component screws?
A. machine screw
B. tanden screw
C. differential screw
D.variable screw
Which of the following bolts provided with a
hole at one end instead of usual head?
A. stud bolt
B. eye bolt
88
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
C. machine bolt
D.stove bolt
What operation generally carried out to divide
the parent coiled sheet into narrow coils?
A. slotting
B. squeezing
C. squaring
D.slitting
It is the process used to form shallow, round,
raised recessed troughs of uniform width in a
straight curved or circular form.
A. hemming
B. beading
C. embossing
D.buldging
The process of removing excess metal from the
edge of a strip to make it suitable for drawing
without wrinkling or to obtain final
complicated shape which was not directly
possible by blanking.
A. lancing
B. slugging
C. notching
D.trimming
Which of the following is the process of
removing course scratches or toll marks?
A. polishing
B. buffing
C. honing
D.lapping
Which of the following ropes is galvanized and
consists of 6 strands, 7 wires each and a hemp
core?
A. reverse lay rope
B. guy rope
C. lang lay rope
D.regular rope
It is a large lathe used for turning and boring
cannons.
A. gun lathe
B. engine lathe
C. cannon lathe
D.turret lathe
What device on the lathe machine used for
carrying the revolving spindle?
A. head stock
B. header
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
C. head suction
D.none of these
If the faced-centered cubic lattice is compared
with the hexagonal closed-packed lattice, which
of the following features describes the
hexagonal closed-packed structure only?
A. it has the closest packed lattice structure
B. its coordination number is 2
C. its deformation properties are more
directional
D.its stacking order is reversed
In molecules of the same composition, what
are variations of atomic arrangements known
as?
A. polymers
B. monomers
C. isomers
D.crystal system
Which of the following statements is not true
regarding X-ray diffraction?
A. the geometrical structure factor F(h, k, l) is
the ratio of the amplitude of the X-ray
B. reflected from a plane in a crystal to the
amplitude of the X-ray scattered from a single
electron
C. X-ray diffraction is only useful for studying
simpler crystal such as the body centered
cubic structure rather than more complex
crystals like the hexagonal closed packed
structure
D.X-ray diffraction can be used to determine
the gain size of a specimen
Which of the following describes diffusion in a
crystal structure?
A. it is not possible
B. it occurs only in alloys, never in pure crystals
C. it often uses an exchange or vacancy
mechanism
D.it occurs primarily as a result of mechanical
work
Which of the following does not produce
vacancies interstitial defects, or impurity
defects in a material?
A. plastic deformation
B. quenching
C. slow equilibrium cooling
D.irradiation with high energy particles
35. Which of the following are true statements
about the modulus of elasticity, E?
A. it is the same as the rupture modulus
B. it is the slope of the stress-strain diagram in
the linearly elastic region
C. it is the ratio of stress to volumetric strain
D.its value depends only on the temperature of
the material
36. In general, what are the effects of cold-working
a metal?
A. increase strength and ductility
B. decrease strength and ductility
C. increased strength, decreased
D.decreased strength, increased ductility
37. Which of the following does cold-working
cause?
A. elongation of grains in the flow direction,
an increase in dislocation density, and over all
increase in energy of the metal
B. elongation of grains in the flow direction, a
decrease in dislocation density, over all
decrease in energy of the metal
C. elongation of grains in the flow direction, a
decrease in dislocation density, and over all
increase in energy of the metal
D.shortening of grains in the flow direction, a
decrease in dislocation density, over all
decrease in energy of the metal
38. Which of the following statement is false?
A. the amount or percentage of cold work
cannot be obtained from information about
change in the area of thickness of a metal
B. the process of applying force to metal at
temperature below the temperature of
crystallization in order to plastically deform the
metal is called cold-working
C. annealing eliminates most of the defects
caused by the cold working of a metal
D.annealing reduces the hardness of a metal
39. Which of the following statement is false?
A. there is considerable increase in the
hardness and the strength of a cold-worked
metal
B. cold-working a metal significantly reduces its
ductility
C. cold-working causes a slight decrease in the
density and electrical conductivity of a metal
89
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
D.cold work decreases the yield point as well
as the strength and hardness of the metal
Which of the following correctly describes
atoms located at grain boundaries?
A. they are subjected to the same type of inter
atomic forces that are presented in the interior
atoms of the crystals
B. they are located primarily in highly strained
and distorted positions
C. they have a higher free energy than atoms in
the undisturbed part of the crystal lattice
D.all of the above
For a completely corrosion-resistant stainless
steel, what minimum percentage of chromium
in the alloy is required?
A. 1.1%
B. 8.3% C. 3.2% D. 11%
Modulus of resilience is?
A. the same as the modulus of elasticity
B. a measure of a materials ability to store
strain energy
C. the reciprocal of the modulus of elasticity
D.a measure of the deflection of a member
When a metal is cold worked all of the
following generally occur EXCEPT:
A. Recystallization temperature decrease.
B. Ductility decreases
C. Grains become equi-axed
D.Tensile strength increases
Which of the following affects most of the
electrical and thermal properties of materials?
A. the atomic weight expressed in grams per
gram atom
B. the electrons, particularly the outermost
ones
C. the magnitude of electrical charge of the
protons
D.the weight of the atoms
Which of the following is not a method of
non-destructive testing of steel casting and
forgings?
A. radiography
B. ultrasonic
C. magnetic particle
D. chemical analysis
Compressive strength of fully cured concrete is
most directly related to:
A. sand-gravel
B. aggregate gradation
C. water-cement ratio
D.absolute volume of cement
47. According to the ACI code, the modular ratio,
n, of structural concrete with a
28—day ultimate compressive strength, for, of
3000 is nearest to:
A. 7
B. 9
C. 8
D. 10
48. What are valence electrons?
A. the outer shell electrons
B. electrons with positive charge
C. the electrons of the complete quantum
shells
D.the K-quantum shell electrons
49. Which of this not a viscoelastic material?
A. Plastic
B. rubber C. metal D. glass
50. Which of the following statements is false?
A. Both copper and aluminum have a facecentered crystal structure.
B. Both magnesium and zinc have a hexagonal
close-packed crystal structure
C. Iron can have either a face-centered or a
body centered cubic crystal structure.
D.
Both lead and cadmium have a
hexagonal close-packed crystal structure.
51. Past ME Board Question
Cutting lubricant used in drilling reaming, and
tapping for brass and bronze.
A. Dry
B. Soda water
C. Soluble oil
D.Turpentine
52. Past ME Board Question
Type of bolt commonly used in the
construction that is threaded in both ends.
A. Acme threaded bolts
B. Hex bolt
C. Square threaded
D. Stud bolt
53. Past ME Board Question
Forces that meet a common point are called:
A. Co-linear
B. Concurrent
C. Coplanar
D. Couple
54. Past ME Board Question
Dynamic seals are also known as
A.
Gasket
B.
Packing
C.
Seal
D.
Shield
55. Past ME Board Question
The material for engine radiation is usually
made of:
A. Admiralty brass
B. Navy brass
C. Silicon brass
D. Yellow brass
56. Past ME Board Question
Mirror finish has surfaces fitness of
__________ rms.
A. 1
B.1 to 3
C. 2 to 5
D. 2 to 8
57. Past Me Board Question
Non- metallic material of high melting
temperature being used as furnace lining is
called:
A. Dolomite clay bricks
B. Quartz bricks
C. Refractories
D. Silica sand
58. Past ME Board Question
In greater quantity, this element is harmful to
the molten ferrous metal.
A. Aluminum B. oxides C. silicon D. sulfur
59. Past ME Board Question
What is the SAE specification number of
molybdenum?
A. SAE 2XXX
B. SAE 3XXX
C. SAE 4XXX
D. SAE 5XXX
60. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following is not a structural class of
steel?
A. high carbon
B. high speed steel
C. low carbon
D. tool and die
61. Past ME Board Question
A furnace used in melting non-ferrous metals called.
A. crucible furnace
B. cupola furnace
C. induction furnace
D. tempering furnace
90
62. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following elements when large
quantity is harmful to the ferrous metal?
A. aluminum
B. silicon
C. sulphur
D. zinc
63. Past ME Board Question
SAE metal that responds to heat treatment:
A. SAE 1117
B. SAE 1060
C. SAE 1030
D. SAE 1020
64. Past ME Board Question
An iron in which most of the carbon is chemically
combined with the iron called:
A. cast iron
B. gray iron
C. malleable iron
D. white iron
65. Past ME Board Question
Material, usually ceramics employed where
resistance to very high temperature is required as for
furnace linings and metal melting pots called:
A. bricks
B. clay
C. insulator
D. refractories
66. Past ME Board Question
Polyesters belong to the group of:
A. phenolics
B. Teflon
C. thermoplastic plastics
D. thermosetting plastics
67. Past ME Board Question
The process commonly used over thermo plastic
material is:
A. cold forming
B. dies casting
C. injection molding
D. shell molding
68. Past ME Board Question
The hardness of steel increase if it contains:
A.
austenite
B.
copper
C.
pearlite
D.
martensite
69. Past ME Board Question
Which one is different from the remaining?
A. cyaniding
B. electroplating
C. flame hardening
D. nitriding
70. Past ME Board Question
An engineer’s hammer is made of:
A. cast iron
B. B forged steel
C. high speed steel
D. mild steel
71. Past ME Board Question
Ductile fracture is characterized by:
A. appreciable plastic deformation prior to
propagation of crack
B. fragmentation into more than two pieces
C. negligible deformation
D. rapid rate for crack propagation
72. Past ME Board Question
A scriber is made of:
A. carbon steel
B. cold rolled steel
C. hot rolled steel
D. tool steel
73. Past ME Board Question
Knurling is done to:
A. polish material
B. roughen material
C. sharpen the material
D. smooth material
74. Past ME Board Question
Non-metallic materials of high melting temperature
used in the construction of furnaces, crucibles and
so forth are called:
A. ceramics
B. grate
C. insulators
D. refractories
75. Past ME Board Question
It is a process by which a hot plastic metal is made
to flow into dies by the application of sudden blows
to the material.
A. drop forging
B. extrusion
C. machine forging
D. press forging
76. Past ME Board Question
It is one in which specimen, supported at both ends
as a simple beam, and is broken by the impact
strength of the metal.
A. charpy test
B. izod test
C. Rockwell test
D. universal test
77. Past ME Board Question
An operation to make smaller hole in exact center
for lathe center
A. broaching
B. central drilling
C. counter boring
D. reaming
78. Past ME Board Question
It is a process of cleaning the face of grinding wheel
by means of a dresser for removing the glazing and
loading of wheel and to improve the cutting action
of a wheel.
A. dressing
B. lapping
C. polishing
D. truing
79. Past ME Board Question
A ____________ consist of a slide and a swivel vise
mounted on the compound rest in place of the toll
post.
A. grinding attachment
B. milling attachment
C. reaming attachment
D. relieving attachment
80. Past ME Board Question
The distance between the crest and the base of the
thread measured perpendicular to the axis.
A. axis of thread
B. depth of engagement
C. depth of thread
D. length of engagement
81. Past ME Board Question
Name of mechanism, which a welding operator
holds during gas welding and at the end of which
the gases are burned to perform the various gas
welding operation.
A. hose
B. gage
C. switch
91
D. torch
82. Past ME Board Question
A hand tool used to measure engine crank web
deflection.
A. compound gage
B. dial gage
C. distortion gage
D. feeler gage
83. Past ME Board Question
It is used for cutting long pieces of metals.
A. broaching machine
B. planer
C. power saw
D. shaper
84. Past ME Board Question
It is used to true and align machine tools, fixtures
and works.
A. dial gage
B. dial indicator
C. feeler gage
D. radial indicator
85. Past ME Board Question
In cranes and other hoisting equipment operating
rules, how many whistle signals are required to
lower the boom?
A. Five short blasts
B. Two short blasts
C. Three short blasts
D. Four short blasts
86. Past ME Board Question
Which of the following material has 66% nickel,
29% copper and 3% aluminum?
A. K Monel
B. Monel
C. inconel
D. inconel
87. Past ME Board Question
Trimming is a process associated with?
A. electroplating
B. forging
C. machining of metals
D. press work
88. Past ME Board Question
Foundry crucible is made of?
A. German silver
B. graphite
C. lead
D. mild steel
89. Past ME Board Question
A twist drill is specified by
A. its diameter and lip angle
B. it shank and diameter
C. shank, material and diameter
D. shank, material and flute size
90. Past ME Board Question
Select the one that is gear finishing process.
A. gear hobbling
B. gear milling
C. gear shaping
D. gear shaving
91. Past ME Board Question
Broaching operation is generally used in automobile
industry as:
A. it is a mass production machine
B. it is an automatic machine
C. operation is completed in one stroke
D. semi-skilled operators can be employed
92. Which statement about area moment of inertia
is false?
A. I = ∫ d² ( dA )
B. the area moment of inertia arises
whenever the magnitude of the surface
forces varies linearly with distance
C. the moment of inertia of a large area is
equal to the summation of the inertia of
the smaller areas within the large area.
D. the area closest to the axis of interest is
the most significant
93. Which of the following affects most of the
electrical and thermal properties of materials?
A. The atomic weight expressed in grams per
gram atom.
B. the electrons, particularly the outermost
ones
C. the magnitude of electrical charge of the
protons
D. the weight of the atoms
94. Which of the following is not a method of non
destructive testing of steel castings and
forgings?
A. radiography
B. ultrasonic
C. magnetic particle
D. chemical analysis
95. compressive strength of fully cured concrete is
most directly related to:
A. sand-gravel
B. aggregate gradation
C. water-cement ratio
D. absolute volume of cement
96. According to the ACI code, the modular ratio,
n, of structural concrete with a 28- day ultimate
compressive strength, fc, of 3000 is nearest to:
A. 7
B. 6
C. 9
D. 10
97. What are valence electrons?
A. the outer shell electrons
B. electrons with positive charge
C. the electrons of the complete quantum
shells
D. the K- quantum shell electrons
98. What is the strong bond between hydrogen
atoms known as?
A. the ionic bond
B. the metallic bond
C. ionic and metallic bond
D. the covalent bond
99. all of the following statements about air
entrained concrete are correct, EXCEPT:
A. air entrained is recommended when
concrete is severe frost action
B. with air entrainment, the quantity of
water to produce a given consistency
(slump) is reduced
C. with air entrainment, the quantity of
water to produce a specified 28 day
compressive strength is reduced
D. air entrainment reduces resistance to the
freeze-thaw that occurs when salt is used
to melt ice or snow
100. In the design of a reinforced concrete
structure, tensile strength of the concrete is
normally:
A. assumed to be 1/10 of the 28- day
compressive strength
B. determined by beam test
C. neglected
D. assumed to be 200 psi
ELEMENTS 2
1.
All of the following groups of plastics are
thermoplastic, EXCEPT:
A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) and polyvinyl acetate
92
B.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A.
Polyethylene, polypropylene, and polysterene
Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon, and other
fluorocarbons)
D. Phenolics, melamine and epoxy
Which of the following statements is false?
A. Ceramics are inorganic-nonmetallic solids that
are processed or used at high temperature.
B. Metals are chemical elements that form
substances that are opaque, lustrous, and good
conductors of heat and electricity.
C. Oxides, carbides, and nitrides are considered
to be within the class of materials known as
glasses.
D. Most metals are strong, ductile, and malleable.
In general, they are heavier than most other
substances.
Which of the following is not a viscoelastic
material?
A. Plastic
B. Rubber
C. Metal
D. Glass
In molecules of the same composition, what are
variations of atomic arrangements known as?
A. Polymers
B. Monomers
C. Isomers
D. Crystal system
What is the atomic packing factor for a simple
cubic crystal?
A. 0.48
B. 0.52
C. 0.75
D. 0.58
Which of the following statements is false?
A. Both copper and aluminum have a facecentered crystal structures.
B. Both magnesium and zinc have a hexagonal
close-packed crystal structure.
C. Iron can have either a face-centered or a bodycentered cubic crystal structure.
D. Both lead and cadmium have a hexagonal
close-packed crystal structure.
Which crystal structure possesses the highest
number of close-packed planes and close-packed
direction?
Simple cubic
B.
C.
D.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Face-centered cubic
Body-centered
Close-packed hexagonal
What are most common slip planes for facecentered cubic and body-centered cubic structures,
respectively?
A. Face-centered: (111), body-centered: (110)
B. Face-centered: (100), body-centered: (110)
C. Face-centered: (110), body-centered: (111)
D. Face-centered: (111), body-centered: (100)
Entrance losses between tank and pipe or losses
through elbows, fittings and valves are generally
expressed as functions of:
A. Kinetic energy
B. Friction factor
C. Pipe diameter
D. Volume flow rate
With regard to corrosion of metals, passivation is
the process that:
A. Intensifies deterioration temporarily
B. Inhibits further deterioration
C. Changes the composition of the metal
D. Alter the grain size of the metal
How are lines of constant pressure in a fluid related
to the force field?
A. They are parallel to the force field.
B. They are perpendicular to the force field.
C. They are at 45° angles to the force field.
D. They are perpendicular only to the force of
gravity.
What are the units of Reynolds number of pipe
flow?
A. m/s
B. lbm/ft-sec²
C. ft²/sec
D. none of the above
For fully developed laminar flow of fluids through
pipes, the average velocity is what fraction of the
maximum velocity in the pipe?
A. 1/8
B. 1/2
C. 1/4
D. 3/4
For a system to be n equilibrium, the sum of the
external forces acting on the system must be:
A. Equal to unity
B. A maximum
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
C. Indeterminate
D. Zero
The mass moment of inertia of a cylinder about its
central axis perpendicular to a circular cross section
is:
A. Directly proportional to its radius
B. Independent of its radius
C. Directly proportional to its length
D. Independent of its length
How many independent properties are required to
completely fix the equilibrium state of a pure
gaseous compound?
A. 0
B. 2
C. 1
D. 3
The moment of inertia of any plane figure can be
expressed in units of length to the:
A. First power
B. Second power
C. Third power
D. Fourth power
The vector which represents the sum of a group of
force vectors is called the:
A. Magnitude
B. Resultant
C. Sum
D. Phase angle
Which of the following is not a vector quantity?
A. Velocity
B. Speed
C. Acceleration
D. Displacement
The stress in an elastic material is:
A. Inversely proportional to the material’s yield
strength
B. Inversely proportional to the force acting
C. Proportional to the displacement of the
material acted upon by the force
D. Inversely proportional to the strain
The “SLENDERNESS RATIO” of a column is
generally defined as the ratio of its:
A. Length to its minimum width
B. Unsupported length to its maximum radius of
gyration
C. Length to its moment of inertia
93
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
D. Unsupported length to its least radius of
gyration
The relationship between the extension of a spring
and the force required to produce the extension is:
A. F= ma
B. F= µN
C. F= mv²/ R
D. F= kx
The linear portion of the stress-strain diagram of
steel is known as the:
A. Modulus of elongation
B. Plastic range
C. Irreversible range
D. Elastic range
Principal stresses occur on those planes:
A. Where the shearing stress is zero
B. Which are 45 degrees apart
C. Where the shearing is a maximum
D. Which are subjected only to tension
The ratio of the moment inertia of the cross section
of a beam to the section modulus is:
A. Equal to the radius of gyration
B. Equal to the area of the cross section
C. A measure of distance
D. Multiplied by the bending moment to
determine the stress
When an air entertainment agent is introduced into
a concrete mix:
A. The strength will increase
B. The strength will decrease
C. The strength will not be affected
D. The water/ cement ratio must be reduced from
10-15%
Structural steel elements subjected to torsion
develop:
A. Tensile stress
B. Compressive stress
C. Shearing stress
D. Bending stress
The deflection of a beam is:
A. Directly proportional to the modulus of
elasticity and moment of inertia
B. Inversely proportional to the modulus of
elasticity and length of the beam cubed]
C. Inversely proportional to the modulus of
elasticity and moment of inertia
D. Inversely proportional to the weight and length
29. The differential of the shear equation is which one
of the following:
A. Load on the beam
B. Tensile strength of beam
C. Bending moment of the beam
D. Slope of the elastic curve
30. A vertically loaded beam, fixed at one end and
simply supported at the other is indeterminate to
what degree?
A. First
B. Second
C. Third
D. Fourth
31. A thin walled pressurized vessel consists of a right
circular cylinder with flat ends. Midway between the
ends, the stress is greatest in what direction?
A. Longitudinal
B. Circumferential
C. Radial
D. At an angle 45° to the longitudinal and
circumferential direction
32. The bending moment at a section of a beam is
derived from the:
A. Sum of the moments of all external forces on
one side of the section
B. Difference between the moments on the side
of the section and the opposite side
C. Sum of the moments of all external forces on
both sides of the section
D. Sum of the moments of all external forces
between supports
33. The stress concentration factor:
A. Is a ratio of the average stress on a section to
the allowable stress
B. Cannot be evaluated for brittle materials
C. Is the ratio of areas involved in an sudden
change of cross section
D. Is the ratio of the maximum stress produced
in a cross section to the average stress over the
section
34. Poisson’s Ratio is the ratio of the:
A. Unit lateral deformation to the unit
longitudinal deformation
B. Unit stress to unit strain
C. Shear strain to compressive strain
D. Elastic limit to proportional limit
35. Hooke’s Law for an isotropic homogeneous
medium experiencing on-dimensional stress is:
A. Stress= E (strain)
B. (Force)(area)= (change in length)/ (length)
C. Strain= E (stress)
D. Force/Area= length/ change in length
36. The modulus of rigidity of a steel member is:
A. A function of the length and depth
B. Defined as the unit shear stress divided by the
unit shear deformation
C. Equal to the modulus of elasticity divided by
one plus Poisson’s ratio
D. Defined as the length divided by the moment
of inertia
37. A thin homogeneous metallic plate containing a
hole is heated sufficiently to cause expansion. If the
coefficient of surface expansion is linear, the area of
the hole will:
A. Increase at twice the rate, the area of the metal
increases
B. Increase at the same rate as the area of the
metal increases
C. Decrease at twice the rate as the area of the
metal increases
D. Decrease at the same rate as the area of the
metal increases
38. The linear portion of the stress- strain diagram of
steel is known as the:
A. Modulus of elasticity
B. Irreversible range
C. Plastic range
D. Elastic range
39. In a long column (slenderness ratio>160 which of
the following has the greatest influence on its
tendency to buckle under a compressive load.
A. The modulus of elasticity of the material
B. The compressive strength of the material
C. The radius of gyration of the column
D. The length of the column
40. The area of the shear diagram of a beam between
any two points on the beam is equal to the:
A. Change in shear between the two points
B. Total shear beyond the two points
C. Average moment between the two point
D. Change in moment between the two points
41. Poisson’s ratio is principally used in:
94
A.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
The determination of the capability of a
material for being shaped
B. The determination of capacity of a material
C. Stress- strain relationships where stresses are
applied in more than one direction
D. The determination of the modulus of
toughness
Young’s modulus of elasticity for a material can be
calculated indirectly from which of the following
properties of the material?
A. Temperature coefficient of expansion and
dielectric constant
B. Temperature coefficient of expansion and
specific heat
C. Density and velocity of sound in the material
D. Density and inter- atomic spacing in the
material
. Which of the following is the definition of Joule?
A. A unit of power
B. A kg m/s²
C. A Newton meter
D. A rate of change of energy
Which of the following metals has the highest
specific heat capacity at 100°C?
A. Aluminum
B. Copper
C. Bismuth
D. Iron
Which of the following is a member of the halogen
family?
A. Sodium
B. Hydrogen chloride
C. Fluorine
D. Phosphorus
Which of the following metals is the best heat
conductor?
A. Aluminum
B. Gold
C. Copper
D. Silver
When exposed to the atmosphere, which of the
following liquids is coldest?
A. Oxygen
B. Nitrogen
C. Argon
D. Helium
Power may be expressed in units of:
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
A. ft-lbs
B. HP- hours
C. BTU/hr
D. kw-hours
Which of the following is not a unit of work?
A. N.m
B. kg.m²/s²
C. erg
D. dyne
Which of the following statement about entropy is
FALSE?
A. Entropy of a mixture is greater than that of its
components under the same conditions.
B. An irreversible process increases entropy of the
universe.
C. Entropy has the units of heat capacity.
D. Entropy of a crystal at 0°F is zero.
Work or energy can be a function of all of the
following EXCEPT:
A. Force and distance
B. Power and time
C. Torque and angular rotation
D. Force and time
What is the combination of one or more metals
with a nonmetallic element?
A. Metalloid
B. Matrix composite
C. Inert
D. Ceramic
What do you call an atom that has lost or gain an
electron?
A. Ion
B. Cation
C. Hole
D. Neutron
Polymer comes from Greek words “poly” which
means “many” and “meros” which means _______.
A. Metal
B. Material
C. Part
D. Plastic
The engineering materials known as “plastics” are
more correctly called _______.
A. Polyvinyl chloride
B. Polymers
C. Polyethylene
D. Mers
56. What is a combination of two or more materials
that has properties that the components materials
do not have by themselves?
A. Compound
B. Composite
C. Mixture
D. Matrix
57. What is a reference sheet for the elements that can
be used to form engineering materials?
A. Periodic table
B. Truth table
C. Building blocks of Materials
D. Structure of Materials
58. Who has been accepted as the author of the
periodic table which was developed by chemists in
the mid-nineteenth century?
A. Vickers
B. Knoop
C. Rockwell
D. Mendeleev
59. What physical property of a material that refers to
the point at which a material liquefies on heating or
solidifies on cooling?
A. Melting point
B. Curie point
C. Refractive index
D. Specific heat
60. What physical property of a material that refers to
the temperature at which ferromagnetic materials
can no longer be magnetized by outside forces?
A. Melting point
B. Thermal conductivity
C. Thermal expansion
D. Curie point
61. What is the ratio of the velocity of light in a vacuum
to its velocity in another material?
A. Refractive index
B. Poisson ratio
C. Density
D. Mach number
62. What physical property of a material refers to the
amount of weight gain (%) experienced in a
polymer after immersion in water for a specified
length of time under a controlled environment?
A. Dielectric strength
B. Electric resistivity
C. Water absorption
95
D. Thermal conductivity
63. What physical property of a material that refers to
the rate of heat flow per unit time in a
homogeneous material under steady-state
conditions, per unit area, per unit temperature
gradient in a direction perpendicular to area?
A. Thermal expansion
B. Thermal conductivity
C. Heat distortion
D. Water absorption
64. What is the absolute value of the ratio of the
transverse strain to the corresponding axial strain in
a body subjected to an axial stress?
A. Poisson’s ratio
B. Euler’s ratio
C. Refractive index
D. Dielectric index
65. What physical property of a material refers to the
highest potential difference (voltage) that an
insulating material of given thickness can withstand
for a specified time without occurrence of electrical
breakdown through its bulk?
A. Thermal expansion
B. Conductivity
C. Dielectric strength
D. Electrical resistivity
66. What physical property of a material refers to the
ratio of the amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of a unit mass of a substance 1 degree
to the heat required to raise the same mass of water
to 1 degree?
A. Specific heat
B. Latent heat
C. Heat of fusion
D. Heat of fission
67. What physical property of a material refers to the
temperature at which a polymer under a specified
load shows a specified amount of deflection?
A. Curie temperature
B. Specific heat
C. Heat distortion temperature
D. Thermal conductivity
68. What mechanical property of a material refers to
the nominal stress at fracture in a tension test at
constant load and constant temperature?
A. Creep strength
B. Stress rapture strength
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
C. Compressive yield strength
D. Hardness
What mechanical property of a material refers to
the resistance to plastic deformation?
A. Rigidity
B. Plasticity
C. Ductility
D. Hardness
What typical penetrator is used in Brinell hardness
test?
A. 10mm ball
B. 120° diamond (brale)
C. 1.6 mm diameter ball
D. 20° needle
What parameter is defined as the temperature at
which the toughness of the material drops below
some predetermined value, usually 15 ft-lb?
A. Nil ductility temperature
B. Curie temperature
C. Thermal conductivity
D. Heat distortion temperature
What is obtained by repeatedly loading a specimen
at given stress levels until it fails?
A. Elastic limit
B. Endurance limit or fatigue strength of
material
C. Creep
D. All of the choices
What dimensional property of a material refers to
the deviation from edge straightness?
A. Lay
B. Out of flat
C. Camber
D. Waviness
What dimensional property of a material refers to a
wavelike variation from a perfect surface, generally
much wider in spacing and higher in amplitude
than surface roughness?
A. Lay
B. Waviness
C. Surface finish
D. Out of flat
Wood is composed of chains of cellulose molecules
bonded together by another natural polymer called
__________.
A. Plastic
B. Lignin
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
C. Mer
D. Additive
What is a polymer production process that involves
forming a polymer chain containing two different
monomers?
A. Copolymerization
B. Blending
C. Alloying
D. Cross-linking
What is the generic name of a class of polymer
which is commercially known as “nylon”?
A. Polyacetals
B. Polyamide
C. Cellulose
D. Polyester
By definition, a rubber is a substance that has at
least________ elongation in tensile test and is
capable of returning rapidly and forcibly to its
original dimensions when load is removed.
A. 100%
B. 150%
C. 200%
D. 250%
What is a method of forming polymer sheets or
films into three-dimensional shapes, in which the
sheet is clamped on the edge, heated until it softens
and sags, drawn in contact with the mold by
vacuum, and cooled while still in contact with the
mold?
A. Calendering
B. Blow molding
C. Thermoforming
D. Solid phase forming
What is a process of forming continuous shapes by
forcing a molten polymer through a metal die?
A. Calendering
B. Thermoforming
C. Lithography
D. Extrusion
What chemical property of a material which refers
to its ability to resist deterioration by chemical or
electrochemical reactions with environment?
A. Stereo specificity
B. Corrosion resistance
C. Conductivity
D. Electrical resistance
96
82. What refers to the tendency for polymers and
molecular materials to form with an ordered,
spatial, three- dimensional arrangement of
monomer molecules?
A. Stereo specificity
B. Conductivity
C. Retentivity
D. Spatial configuration
83. What is the ratio of the maximum load in a tension
test to the original cross- sectional area of the test
bar?
A. Tensile strength
B. Yield strength
C. Shear strength
D. Flexural strength
84. What is the ratio of stress to strain in a material
loaded within its elastic range?
A. Poisson’s ratio
B. Refractive index
C. Modulus of elasticity
D. Percent elongation
85. What is a measure of rigidity?
A. Stiffness
B. Hardness
C. Strength
D. Modulus of elasticity
86. The greatest stress which a material is capable of
withstanding without a deviation from acceptable of
stress to strain is called ________.
A. Elongation
B. Proportional limit
C. Yield point
D. Elastic limit
87. What refers to the stress at which a material exhibits
a specified deviation from proportionality of stress
and strain?
A. Tensile strength
B. Shear strength
C. Yield strength
D. Flexural strength
88. What is the amount of energy required to fracture a
given volume of material?
A. Impact strength
B. Endurance limit
C. Creep strength
D. Stress rupture strength
89. What mechanical property of material which is a
time-dependent permanent strain under stress?
A. Elongation
B. Elasticity
C. Creep
D. Rupture
90. In tensile testing, the increase in the gage length
measured after the specimen fractures within the
gage length is called _________.
A. Percent elongation
B. Creep
C. Elasticity
D. Elongation
91. What is the resistance of a material to plastic
deformation?
A. Hardness
B. Stiffness
C. Creepage
D. Rigidity
92. What is the maximum stress below which a material
can theoretically endure an infinite number of stress
cycles?
A. Endurance state
B. Endurance test
C. Endurance limit
D. Endurance strength
93. What is a substance that attracts piece of iron?
A. Conductor
B. Semiconductor
C. Magnet
D. All of the choices
94. Which of the following is a natural magnet?
A. Steel
B. Magnesia
C. Lodestone
D. Soft iron
95. Which of the following materials has permeability
slightly less than that of free space?
A. Paramagnetic materials
B. Non-magnetic materials
C. Ferromagnetic materials
D. Diamagnetic materials
96. What materials has permeabilities slighter greater
than that of free space?
A. Paramagnetic materials
B. Non-magnetic materials
C. Ferromagnetic materials
D. Diamagnetic materials
97. Which of the following materials have very high
permeabilities?
A. Paramagnetic materials
B. Non-magnetic materials
C. Ferromagnetic materials
D. Diamagnetic materials
98. What is defined by ASTM as a material that
contains as an essential ingredient an organic
substance of large molecular weight, is solid in its
finished state, and at some stage in its manufactured
or in its processing into finished articles, can be
shaped by flow?
A. Metal
B. Metalloid
C. Plastic
D. Ceramic
99. Some polymetric materials such as epoxies are
formed by strong primary chemical bonds called
_________.
A. Metallic bond
B. Vander Waals bond
C. Cross linking
D. Covalent bond
100. What do you call a polymer without additives and
without bending with another polymer?
A. Homopolymer
B. Ethenic polymer
C. Polyethylene
D. Copolymer
101. Steels that are used for axles, gears, and similar parts
are requiring medium to high hardness and high
strength are known as?
A. Medium – carbon steels
B. Very high – carbon steels
C. Low – carbon steels
D. High – carbon steels
102. What method used to determine the reactions on
continuous beams?
A. Two-moment equations
B. Three-moment equations
C. Second moment equations
D. Third moment equations
103. Which of the following is the measure of torsional
stress?
A. Accuracy
B. Rigidity
97
C. Stiffness
D. Rigidity
104. It is a type of coil where the helical coil is wrapped
into a circle forming an annual ring.
A. Volute spring
B. Hair spring
C. Motor spring
D. Garter spring
105. What type of compound screw which produces a
motion equal to the difference in motion between
the two component screws?
A. Machine Screw
B. Tanden Screw
C. Differential Screw
D. Variable Screw
98